- Industrial & lab equipment
- Electrical equipment & supplies
- Power conditioning
- Power adapters & inverters
- Mitsubishi Electric
- FR-A700 Series
- Manual
advertisement
▼
Scroll to page 2
of
103
INVERTER Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Nagoya Works is a factory certified for ISO14001 (standards for environmental management systems) and ISO9001 (standards for quality assurance management systems). EC97J1113 [Highest level of inverter] •Advanced driving performance makes it possible to support a wide range of applications from variable-speed applications such as conveyance and chemical machines to line control applications such as winding machines and printing machines. •Adoption of long life parts ensures more reliable operation. •The reliable life diagnosis function notifies the maintenance time. •It is compatible with CC-Link communication, SSCNET and other major overseas networks. The inverter can be controlled or monitored via network from the controller. •Noise measures are available without an option. Harmonic currents technique is available with a new type reactor. ¥ Features ¥ Connection with ¥ Standard ¥ Outline Peripheral Devices Specifications Dimension 3 8 9 11 Drawings ¥ ¥ Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification ¥ Explanation of the ¥ Parameter List ¥ Explanations ¥ Protective ¥ Option and ¥ ¥ 22 Explanation Operation Panel of Parameters Functions Peripheral Devices 27 29 42 75 77 Precautions for Operation/Selection Precautions for Peripheral 89 Device Selection ¥ Application ¥ Main Differences and to Motor Compatibilities with 93 104 the FR-A500(L) Series ¥ ¥ ¥ Warranty Service International FA Center 105 106 Example of torque characteristic under real sensorless vector control When the motor SF-JR 4P is used (at 220V input) 1. Torque limit function limits the maximum motor torque during speed control 2. Improvement of input command signal response The delay to the input command has been minimized. The response time has been reduced to half as compared to the conventional model (FR-A500). It is suitable for cycle-operation applications. Torque limit function is effective to prevent machine from damage (prevention against damage of grinding machine tools, etc.) against the sudden disturbance torque. 0 Motor generated torque 0 Example of torque limit characteristic 0 3. Quick response to the sudden load fluctuation Torque response level to the sudden load fluctuation has been greatly improved as compared to the conventional model (FR-A500). The motor speed variation is minimized to maintain a constant speed. It is suitable for a sawmill machine, etc. FR-A700 FR-A500 200ms 200ms FR-A700 940ms 560ms 300 100 Speed (r/min) Torque (%) Actual speed 0 0 Load torque Time (s) 3 1 Example of actual speed variation when a load is instantaneously applied FR-A700 series under real sensorless vector control FR-A500 series under advanced magnetic flux vector control The actual motor speed increases instantly at the moment when the load torque decreases and then it immediately returns to the set speed. Time (s) 2 Features Standard Specifications 3600 1800 Speed (r/min) •Lineup of vector control dedicated motors 3 Type Comparison of the speed accuracy before and after the load inertia estimation 2. High accuracy torque control with online auto tuning SF-V5RU Operation with high torque accuracy less susceptible to the motor second resistance value change due to a temperature change is realized with online tuning (adaptive magnetic flux observer). This operation is appropriate for applications such as a winder/printing machine (tension control) which is controlled by torque. Base/Maximum Speed (r/min) Motor Capacity 1500/3000 1.5kW to 55kW SF-V5RU1 1000/2000 1.5kW to 37kW SF-V5RU3 1000/3000 1.5kW to 30kW SF-V5RU4 500/2000 1.5kW to 15kW SF-THY 1500/3000 75kW to 250kW Without online tuning 120 110 FR-A500 The actual motor speed decelerates instantly at the moment when the load torque increases and then it immediately returns to the set speed. 400 200 Example of input command signal response characteristic When the motor SF-JR 4P 3.7kW is used 600 90 180 Use of vector control dedicated motor realizes 100% of the continuous operation torque even at a low speed. It is suitable for winder and unwinder applications. Motors with speed ratio of 1000/2000r/min, 1000/3000r/min and 500/2000r/min specifications are available and they can support applications whose winding diameter greatly changes. Decreasing the rated speed will increase the rated torque, so you can select a motor with a smaller capacity. (The inverter one rank higher than the motor in capacity needs to be selected depending on the motor capacity.) After tuning 800 ON OFF Start command 0 1000 0 3. Vector control dedicated motor Before tuning 1200 50 When the motor with encoder, SF-JR4P, is used (at 220V input) 1. Easy gain tuning 1500 70 Example of torque characteristic under vector control *4 Online auto tuning (with adaptive magnetic flux observer) Speed (r/min) Speed (r/min) 150 Speed (r/min) Torque (%) 1500 *4 *4 Since the load inertia of the motor is automatically estimated online to calculate the optimum speed control gain and position loop gain, gain adjustment is easily done. By repeating acceleration and deceleration, load inertia is automatically estimated. FR-A500 starts deceleration FR-A700 starts deceleration Motor speed Under torque limit *3 Regeneration unit (option) is necessary for regeneration 95 100 With online tuning 90 Vector control dedicated motor SF-V5RU-1.5K 80 70 60 30 50 Motor temperature (¡C) 70 90 110 Example of motor temperature-torque characteristics Since V/F control and advanced magnetic flux vector control operations are also available, you can replace the conventional model (FR-A500 series) without anxiety. •Complement: list of functions according to driving control method Control Method V/F Speed Control Torque Control Position Control Speed Control Range Speed Response Advanced magnetic flux vector Real sensorless vector Vector (FR-A7AP is necessary) (zero speed control, servo lock) Outline Dimension Drawings (0.3Hz to 60Hz driving only) (with model adaptive speed control) Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation Output frequency (Hz) Operation Panel 120 Option 60 Simple Mode Parameter (100% means 3000r/min) 6 Instructions 0.3 3 Maximum torque for short time (0.4K to 3.7K) Maximum torque for short time (5.5K to 500K) 150 Continuous torque (0.4 to 3.7K) 100 200 Parameter List (both driving/regeneration*3) 50 0 Speed control range 1:1500 Speed variation rate +-0.01% Speed response 300rad/s •Torque control Torque control range 1:50 Absolute torque accuracy +-10% Repeated torque accuracy +-5% Protective Functions •Speed control 70 Motor Speed control range 1:200 Speed response 120rad/s 100 95 *1 A plug-in option for encoder feed back control (FR-A7AP) is necessary. *2 Only a pulse train+code system is employed for pulse command system when performing position control with an inverter and the FR-A7AP. The maximum pulse input is 100kpps. *5 Applied Motor 1:10 (6 to 60Hz : Driving) 10 to 20rad/s 1:120 (0.5~60Hz : Driving) 20 to 30rad/s 1:200 (0.3~60Hz : Driving) 120rad/s General-purpose motor (without encoder) General-purpose motor (without encoder) General-purpose motor (without encoder) 1:1500 (1~1500r/min: Both driving/regeneration) *6 300rad/s General-purpose motor (with encoder) Dedicated motor *5 Only a pulse train+code method is employed for pulse command method when performing position control with an inverter and the FR-A7AP. The maximum pulse input is 100kpps. *6 Regeneration unit (option) is necessary for regeneration Warranty/Price Compatibilities • Response level has been improved. 150 Maximum torque for short time (0.4K to 3.7K) Maximum torque for short time (5.5K to 500K) Continuous torque (0.4 to 3.7K) Output torque (%) (60Hz reference) * Since torque control can not be performed in the low speed regeneration region and at a low speed with light load, use the vector control with encoder. 200 Torque (%) • Output torque (%) (60Hz reference) 200% 0.3Hz • Peripheral Devices Vector control operation can be performed using a motor with encoder*1. Torque control/position control*2 as well as fast response/high accuracy speed control (zero speed control, servo lock) can be realized with the inverter. Inquiry High accuracy/fast response speed operation by the vector control can be performed with a general-purpose motor without encoder. Maximum of high torque can be generated at an ultra low speed of (0.4K to 3.7K). Torque control operation can be performed also.* (Torque control _20%, repeated torque range 1:20, absolute torque accuracy + _10%) accuracy + 4 QP value .3 .5 .7 1 2 3 5 7 10 20 30 Frequency [MHz] Because of the built-in inrush current limit circuit, the current at power on can be restricted. Features •The RS-485 terminals are equipped as standard in addition to • Inverter Up to 42 units can be connected • only inverters ( when are connected ) FR-A7NC Terminating resistor CC-Link dedicated cable FR-A7NC • Terminating resistor CC-Link network • The inverter can be connected to Mitsubishi motion controller through the SSCNETIII. The SSCNETIII employs a high-speed synchronous serial communication system and is appropriate for the synchronous operation. (SSCNET…Servo System Controller Network) the PU connector. You can make RS-485 communication with the operation panel or parameter unit connected to the PU connector. Since the inverter can be connected to the network with terminals, multi-drop connection is also easily done. Modbus-RTU (Binary) protocol has been added for communications in addition to the conventional Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link). As a USB connector (USB1.1B connector) is standard equipped, communication with a personnel computer can be made with a USB cable only. Using the RS-485 terminal or USB connector, you can make communication by the FR-Configurator (setup S/W). Motion controller •Parameter management (parameter setting, file storage, printing) is easy. •Maintenance and setup of the inverter can be done from a • • personal computer connected with USB. Mechanical resonance is easily avoided with machine analyzer function. Parameter setting after replacement of the FRA500 series can be made with a parameter automatic conversion function. •An operation panel can be removed and a parameter unit can be connected. •Setting such as direct input method with a numeric keypad, • • operation status indication, and help function are usable. Eight languages can be displayed. Parameter setting values of a maximum of three inverters can be stored. Since a battery pack type (available soon) is connectable, parameter setting and parameter copy can be performed without powering on the inverter. USB connector RS-485 terminals Servo amplifier Option (sell separately) Standard (provided) • Inverter • Possible to copy parameters with operation panel. Parameter setting values are stored in the operation panel and optional parameter unit (FR-PU07). Operation is easy with the setting dial. Cooling fans are provided on top of the inverter. Cooling fans can be replaced without disconnecting main circuit wires. Example of parameter change The inverter can be connected with networks such as DeviceNET™, PROFIBUS-DP, LONWORKS, EtherNet (available soon) and CANopen (available soon) when communication options are used. LONWORKS is a registered trademark of Echelon Corporation and DeviceNet is of ODVA Other company and product names herein are the trademarks of their respective owners. PU/EXT operation mode example •Operation panel is detachable and can • • 5 be installed on the enclosure surface. (cable connector option is required) PU/EXT (operation mode) can be switched with a single touch. A dial/key operation lock function prevents operational errors. A removable terminal block was adapted. (The terminal block of the FR-A700 series is compatible with that of the FR-A500 series. Note that some functions of the FR-A700 series are restricted when using the terminal block of the FR-A500 series. Note that the wiring cover is not compatible.) Since a wiring cover can be mounted after wiring, wiring work is easily done. Peripheral Devices Warranty/Price SSCNETIII Inquiry FR-A7NS Standard Option CPU Inverter Master Standard (built-in) Instructions PLC 75K or more Motor Power supply unit Standard (built-in) Option (sell separately) Compatibilities The inverter can be connected to the Mitsubishi PLC (Q, QnA, A series, etc.) through the CC-Link. It is compatible with the CCLink Ver.1.1 and Ver.2.0. The inverter operation, monitoring and parameter setting change can be done from the PLC. (Line noise filter) Standard (built-in) Simple Mode (Radio noise filter) 55K or less Specifications Outline Capacitive Filter Zero-phase Reactor DC Reactor 6 Drawings suppressions of power-supply harmonics (conversion coefficient: K5=0) can be connected. Explanation *3 Excerpts from “Periodic check of the transistorized inverter” of JEMA (Japan Electrical Manufacturer’s Association). •A high power factor converter (FR-HC, MT-HC) for effective EN61800-3 2nd Environment QP level Dimension 2 to 3 years 5 years 5 years 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 .15 .2 Diagram 10 years 10 years 10 years Cooling fan Main circuit smoothing capacitor Printed board smoothing capacitor [dBµV] Terminal Connection *3 DC reactor (FR-HEL) Terminal Specification Life Guideline of the FR-A700 Guideline of JEMA AC reactor (FR-HAL) Panel *1 Leakage current will increase when the EMC filter is selected. *2 Since the leakage current when using the EMC filter for the 200V class 0.4K and 0.75K is small, the filter is always valid (setting connector is not provided). *3 Refer to the EMC installation manual for compliance conditions. Life indication of life components Components EMC filter is ON Operation • • Parameter *1 Ambient temperature : annual average 40°C (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt). Since the design life is a calculated value, it is not a guaranteed value. *2 Output current: equivalent to rating current of the Mitsubishi standard motor (4 poles). which limit harmonics current flowing into the power supply and improve the power factor, are available as options. (For the 75K or more, a DC reactor is supplied as standard.) List *4 Any one of main circuit capacitor, control circuit capacitor, inrush current limit circuit and cooling fan reaches the output level, an alarm is output. For the main circuit capacitor, the capacitor capacity needs to be measured during a stop by setting parameter. •A compact AC reactor (FR-HAL) and a DC reactor (FR-HEL), FILTER Parameter • with adoption of a new technology (low-noise of switching power, low noise of inverter element). Because of the newly developed built-in noise filter (EMC filter), the inverter itself can comply with the EMC Directive (2nd Environment*3). (To make the EMC filter of the inverter valid*1, set ON/OFF connector*2 to ON.) Functions • •Reduction of noise generated from the inverter was achieved Protective capacitor or inrush current limit circuit can be monitored. Since a parts life alarm can be output*4 by self-diagnosis, troubles can be avoided. ON •Degrees of deterioration of main circuit capacitor, control circuit to 10 years of design life*1. The life of the cooling fan is further extended with ON/OFF control of the cooling fan. Longevity of capacitor was achieved with the adoption of a design life of 10 years*1*2. (A capacitor with specification of 5000 hours at 105 °C ambient temperature is adapted.) OFF •The life of a newly developed cooling fan has been extended USB connector Time • Since the original operation continuation at instantaneous power failure function has been newly adopted, the motor continues running without coasting even if an instantaneous power failure occurs during operation. • the analog input terminal (two points), you can switch between voltage (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V) and current (0 to 20mA). You can display the ON/OFF status of the I/O terminals on the operation panel. Two points relay output is available. Braking capability of the inverter built-in brake can be improved. Remove the jumper across terminal PR-PX when connecting the high-duty brake resistor. (7.5K or less) P/+ (FR-HAL) PR T/L3 U Earth Compliance with both 240V power supply (55K or less) and 480V power supply as standard. (Ground) DC reactor Noise filter (FR-HEL) (FR-BLF) For the 75K or more, a DC reactor is supplied. Always install the reactor. The 55K or less has a built-in zero-phase reactor. V W Noise filter (FR-BSF01, FR-BLF) Option P/+ N/- Install a noise filter to reduce the electromagnetic noise generated from the inverter. Effective in the range from about 1MHz to 10MHz. A wire should be wound four turns at a maximum. Instructions R/L1 S/L2 P/+ P1 Symbol Inverter Capacity 0.4K~500K Indicate capacity (kW) Brake unit (FR-BU*1, MT-BU5*2) Compatibilities Voltage Motor Motor 200V class 400V class Earth (Ground) Devices connected to the output PR Applied Motor (kW) 0.4 0.75 FR-A720-3.7K 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 FR-A720-7.5K 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 FR-A720-22K 30 37 45 55 75 90 FR-A720-55K 110 132 160 185 220 250 280 315 355 400 450 500 Three-phase 200V class FR-A720Three-phase 400V class FR-A740- : Available models 7 : Not available High power factor converter Power regeneration Resistor unit (FR-HC*1, MT-HC*2 ) common converter (FR-BR*1, MT-BR5*2 ) Power supply harmonics can be greatly suppressed. Install this as required. *1 Compatible with the 55K or less. *2 Compatible with the 75K or more. (FR-CV*1 ) Power regeneration converter (MT-RC*2 ) Great braking capability is obtained. Install this as required. The regenerative braking capability of the inverter can be exhibited fully. Install this as required. Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor or radio noise filter on the output side of the inverter. When installing a moulded case circuit breaker on the output side of the inverter, contact each manufacturer for selection of the moulded case circuit breaker. Warranty/Price PR Inquiry P/+ P/+ FR-A720-0.4K Devices *3 Compatible with the 22K or less. AC reactor * The inverter may trip and the motor may coast depending on the load condition. 2 4 Peripheral Features (FR-ABR*3 ) Simple Mode •For High-duty brake resistor Reactors (option) must be used when power harmonics measures are taken, the power factor is to be improved or the inverter is installed near a large power supply system (1000kVA or more). The inverter may be damaged if you do not use reactors. Select the reactor according to the model. Remove the jumpers across terminals P-P1 to connect the DC reactor to the 55K or less. List Decelerates to stop Symbol Standard Terminal Connection Operation Reactor (FR-HAL, FR-HEL option) Parameter Motor speed supply Functions Power failure occurrence Install the magnetic contactor to ensure safety. Do not use this magnetic contactor to start and stop the inverter. Doing so will cause the inverter life to be shorten. Protective Speed command by pulse train signal (single pulse) from the controller etc. can be directly input to the inverter. Since pulse can be output from the inverter at the same time, synchronous speed operation of inverters can be performed. (maximum pulse input 100kpps, output 50kpps) Power • Specifications Magnetic contactor (MC) Earth (Ground) To prevent an electric shock, always earth (ground) the motor and inverter. For reduction of induction noise from the power line of the inverter, it is recommended to wire the earth (ground) cable by returning it to the earth (ground) terminal of the inverter. 8 Explanation or undervoltage occurred to prevent the motor from coasting. For fail-safe of machine tool, etc., it is effective to stop the motor when a power failure has occurred. Outline •The motor can be decelerated to a stop when a power failure Diagram In addition to the 0.4K to 7.5K, a brake transistor is built-in to the 11K, 15K, 18.5K and 22K. A brake resistor (option) can be also connected to the 11K to 22K. The breaker must be selected carefully since an in-rush current flows in the inverter at power on. Dimension or earth leakage breaker (ELB), fuse Drawings Moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB) Terminal Specification For operations of such as a pressing machine, in which an instantaneous regeneration occurs, overvoltage trip can be made less likely to occur by increasing frequency during regeneration. Panel Tuning accuracy equivalent to that of the conventional tuning of “with rotation mode” is realized with the auto tuning without motor running. Even for the machine which disallows a motor to run during tuning, the motor performance can be maximized. The sophisticated auto tuning function which measures circuit constants of the motor allows sensorless vector control with any kind of motor. A personal computer and an inverter can be connected with a USB (Ver1. 1) cable. Use within the permissible power supply specifications of the inverter. Parameter Three-phase AC power supply Standard Specifications Rating 200V class Type FR-A720- K Applicable motor capacity (kW) *1 Rated capacity (kVA) *2 Output Rated current (A) *3 Overload current rating *4 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 0.4 1.1 2.2 4.2 3.7 6.7 5.5 9.2 7.5 12.6 0.75 1.9 11 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 11 15 18.5 17.6 23.3 29 15 22 34 30 44 37 55 45 67 55 82 75 90 75 90 110 132 288 346 3 5 8 11 17.5 24 33 46 61 76 90 115 145 175 215 (245) (294) 150% 60s, 200% 3s (inverse time characteristics) ambient temperature 50°C Three-phase 200 to 240V 150% torque/ 100% torque/ 100% torque/ 20% torque/ 20% torque/ 10% torque/ 3%ED 3%ED 2%ED continuous *6 continuous continuous Power supply Voltage *5 Regenerative Maximum value/ braking torque permissible duty Rated input AC voltage/frequency Permissible AC voltage fluctuation Permissible frequency fluctuation Power supply capacity (kVA) *7 1.5 2.5 Protective structure (JEM 1030) *9 Cooling system Self-cooling Approx. mass (kg) 1.9 2.3 1.5 3.1 Three-phase 200 to 220V 50Hz, 200 to 240V 60Hz 4.5 3.8 170 to 242V 50Hz,170 to 264V 60Hz ±5% 5.5 9 12 17 20 28 34 41 52 Enclosed type (IP20) *8 Forced air cooling 3.8 3.8 7.1 7.1 7.5 13 13 14 23 66 80 100 110 Open type (IP00) 132 35 70 35 58 70 400V class 0.4 0.75 0.4 1.1 1.5 0.75 1.9 2.5 Output Type FR-A740- K Applicable motor capacity (kW) *1 Rated capacity (kVA) *2 Rated current (A) Overload current rating *4 Power supply Voltage *5 Regenerative Maximum value/ braking torque permissible duty Rated input AC voltage/frequency Permissible AC voltage fluctuation Permissible frequency fluctuation Power supply capacity (kVA) *7 Protective structure (JEM 1030) *9 Cooling system Approx. mass (kg) Type FR-A740- K Output Applicable motor capacity (kW) *1 Rated capacity (kVA) *2 Rated current (A)*3 Overload current rating *4 Power supply Voltage*5 Regenerative Maximum value/ braking torque permissible duty Rated input AC voltage/frequency Permissible AC voltage fluctuation Permissible frequency fluctuation Power supply capacity (kVA) *7 Protective structure (JEM 1030) *9 Cooling system Approx. mass (kg) 1.5 45 55 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 3 4.6 6.9 9.1 13 17.5 23.6 29 32.8 43.4 54 65 4 6 9 12 17 23 31 38 44 57 71 86 150% 60s, 200% 3s (inverse time characteristics) ambient temperature 50°C Three-phase 380 to 480V 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 55 84 110 100% torque/2%ED 11 15 18.5 22 20% torque/continuous *6 30 37 20% torque/continuous Three-phase 380 to 480V 50Hz/60Hz Self-cooling 3.5 3.5 3.5 323 to 528V 50Hz/60Hz ±5% 5.5 9 12 17 20 28 34 41 Enclosed type (IP20) *8 Forced air cooling 3.5 3.5 6.5 6.5 7.5 7.5 13 13 75 132 1.5 2.5 90 4.5 110 160 185 220 250 280 315 355 52 66 80 100 Open type (IP00) 23 35 35 400 450 500 37 75 90 110 132 160 185 220 250 280 315 355 400 450 500 110 137 165 198 248 275 329 367 417 465 521 587 660 733 144 180 216 260 325 361 432 481 547 610 683 770 866 962 (122) (153) (184) (221) (276) (307) (367) (409) (465) (519) (581) (655) (736) (818) 150% 60s, 200% 3s (inverse time characteristics) ambient temperature 50°C Three-phase 380 to 480V 10% torque/continuous Three-phase 380 to 480V 50Hz/60Hz 110 137 165 198 248 50 57 72 72 110 323 to 528V 50Hz/60H ±5% 275 329 367 417 Open type (IP00) Forced air cooling 110 175 175 175 465 521 587 660 733 260 260 370 370 370 *1. The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor. *2. The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 220V for 200V class and 440V for 400V class. *3. When operating the inverter of 75K or more with a value larger than 2kHz set in Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection, the rated output current is the value in parenthesis. *4. The % value of the overload current rating indicates the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load. *5. The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range. However, *6. *7. *8. *9. 9 the pulse voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about 2 that of the power supply. For the 11K to 22K capacities, using the dedicated external brake resistor (FR-ABR) will achieve the performance of 100% torque/6%ED. The power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables). When the hook of the inverter front cover is cut off for installation of the plug-in option, the inverter changes to an open type (IP00). FR-DU07:IP40 (except for the PU connector) Peripheral Devices Standard Specifications Outline Dimension Drawings Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation Operation Panel Parameter List Explanations of Parameters Protective Functions Options Instructions Motor Compatibility Warranty Control specifications Operation specifications Output signals Indication Environment *1. *2. *3. *4. *5. Ambient Temperature -10°C to +50°C (non-freezing) 90%RH maximum (non-condensing) Ambient humidity -20°C to +65°C Storage temperature*4 Indoors (without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt etc.) Atmosphere Altitude/vibration Maximum 1000m above sea level, 5.9m/s2 or less *5 (conforms to JIS C 60068-2-6) Only when the option (FR-A7AP) is mounted Can be displayed only on the operation panel (FR-DU07). Can be displayed only on the parameter unit (FR-PU07/FR-PU04). Temperature applicable for a short period in transit, etc. 2.9m/s2 or less for the 160K or more. Inquiry Soft-PWM control/high carrier frequency PWM control (selectable from among V/F control, advanced magnetic flux vector control and real sensorless vector control) / vector control (when used with option FR-A7AP)*1 0.2 to 400Hz Output frequency range 0.015Hz/0 to 60Hz (terminal 2, 4: 0 to 10V/12bit) Frequency Analog input 0.03Hz/0 to 60Hz (terminal 2, 4: 0 to 5V/11bit, 0 to 20mA/about 11bit, terminal 1: 0 to ±10V/12bit) setting 0.06Hz/0 to 60Hz (terminal 1: 0 to ±5V/11bit) resolution 0.01Hz Digital input Within ±0.2% of the max. output frequency (25°C±10°C) Frequency Analog input accuracy Within 0.01% of the set output frequency Digital input Voltage/frequency characteristics Base frequency can be set from 0 to 400Hz Constant torque/variable torque pattern or adjustable 5 points V/F can be selected 200% 0.3Hz (0.4K to 3.7K), 150% 0.3Hz (5.5K or more) (under real sensorless vector control or vector control) Starting torque Manual torque boost Torque boost Acceleration/deceleration time 0 to 3600s (acceleration and deceleration can be set individually), linear or S-pattern acceleration/deceleration mode, backlash setting measures acceleration/deceleration can be selected. DC injection brake Operation frequency (0 to 120Hz), operation time (0 to 10s), operation voltage (0 to 30%) variable Stall prevention operation level Operation current level can be set (0 to 220% adjustable), whether to use the function or not can be selected Torque limit level Torque limit value can be set (0 to 400% variable) • Terminal 2, 4: 0 to 10V, 0 to 5V, 4 to 20mA can be selected • Terminal 1: -10 to +10V, -5 to +5V can be selected Frequency Analog input setting Input using the setting dial of the operation panel or parameter unit Digital input signal Four-digit BCD or 16 bit binary (when used with option FR-A7AX) Start signal Forward and reverse rotation or start signal automatic self-holding input (3-wire input) can be selected. You can select any twelve signals using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) from among multi speed selection, remote setting, stop-on-contact, second function selection, third function selection, terminal 4 input selection, JOG operation selection, selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, flying start, external thermal relay input, inverter operation enable signal (FR-HC/FR-CV connection), FR-HC connection (instantaneous power failure detection), PU operation/external inter lock signal , external DC injection brake operation start, PID control enable terminal, brake opening completion signal, PU operation/external operation switchover, load pattern Input signals selection forward rotation reverse rotation boost, V/F switching, load torque high-speed frequency, S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C switchover, pre-excitation, output stop, start self-holding selection, control mode changing, torque limit selection, start-time tuning start external input, torque bias selection 1, 2 *1, P/PI control switchover, forward rotation command, reverse rotation command, inverter reset, PTC thermistor input, PID forward reverse operation switchover, PU-NET operation switchover, NET-external operation switchover, and command source switchover. Pulse train input 100kpps Maximum/minimum frequency setting, frequency jump operation, external thermal relay input selection, polarity reversible operation, automatic restart after instantaneous power failure operation, commercial power supply-inverter switchover operation, forward/reverse rotation prevention, remote setting, brake sequence, second function, third function, multi-speed operation, original operation continuation at instantaneous power failure, stop-on-contact control, load torque high speed frequency control, droop control, Operational functions regeneration avoidance, slip compensation, operation mode selection, offline auto tuning function, online auto tuning function, PID control, computer link operation (RS-485), motor end orientation*1, machine end orientation*1, pre-excitation, notch filter, machine analyzer*1, easy gain tuning, speed feed forward, and torque bias*1 You can select any signals using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) from among inverter running, up-to-frequency, instantaneous power failure/undervoltage, overload warning, output frequency (speed) detection, second output frequency (speed) detection, third output frequency (speed) detection, regenerative brake prealarm, electronic thermal relay function pre-alarm, PU operation mode, inverter operation ready, output current detection, zero current detection, PID lower limit, PID upper limit, PID forward rotation reverse rotation output, commercial power supply-inverter switchover MC1, commercial power supply-inverter switchover MC2, commercial power supply-inverter switchover MC3, orientation completion*1, brake opening request, fan fault output, heatsink overheat Operating status pre-alarm , inverter running/start command on, deceleration at an instantaneous power failure, PID control activated, during retry, PID output interruption, life alarm, alarm output 1, 2, 3 (power-off signal), power savings average value update timing, current average monitor, maintenance timer alarm, remote output, forward rotation output*1, reverse rotation output*1, low speed output, torque detection, regenerative status output *1, start-time tuning completion, in-position completion*1, minor failure output and alarm output. Open collector output (5 points), relay output (2 points) and alarm code of the inverter can be output (4 bit) from the open collector. In addition to the above, you can select any signals using Pr. 313 to Pr. 319 (extension output terminal function selection) from among When used with the control circuit capacitor life, main circuit capacitor life, cooling fan life, inrush current limit circuit life. (only positive logic can be set for FR-A7AY, FR-A7AR (option) extension terminals of the FR-A7AR) 50kpps Pulse train output You can select any signals using Pr. 54 FM terminal function selection (pulse train output) and Pr. 158 AM terminal function selection (analog output) from among output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output voltage, frequency setting, operation speed, motor Pulse/analog output torque, converter output voltage (steady or peak value), electronic thermal relay function load factor, input power, output power, load meter, motor excitation current, reference voltage output, motor load factor, power saving effect, regenerative brake duty ,PID set point, PID measured value, motor output, torque command, torque current command, and torque monitor. Output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output voltage, frequency setting, running speed,motor torque, overload, converter output voltage (steady or peak value), electronic thermal relay function load factor, input power, output power, load meter, motor excitation current, cumlative energization time, actual operation time, motor load factor, cumulative power, energy saving effect, Operating status cumulative saving power, regenerative brake duty, PID set point, PID measured value, PID deviation, inverter I/O terminal monitor, PU (FR-DU07/ input terminal option monitor*2, output terminal option monitor*2, option fitting status*3, terminal assignment status*3, torque FR-PU07/ command, torque current command, feed back pulse*1,motor output FR-PU04) Alarm definition is displayed during the protective function is activated, the output voltage/current/frequency/cumulative energization Alarm definition time right before the protection function was activated and past 8 alarm definitions are stored. Interactive guidance Operation guide/trouble shooting with a help function*3 Overcurrent during acceleration, overcurrent during constant speed, overcurrent during deceleration, overvoltage during acceleration, overvoltage during constant speed, overvoltage during deceleration, inverter protection thermal operation, motor protection thermal operation, heatsink overheat, instantaneous power failure occurrence, undervoltage, input phase failure, motor overload, output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent, output short circuit, main circuit element overheat, output phase failure, external thermal relay operation, PTC thermistor operation, option alarm, parameter error, PU disconnection, retry count excess, CPU alarm, operation panel power Protective/warning function supply short circuit, 24VDC power output short circuit, output current detection value excess, inrush current limit circuit alarm, communication alarm (inverter), USB error, opposite rotation deceleration error, analog input error, fan fault, overcurrent stall prevention, overvoltage stall prevention, regenerative brake prealarm, electronic thermal relay function prealarm, PU stop, maintenance timer alarm*2, brake transistor alarm, parameter write error, copy operation error, operation panel lock, parameter copy alarm, speed limit indication, encoder no-signal*1, speed deviation large*1, overspeed*1, position error large*1, encoder phase error*1 Control method Features Common specifications 10 Outline Dimension Drawings 7.5 FR-A720-0.4K, 0.75K 245 260 2-φ6 hole 6 5 7.5 95 110 D Inverter Type D D1 110 125 21 36 D1 FR-A720-0.4K FR-A720-0.75K (Unit: mm) 7.5 FR-A720-1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K FR-A740-0.4K, 0.75K, 1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K 6 125 150 7.5 245 260 2-φ6 hole 140 5 45.5 * The FR-A740-0.4K to 1.5K are not provided with a cooling fan. 144 (Unit: mm) 11 Compatibility Instructions 230 250 Options 2-φ10 hole Protective Functions H H1 D D1 260 245 170 84 300 285 190 101.5 Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation Outline Dimension Drawings 220 211 (Unit: mm) 190 10.5 250 Operation Panel 10 Parameter List FR-A720-15K, 18.5K, 22K FR-A740-18.5K, 22K Explanations of Parameters Inverter Type Motor 10 FR-A720-5.5K, 7.5K FR-A740-5.5K, 7.5K FR-A720-11K FR-A740-11K, 15K Warranty 10 D Inquiry 380 400 7.5 195 10 6 101.5 D1 Standard Specifications H H1 Peripheral Devices Features 7.5 FR-A720-5.5K, 7.5K, 11K FR-A740-5.5K, 7.5K, 11K, 15K 2-φ6 hole (Unit: mm) 12 H2 FR-A720-30K, 37K, 45K, 55K FR-A740-30K, 37K, 45K, 55K H 10 H1 2-φd hole W2 3.2 W1 D W Inverter Type FR-A720-30K FR-A740-30K FR-A720-37K, 45K FR-A740-37K, 45K, 55K FR-A720-55K W W1 W2 H H1 H2 d D 325 270 10 550 530 10 10 195 435 380 12 550 525 15 12 250 465 410 12 700 675 15 12 250 (Unit: mm) FR-A740-75K, 90K DC reactor supplied 15 2-φ12hole Rating plate 2-terminal (for M12 bolt) P 620 595 H1 P1, P H 10 P1 E W1 W 2 4-installation hole (for M6 screw) Within D Earth (ground) terminal (for M6 screw) 400 465 10 DC Reactor Type 3.2 300 FR-HEL-H75K (FR-A740-75K) FR-HEL-H90K (FR-A740-90K) H H1 D Mass (Kg) W W1 140 120 320 295 185 16 150 130 340 310 190 20 (Unit: mm) 13 15 Features FR-A720-75K, 90K FR-A740-110K, 132K 10 400 465 Operation Panel Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation Outline Dimension Drawings 715 740 Standard Specifications Peripheral Devices 2-φ12 hole 3.2 Parameter List 360 DC reactor supplied Rating plate Protective Functions Options P E W1 W 2 4-installation hole (for S screw) Within D DC Reactor Type W1 H H1 D S Mass (kg) 150 130 340 310 190 M6 17 FR-HEL-90K (FR-A720-90K) 150 130 340 310 200 M6 19 FR-HEL-H110K (FR-A740-110K) 150 130 340 310 195 M6 22 FR-HEL-H132K (FR-A740-132K) 175 150 405 370 200 M8 26 Motor W FR-HEL-75K (FR-A720-75K) Instructions Earth (ground) terminal (for M6 screw) (Unit: mm) Compatibility P Warranty H1 H 10 P1 Inquiry P1 Explanations of Parameters 2-terminal (for M12 bolt) 14 FR-A740-160K, 185K 15 3-φ12 hole DC reactor supplied Rating plate 2-terminal (for M12 bolt) P1 H1 985 1010 H 10 P1 P P E 4-installation hole (for S screw) W1 W 2 Within D Earth (ground) terminal (for M6 screw) 200 3.2 10 12 49 200 49 380 498 W W1 H H1 D S Mass (kg) FR-HEL-H160K (FR-A740-160K) 175 150 405 370 205 M8 28 FR-HEL-H185K (FR-A740-185K) 175 150 405 370 240 M8 29 DC Reactor Type 185 211.5 150.5 450 (Unit: mm) FR-A740-220K, 250K, 280K 3-φ12 hole DC reactor supplied Rating plate 2-S2 eye nut 2-terminal (for bolt) H 10 H1 10 P1 1010 985 P1 P P E 12 W1 1 W 2 300 380 680 N/- P1 U P/+ W V 214 S/L2 * Remove the eye nut after installation of the product. DC Reactor Type 148 R/L1 T/L3 Within D Earth (ground) terminal (for S1 screw) 3.2 300 4-installation hole (for S screw) FR-HEL-H220K (FR-A740-220K) FR-HEL-H250K (FR-A740-250K) FR-HEL-H280K (FR-A740-280K) W W1 H H1 D S S1 S2 φ Mass (kg) 175 150 405 370 240 M8 M6 M6 M12 30 190 165 440 400 250 M8 M8 M8 M12 35 190 165 440 400 255 M8 M8 M8 M16 38 (Unit: mm) 15 FR-A740-315K, 355K Outline Dimension Drawings Standard Specifications 1330 1300 Peripheral Devices Features 3-φ12 hole 315 315 4.5 790 P1 U P/+ W V Parameter List 185 222 N/- Operation Panel T/L3 S/L2 4.5 440 194 R/L1 Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation 12 Explanations of Parameters DC reactor supplied Rating plate 2-M8 eye nut P1 Protective Functions 2-terminal (for M16 bolt) Options 495 10 450 10 P1 P P 210 4-installation hole (for M10 screw) Instructions E 185 Within 250 Earth (ground) terminal (for M8 screw) * Remove the eye nut after installation of the product. (Unit: mm) Compatibility 46 Warranty 42 FR-HEL-H355K (FR-A740-355K) Motor Mass (kg) Inquiry DC Reactor Type FR-HEL-H315K (FR-A740-315K) 16 FR-A740-400K, 450K, 500K 12 1580 1550 4-φ12 hole 4.5 300 300 300 4.5 440 995 950 P/+ U V W 189 P1 185 227 R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- DC reactor supplied DC reactor supplied Rating plate 40 Rating plate P1 2-M8 eye nut 2-terminal 4- 15 hole P1 2-terminal 4- 15 hole 10 Earth (ground) terminal (for M12 screw) P 500 455 10 P1 E * Remove the eye nut after installation of the product. 40 75 Within 245 2-M12 eye nut 40 75 40 P P P1 P E 220 4-installation hole (for M10 screw) Within D Within H 195 Within W Earth (ground) terminal (for M8 screw) * Remove the eye nut after installation of the product. 150 215 W D Mass (kg) FR-HEL-H400K (FR-A740-400K) 235 250 50 FR-HEL-H450K (FR-A740-450K) 240 270 57 DC Reactor Type 4-installation hole (for M10 screw) DC Reactor Type FR-HEL-H500K (FR-A740-500K) D1 10 D 10 H D D1 Mass (kg) 345 455 405 67 (Unit: mm) 17 Operation panel (FR-DU07) <Panel cutting dimension drawing> Panel FR-DU07 27.8 Peripheral Devices 21 Airbleeding hole 22 44 50 44 6 3 3.2max Features <Outline drawing> 72 78 81 16 3 2-M3 screw Cable 72 Operation panel connection connector (FR-ADP) 25 (Unit: mm) Outline Dimension Drawings Parameter unit (option) (FR-PU07) Standard Specifications 20 3 3 <Panel cutting dimension drawing> Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation <Outline drawing> 25.05 (11.45) 2.5 *1 40 Air-bleeding hole 51 50 *1 40 Operation Panel (14.2) 83 Parameter List 4-R1 *1 4-φ4 hole (Effective depth 5.0) Protective Functions 26.5 M3 screw *2 *1 When installing the FR-PU7 on the enclosure, etc., remove screws for fixing *2 the FR-PU07 to the inverter or fix the screws to the FR-PU07 with M3 nuts. Select the installation screws whose length will not exceed the effective depth of the installation screws threads. 80.3 (Unit: mm) <Outline drawing> Instructions Parameter unit (option) (FR-PU04) Options 26.5 Explanations of Parameters 57.8 56.8 67 135 *1 <Panel cutting dimension drawing> 16.5 Motor Compatibility 1.25 1.5 5-φ4 hole 13 1.5 17 20 14.5 80 125 23.75 11.75 81.5 10.5 18.5 15 21.5 72 13 40 Warranty 5-M3 screw Effective depth 4.5 40 Select the installation screws whose length will not exceed the effective depth of the installation screws threads. (Unit: mm) Inquiry 24 48 18 Heatsink protrusion procedure When encasing the inverter in an enclosure, the generated heat amount in an enclosure can be greatly reduced by installing the heatsink portion of the inverter outside the enclosure. When installing the inverter in a compact enclosure, etc., this installation method is recommended. For the 160K or more, a heatsink can be protruded outside the enclosure without using an attachment. zWhen using a heatsink protrusion attachment (FR-A7CN) For the FR-A720-1.5K to 90K and FR-A740-0.4K to 132K, a heatsink can be protruded outside the enclosure using a heatsink protrusion attachment (FRA7CN). Refer to the instruction manual of the heatsink protrusion attachment (FR-A7CN) for details. Drawing after attachment installation (when used with the FR-A7CN) Attachment W D S screw D1 D2 H3 H1 H H2 Panel Attachment Panel Type FR-A7CN01 FR-A7CN02 FR-A7CN03 FR-A7CN04 FR-A7CN05 FR-A7CN06 FR-A7CN07 FR-A7CN08 FR-A7CN09 FR-A7CN10 FR-A7CN11 W H H1 H2 H3 D D1 D2 S 150 245 245 280 338 338 451 510 510 510 510 389.5 408.5 448.5 554 645 645 650 725 725 845 805 260 260 300 400 480 480 465 535 535 655 615 111.5 116.5 116.5 122 130 130 145 150 150 150 150 18 32 32 32 35 35 40 40 40 40 40 97 86 89 88.5 123.5 123.5 96 116.5 116.5 176.5 97 48.4 89.4 106.4 110.6 71.5 71.5 154 183.5 183.5 183.5 153 23.3 12.3 20 45.3 105 83.5 55 45 45 45 45 M5 M5 M5 M8 M8 M8 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 (Unit: mm) Panel cut dimension drawing (when used with the FR-A7CN) 200 40 102 90 90 90 FR-A7CN04 90 112 175 102 FR-A7CN03 175 102 FR-A7CN02 100 FR-A7CN01 195 195 145 212 212 FR-A7CN05 FR-A7CN06 FR-A7CN07 230 260 FR-A7CN08 290 410 470 265 380 440 270 270 330 330 660 108 690 582 4-M10 screw 13 615 590 4-M10 screw 15 12 12 6-M8 screw 510 85 540 95 611 516 600 70 516 105 298 279 4-M8 screw 12.5 440 335 6-M8 screw 40 136 586 517 320 6-M5 screw 7.5 407 305 280 6-M5 screw 7.5 367 265 280 6-M5 screw 7.5 365 265 244 380 400 440 477 (Unit: mm) 19 zWhen using a heatsink protrusion attachment (FR-A7CN) 470 470 440 440 440 Standard Specifications 740 Peripheral Devices 108 770 4-M10 screw 400 400 410 477 477 477 Outline Dimension Drawings 13 13 4-M10 screw 13 4-M10 screw 662 780 810 660 702 108 108 470 582 690 FR-A7CN11 Features FR-A7CN10 Refer to page 79 for the correspondence table of the attachment and inverter. (Unit: mm) zProtrusion of heatsink of the FR-A740-160K or more Operation Panel Panel cutting Cut the panel of the enclosure according to the inverter capacity. FR-A740-220K, 250K, 280K 6-M10 screw 6-M10 screw 662 200 300 300 Protective Functions Hole FR-A740-315K, 355K Instructions 15 18 Options 984 Hole 954 954 985 Explanations of Parameters 15 13 484 200 Parameter List FR-A740-160K, 185K Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation FR-A7CN09 FR-A740-400K, 450K, 500K 6-M10 screw 315 300 300 300 Compatibility Hole Inquiry Warranty 1508 1550 Hole 21 1258 21 1300 21 Motor 315 8-M10 screw 976 21 771 (Unit: mm) 20 Shift and removal of a rear side installation frame FR-A740-160K to 280K One installation frame is attached to each of the upper and lower part of the inverter. Change the position of the rear side installation frame on the upper and lower side of the inverter to the front side as shown on the right. When changing the installation frames, make sure that the installation orientation is correct. FR-A740-315K or more Two installation frames each are attached to the upper and lower part of the inverter. Remove the rear side installation frame on the upper and lower side of the inverter as shown below. Removal Shift Upper installation frame (rear side) Upper installation frame Shift Lower installation frame (rear side) Lower installation frame Removal Installation of the inverter Push the inverter heatsink portion outside the enclosure and fix the enclosure and inverter with upper and lower installation frame. Enclosure Inside the enclosure Exhausted air * For the FR-F740-220K or more, there are finger * guards behind the enclosure. Therefore, the thickness of the panel should be less than 10mm (*1) and also do not place anything around finger guards to avoid contact with the finger guards. Inverter Enclosure Installation frame 1 140 Finger guard 6 10* Dimension of Cooling wind the outside of the enclosure D1 Inverter Type D1 FR-A740-160K, 185K 185 FR-A740-220K to 500K 184 (Unit: mm) CAUTION · Having a cooling fan, the cooling section which comes out of the enclosure can not be used in the environment of water drops, oil, mist, dust, etc. · Be careful not to drop screws, dust etc. into the inverter and cooling fan section. 21 Terminal Connection Diagram Low speed Jog mode Second function selection Output stop Reset Terminal 4 input selection (Current input selection) Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure Contact input common 24VDC power supply (Common for external power supply transistor) Frequency setting signal (Analog) 1 B2 RM Relay output 2 A2 RL JOG *3 Open collector output RUN Running RT SU MRS IPF RES *4 OL AU FU AU Terminal functions Up to frequency vary with the output terminal assignment Instantaneous (Pr. 190 to Pr. 194) power failure (Refer to the Instruction Manual Overload (applied)) Frequency detection CS PTC SD SE PC 0 to ±10VDC (Initial value) 0 to ±5VDC selected *5 Terminal 4 input (+) (Current input) (-) 4 4 to 20mADC (Initial value) 0 to 5VDC selected *5 0 to 10VDC Option connector 1 Option connector 2 Option connector 3 Open collector output common Sink/source common *10. It is not necessary when calibrating the indicator from the operation panel. PU connector + USB FM connector *11 Calibration SD resistor *10 AM 5 TXD+ TXD- *11. FM terminal can be used for pulse train output of open collector output using Pr.291. - Indicator (Frequency meter, etc.) Moving-coil type 1mA full-scale (+) Analog signal output (0 to 10VDC) (-) RS-485 terminals Data transmission RXD+ RXD- Data reception SG GND Terminating resistor VCC Features Peripheral Devices Standard Specifications Outline Dimension Drawings Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation C2 RH 1 *6. It is recommended to use 2W1kΩ when the frequency setting signal is changed frequently. Terminal functions Relay output 1 vary with the output (Alarm output) terminal assignment (Pr. 195, Pr. 196) (Refer to the Instruction Manual (applied)) A1 Auxiliary input (+) (-) Connector for plug-in option connection B1 STOP 10(+5V) 0 to 5VDC (Initial value) 2 0 to 10VDC selected *5 4 to 20mADC 5 (Analog common) 2 Relay output STR 10E(+10V) 3 C1 STF Operation Panel Middle speed *9.The FR-A720-0.4K and 0.75K are not provided with the EMC filter ON/OFF connector. (Always on) Control circuit SOURCE Control input signals (No voltage input allowed) Forward Terminal functions vary with rotation the input terminal start assignment (Pr. 178 to Pr. 189) Reverse rotation (Refer to the Instruction start Manual (applied)) Start selfholding selection High speed *5. Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog input specifications switchover (Pr. 73, Pr. 267) . Earth (Ground) Main circuit Earth (Ground) Motor IM 5V (Permissible load current 100mA) Parameter List OFF U V W EMC filter ON/OFF connecter *9 Explanations of Parameters ON Protective Functions *2 Frequency setting potentiometer 1/2W1kΩ *6 (Refer to the Instruction Manual) R1/L11 S1/L21 Jumper *4. AU terminal can be used as PTC input terminal. N/- CN8 *7 Options Three-phase AC power supply *3. JOG terminal can be used as pulse train input terminal. Use Pr.291 to select JOG/pulse. PR R R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 Multi-speed selection PX *8. Brake resistor (FR-ABR) Remove the jumper across terminal PR-PX when connecting a brake resistor. (0.4K to 7.5K) Terminal PR is provided for the 0.4K to 22K. Install a thermal relay to prevent an overheat and burnout of the brake resistor. Instructions P/+ MC *2. To supply power to the control circuit separately, remove the jumper across R1/L11 and S1/L21. Jumper Jumper Motor *8 Earth (Ground) *7. A CN8 connector is provided with the 75K or more. Compatibility R P1 MCCB Brake unit (Option) *1 Warranty Control circuit terminal *1. DC reactor (FR-HEL) Be sure to connect the DC reactor supplied with the 75K or more. When a DC reactor is connected to the 55K or less, remove the jumper across P1-P/+. SINK Sink logic Main circuit terminal ⋅ Be sure to earth (ground) the inverter and motor before use. ⋅ This connection diagram assumes that the control circuit is sink logic (initial setting). Refer to the instruction manual for the connection in the case of Inquiry CAUTION ⋅ To prevent a malfunction caused by noise, separate the signal cables more than 10cm from the power cables. source logic. 22 Terminal Specification Explanation Type Terminal Symbol Terminal Name R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 AC power input U, V, W Inverter output R1/L11, S1/L21 Power supply for control circuit Main circuit P/+, PR Brake resistor connection P/+, N/- Brake unit connection P/+, P1 DC reactor connection PR, PX Built-in brake circuit connection Connect to the commercial power supply. Connect a three-phase squirrel-cage motor. Connected to the AC power supply terminals R/L1 and S/L2. To retain alarm display and alarm output, apply external power to this terminal. Remove the jumper from terminals PR-PX (7.5K or less) and connect an optional brake resistor (FR-ABR) across terminals P/+-PR. The PR terminal is provided for the 22K or less. Connect the brake unit (FR-BU and BU, MT-BU5), power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) or regeneration common converter (MT-RC) and high power factor converter (FR-HC, MT-HC). For the 55K or less, remove the jumper across terminals P/+-P1 and connect a DC reactor. (For the 75K or more, a DC reactor is supplied as standard.) When the jumper is connected across terminals PX-PR (initial status), the built-in brake circuit is valid. The PX terminal is provided for the 7.5K or less. Earth (Ground) For earthing (grounding) the inverter chassis. Must be earthed (grounded). STF Forward rotation start STR Reverse rotation start Turn on the STF signal to start forward rotation and turn it off When the STF and STR to stop. signals are turned on Turn on the STR signal to start reverse rotation and turn it off simultaneously, the stop to stop. command is given. STOP RH, RM, RL Start self-holding selection Multi-speed selection Jog mode selection JOG Pulse train input Contact input RT Second function selection MRS Output stop RES Reset AU Terminal 4 input selection Control circuit/input signal PTC input CS Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure SD Contact input common (sink) PC External transistor common, 24VDC power supply, contact input common (source) 10E Frequency setting 10 23 Description Frequency setting power supply 2 Frequency setting (voltage) 4 Frequency setting (current) 1 Frequency setting auxiliary 5 Frequency setting common Turn on the STOP signal to self-hold the start signal. Multi-speed can be selected according to the combination of RH, RM and RL signals. Turn on the JOG signal to select Jog operation (initial setting) and turn on the start signal (STF or STR) to start Jog operation. JOG terminal can be used as pulse train input terminal. To use as pulse train input terminal, the Pr.291 setting needs to be changed. (maximum input pulse: 100kpulses/s) Turn on the RT signal to select second function selection When the second function such as “Second torque boost” and “Second V/F (base frequency)” are set, turning on the RT signal selects these functions. Turn on the MRS signal (20ms or more) to stop the inverter output. Use to shut off the inverter output when stopping the motor by electromagnetic brake. Used to reset alarm output provided when protective function is activated. Turn on the RES signal for more than 0.1s, then turn it off. Recover about 1s after reset is cancelled. Terminal 4 is made valid only when the AU signal is turned on. Turning the AU signal on makes terminal 2 invalid. AU terminal is used as PTC input terminal (thermal protection of the motor). When using it as PTC input terminal, set the AU/PTC switch to PTC. When the CS signal is left on, the inverter restarts automatically at power restoration. Note that restart setting is necessary for this operation. In the initial setting, a restart is disabled. Common terminal for contact input terminal (sink logic) and terminal FM. Common output terminal for 24VDC 0.1A power supply (PC terminal). Isolated from terminals 5 and SE. When connecting the transistor output (open collector output), such as a programmable controller (PLC), when sink logic is selected, connect the external power supply common for transistor output to this terminal to prevent a malfunction caused by undesirable currents. Can be used as 24VDC 0.1A power supply. When source logic has been selected, this terminal serves as a contact input common. 10VDC, permissible load When connecting a frequency setting potentiometer at an current 10mA initial status, connect it to terminal 10. Change the input specifications of terminal 2 when 5VDC, permissible load connecting it to terminal 10E. current 10mA Inputting 0 to 5VDC (or 0 to 10V, 4 to 20mA) provides the maximum output frequency at 5V (10V, 20mA) and makes input and output proportional. Use Pr.73 to switch from among input 0 to 5VDC (initial setting), 0 to 10VDC, and 4 to 20mA. Voltage input: Input resistance 10kΩ ±1kΩ Maximum permissible voltage 20VDC Current input: Input resistance 250Ω ±5Ω (When power is ON) Maximum permissible current 30mA Input resistance 10kΩ ±1kΩ (When power is OFF) Inputting 4 to 20mADC (or 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V) provides the maximum output frequency at 20mA and makes input and output proportional. This input signal is valid only when the AU signal is on (terminal 2 input is invalid). Use Pr.267 to switch from among input 4 to 20mA (initial setting), 0 to 5VDC, and 0 to 10VDC. Voltage input: Input resistance 10kΩ ±1kΩ Maximum permissible voltage 20VDC Current input: Input resistance 250Ω ±5Ω (When power is ON) Maximum permissible current 30mA Input resistance 10kΩ ±1kΩ (When power is OFF) Inputting 0 to ±5VDC or 0 to ±10VDC adds this signal to terminal 2 or 4 frequency setting signal. Use Pr.73 to switch between input 0 to ±5VDC and 0 to ±10VDC (initial setting) input. Input resistance 10kΩ ±1kΩ Maximum permissible voltage ±20VDC Common terminal for frequency setting signal (terminal 2, 1 or 4) and analog output terminal AM. Do not earth (ground) FU Frequency detection SE Open collector output common Pulse For meter FM Communication Analog Open collector output AM Analog signal output PU connector RS-485 terminals TXD+, TXDRXD+, RXDSG Inverter transmission terminal Inverter reception terminal Earth (Ground) USB connector Common terminal for terminals RUN, SU, OL, IPF, FU Output item: output frequency (initial setting), permissible load current 2mA, 1440 pulses/s at 60Hz Select one e.g. output frequency from Signals can be output from the open collector monitor items.*2 terminals by setting Pr.291. (maximum output pulse: 50kpulses/s) The output signal is proportional to the magnitude of the corresponding Output item: output frequency (initial monitoring item. setting), output signal 0 to 10VDC, permissible load current 1mA(load impedance 10kΩ or more), resolution 8 bit With the PU connector, communication can be made through RS-485. (1:1 connection only) ⋅ Conforming standard: EIA-485(RS-485) ⋅ Communication speed: 4800 to 38400bps ⋅ Transmission format: Multi-drop link ⋅ Overall extension: 500m With the RS-485 terminals, communication can be made through RS-485. Features Instantaneous power failure Peripheral Devices IPF Standard Specifications Overload alarm Outline Dimension Drawings OL Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation Up to frequency Operation Panel SU Parameter List Inverter running Explanations of Parameters RUN Protective Functions Relay output 2 ⋅ Conforming standard: EIA-485(RS-485) ⋅ Communication speed: 300 to 38400bps ⋅ Transmission format: Multi-drop link ⋅ Overall extension: 500m The FR-Configurator can be operated by connecting the inverter to the personnel computer through USB. ⋅ Interface: conforms to USB1.1 ⋅ Connector: USB series B connector ⋅ Transfer rate: FS transfer (12Mbps) CAUTION ⋅ The inverter will be damaged if power is applied to the inverter output terminals (U, V, W). Never perform such wiring. ⋅ indicates that terminal functions can be selected from Pr.178 to Pr.196 (I/O terminal function selection). ⋅ Terminal names and terminal functions are those of the factory set. *1 Low indicates that the open collector output transistor is on (conducts). High indicates that the transistor is off (does not conduct). *2 Not output during inverter reset. Options A2, B2, C2 1 changeover contact output indicates that the inverter protective function has activated and the output stopped. Alarm: discontinuity across B-C (continuity across A-C), Normal: continuity across B-C (discontinuity across A-C) Contact capacity 230VAC 0.3A (power factor =0.4) 30VDC 0.3A 1 changeover contact output, contact capacity 230VAC, 0.3A (power factor=0.4) 30VDC 0.3A Switched low when the inverter output frequency is equal to or higher than the starting frequency (initial value 0.5Hz). Switched high during stop or DC injection brake operation.*1 Switched low when the output frequency reaches within the range of ±10% (initial value) of the set frequency. Switched high during acceleration/deceleration and at a stop.*1 Permissible load 24VDC Switched low when stall prevention is 0.1A activated by the stall prevention function. Alarm code (4bit) (a voltage drop is 2.8V Switched high when stall prevention is maximum when the cancelled.*1 output Switched low when an instantaneous (Refer to page 53.) signal is on) power failure and under voltage protections are activated.*1 Switched low when the inverter output frequency is equal to or higher than the preset detected frequency and high when less than the preset detected frequency.*1 Instructions Relay output 1 (alarm output) Motor A1, B1, C1 Description Compatibility Terminal Name Warranty Terminal Symbol Inquiry Open collector Control circuit/input signal Relay Type 24 Wiring example Standard motor with encoder (SF-JR), 5V differential line driver (speed control) Sink logic Main circuit terminal Control circuit terminal Jumper P1 MCCB Jumper P/+ PX PR R MC Jumper R1/L11 S1/L21 Control circuit Forward rotation start High speed Middle speed Low speed Jog mode Second function selection Output stop Reset RUN STR SU STOP IPF RH OL RM FU RL SE Frequency detection Open collector output common C1 Relay output RT CS 1 Overload Relay output 1 (alarm output) Relay output 2 A2 SD FR-A7AP PA1 C PA2 R PB1 A PB2 N PZ1 PZ2 B PG H SD K 10(+5V) 0 to 5VDC (Initial value) 2 0 to 10VDC selected 4 to 20mADC 5 (Analog common) 0 to ±10VDC (Initial value) 1 0 to ±5VDC selected Encoder P PG SD * (+) (-) 5VDC power supply Complimentary ON Terminating resistor OFF 25 Instantaneous power failure C2 Differential line driver (+) torque limit command (-) ( 10V) Up to frequency B2 10E(+10V) 2 A1 RES Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure Contact input common 3 B1 MRS AU Frequency setting potentiometer 1/2W1kΩ Running JOG Terminal 4 input selection (current input selection) Analog input Open collector output STF Reverse rotation start Start self-holding selection IM Earth (ground) Main circuit Control input signals (no voltage input allowed) U V W E U V W R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 Three-phase AC power supply SF-JR motor with encoder N/- *. Earth the shield cable of the encoder cable to the enclosure with a P clip, etc. MCCB SF-V5RU A B C Forward rotation start Reverse rotation start Contact input common Speed limit command Frequency setting potentiometer 1/2W1kΩ 2 G2 A PB1 C PB2 D Differential line driver PZ1 PZ2 G 5 Complimentary PG Terminating SD R resistor Torque (+) command (-) (±10V) 1 ON *6 OFF Position control *3 Encoer F 2 1 Thermal protector G1 2W1kΩ B 10 3 Earth (ground) PA2 SD IM *4 S PG SD *5 *8 (+) 12VDC (-) power supply *7 MCCB SF-V5RU *1 A B C Three-phase AC power supply U V W E IM Earth (ground) Pre-excitation/servo on Clear signal CLEAR Pulse train PULSE F Sign signal 24VDC power supply PULSE R C PB2 D Differential line driver PZ1 PZ2 PULSE COM SE RDY COM COM F G resistor ON Encoder *4 S Complimentary PG Terminating SD RDY *11 5 *3 B PB1 PC Torque limit command (+) (±10V) (-) A JOG *10 CLEAR COM Preparation ready signal G2 CLR *9 NP *9 Protective Functions Forward stroke end Reverse stroke end Thermal protector G1 Options STOP External thermal PC relay input *2CS(OH) 2W1kΩ SD STF FR-A7AP STR PA1 LX *9 PA2 Instructions DOG READY U V W Inverter R PG SD *6 *8 OFF *5 (+) 12VDC (-) power supply *7 Motor R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 Explanations of Parameters MCCB Three-phase AC power supply 1 *1 For the fan of the 7.5kW or less dedicated motor, the power supply is single phase (200V/50Hz, 200 to 230V/60Hz). *2 Assign OH (external thermal input) signal to the terminal CS. (Set "7" in Pr. 186.) Connect a 2WlkΩ resistor between the terminal PC and CS (CH). Install the resistor pushing it against the bottom CS(OH) PC Control circuit terminal block part of the terminal block so as to avoid a contact with other cables. *4 *5 Connect the encoder so that there is no looseness between the motor and motor shaft. Speed ratio should be 1:1. Earth the shield cable of the encoder cable to the enclosure with a P clip, etc. *6 *7 For the complementary, set the switch to off position. A separate power supply of 5V/12V/15V/24V is necessary according to the encoder power specification. *8 *9 For terminal compatibility of the FR-JCBL, FR-V5CBL and FR-A7AP, refer to the inverter manual or the instruction manual of the FR-A7AP. Assign the function using Pr.178 to Pr.184, Pr.187 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection). Warranty *3 Refer to the inverter manual for details of Pr. 186 CS terminal function selection. The pin number differs according to the encoder used. Compatibility FLS RLS FAN Resistor (2W1kΩ) *10 When position control is selected, terminal JOG function is made invalid and conditional position pulse train input terminal becomes valid. *11 Assign the function using Pr.190 to Pr.194 (output terminal function selection). Inquiry Positioning unit MELSEQ-Q QD75P1 Outline Dimension Drawings R/L1 S/L2 External thermal T/L3 relay input *2 PC CS(OH) SD STF FR-A7AP STR PA1 Three-phase AC power supply U V W E Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation MCCB U V W Operation Panel Inverter FAN Peripheral Devices Three-phase AC power supply Standard Specifications *1 Parameter List Torque control Features Vector control dedicated motor (SF-V5RU), 12V complimentary 26 Operation Panel (FR-DU07) Operation mode indication PU: Lit to indicate PU operation mode. EXT: Lit to indicate external operation mode. NET: Lit to indicate network operation mode. Rotation direction indication FWD: Lit during forward rotation REV: Lit during reverse rotation On: Forward/reverse operation Flickering: When the frequency command is not given even if the forward/reverse command is given. Unit indication · Hz: Lit to indicate frequency. · A: Lit to indicate current. · V: Lit to indicate voltage. (Flicker when the set frequency monitor is displayed.) Monitor indication Lit to indicate monitoring mode. No function Monitor(4-digit LED) Shows the frequency, parameter number, etc. Start command forward rotation Start command reverse rotation Setting dial (Setting dial: Mitsubishi inverter dial) Stop operation Alarms can be reset Used to change the frequency setting and parameter values. Used to set each setting. If pressed during operation, monitor changes as below; Mode switchover Used to change each setting mode. Running frequency Output current Output voltage * Energy saving monitor is displayed when the energy saving monitor of Pr. 52 is set. Operation mode switchover Used to switch between the PU and external operation mode. When using the external operation mode (operation using a separately connected frequency setting potentiometer and start signal), press this key to light up the EXT indication. (Change the Pr.79 value to use the combined mode.) PU: PU operation mode EXT: External operation mode 27 * Features Basic operation Operation mode switchover and frequency flicker. Frequency setting has been written and completed!! Output current monitor Output voltage monitor Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation Value change PU operation mode (output frequency monitor) Operation Panel (Example) Explanations of Parameters (Example) Value change Compatibility [Operation for displaying alarm history] Past eight alarms can be displayed. (The latest alarm is ended by ".".) When no alarm history exists, is displayed. Warranty Alarm history Parameter copy Instructions Alarm clear Motor Parameter all clear Options Parameter and a setting value flicker alternately. Parameter write is completed!! Parameter clear Protective Functions Display the current setting Parameter setting mode Inquiry Parameter setting Parameter List Monitor/frequency setting PU Jog operation mode Outline Dimension Drawings Standard Specifications Peripheral Devices At powering on (external operation mode) 28 Parameter List For simple variable-speed operation of the inverter, the initial setting of the parameters may be used as they are. Set the necessary parameters to meet the load and operational specifications. Parameter setting, change and check can be made from the operation panel (FR-DU07). For details of parameters, refer to the instruction manual. REMARKS ⋅ ⋅ indicates simple mode parameters. (initially set to extended mode) The shaded parameters in the table allow its setting to be changed during operation even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr.77 Parameter write selection. Basic functions Function Parameter Setting Range Minimum Setting Increments Initial Value Refer to Page 0.1% 6/4/3/2/1% *1 42 120/60Hz 42 0 Torque boost 0 to 30% 1 Maximum frequency 0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 2 Minimum frequency 0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 0Hz 42 3 Base frequency 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 42 4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 42 5 Multi-speed setting (middle speed) 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 30Hz 42 6 Multi-speed setting (low speed) 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 10Hz 42 7 Acceleration time 0 to 3600/360s 0.1/0.01s 5/15s *3 43 8 Deceleration time 0 to 3600/360s 0.1/0.01s 5/15s *3 43 0.01/0.1A *2 Inverter rated output current 43 0 to 500/0 to 3600A *2 10 DC injection brake operation frequency 0 to 120Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 3Hz 43 11 DC injection brake operation time 0 to 10s, 8888 0.1s 0.5s 43 12 DC injection brake operation voltage 0 to 30% 0.1% 4/2/1%*3 43 13 14 Starting frequency Load pattern selection 0 to 60Hz 0 to 5 0.01Hz 1 0.5Hz 0 43 44 15 Jog frequency 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 5Hz 44 16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time 0 to 3600/360s 0.1/0.01s 0.5s 44 17 18 19 MRS input selection High speed maximum frequency Base frequency voltage 0, 2 120 to 400Hz 0 to 1000V, 8888, 9999 1 0.01Hz 0.1V 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency 1 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 43 21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments 0, 1 1 0 43 22 Stall prevention operation level (torque limit level ) 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 44, 45 23 Stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed 0 to 200%, 9999 0.1% 9999 44 24 to 27 Multi-speed setting(4 speed to 7 speed) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 42 28 0, 1 1 0 45 29 Multi-speed input compensation selection Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection 0 to 5 1 0 46 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 41 42 Regenerative function selection Frequency jump 1A Frequency jump 1B Frequency jump 2A Frequency jump 2B Frequency jump 3A Frequency jump 3B Speed display Up-to-frequency sensitivity Output frequency detection 0, 1, 2, 10, 11, 12, 20, 21 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0, 1 to 9998 0 to 100% 0 to 400Hz 1 0.01Hz 0.01Hz 0.01Hz 0.01Hz 0.01Hz 0.01Hz 1 0.1% 0.01Hz 0 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 0 10% 6Hz 46 47 47 47 47 47 47 47 47 47 43 Output frequency detection for reverse rotation 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 47 Frequency jump Acceleration/ Multi-speed Stall deceleration setting prevention times DC injection brake Electronic thermal O/L relay *2 Jog operation 9 Frequency detection 29 Name 0 120/60Hz 9999 *2 44 42 42 Customer Setting Second output frequency detection 51 Second electronic thermal O/L relay 52 DU/PU main display data selection 54 FM terminal function selection 55 Frequency monitoring reference 0 to 400Hz 0 to 500A, 9999/ 0 to 3600A, 9999 *2 0, 5 to 14, 17 to 20, 22 to 25, 32 to 35, 50 to 57, 100 1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18, 21, 24, 32 to 34, 50, 52, 53 0 to 400Hz 0.1% 150% 44 0.01Hz 0Hz 44 0.01Hz 30Hz 47 9999 43 1 0 48 1 1 48 0.01Hz 60Hz 48 0.01/0.1A Inverter rated output current 48 0.01/0.1A *2 Current monitoring reference 0 to 500/0 to 3600A *2 57 Restart coasting time 0, 0.1 to 5s, 9999/ 0, 0.1 to 30s, 9999 *2 0.1s 9999 49 58 Restart cushion time 0 to 60s 0.1s 1s 49 59 Remote function selection 0, 1, 2, 3 1 0 50 60 Energy saving control selection 0, 4 1 0 50 61 Reference current 0 to 500A, 9999/ 0 to 3600A, 9999 *2 0.01A/0.1A *2 9999 50 62 Reference value at acceleration 0 to 220%, 9999 0.1% 9999 50 63 Reference value at dcceleration 0 to 220%, 9999 0.1% 9999 50 64 Starting frequency for elevator mode 0 to 10Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 50 65 Retry selection 0 to 5 1 0 51 66 Stall prevention operation reduction starting frequency 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 44 67 Number of retries at alarm occurrence 0 to 10, 101 to 110 1 0 51 68 Retry waiting time 0 to 10s 0.1s 1s 51 69 Retry count display erase 0 1 0 51 70 Special regenerative brake duty 0 to 30%/0 to 10% *2 0.1% 0% 46 1 0 51 Retry Automatic restart 56 *2 71 Applied motor 0 to 8, 13 to 18, 20, 23, 24, 30, 33, 34, 40, 43, 44, 50, 53, 54 72 PWM frequency selection 0 to 15/0 to 6, 25 *2 1 2 52 73 Analog input selection 0 to 7, 10 to 17 1 1 52 74 0 to 8 1 1 52 75 Input filter time constant Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection 0 to 3, 14 to 17 1 14 53 76 Alarm code output selection 0, 1, 2 1 0 53 77 Parameter write selection 0, 1, 2 1 0 53 78 Reverse rotation prevention selection 0, 1, 2 1 0 53 Operation mode selection 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7 1 0 54 79 Features Peripheral Devices 42 Automatic acceleration/ deceleration Monitor functions 50 0 to 400Hz, 9999 42 9999 Standard Specifications 49 0 to 220% 9999 Outline Dimension Drawings 48 0.1% 0.01Hz Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation 0 to 400Hz, 9999 43 Operation Panel 0 to 30%, 9999 Second V/F (base frequency) 43 9999 Parameter List Second torque boost 47 5s 0.1/0.01s Explanations of Parameters 46 0.1/0.01s Customer Setting Protective Functions 0 to 3600/360s, 9999 Refer to Page Options 0 to 3600/360s Second deceleration time Initial Value Instructions Second acceleration/deceleration time 45 Minimum Setting Increments Motor 44 Second stall prevention operation current Second stall prevention operation frequency Setting Range Compatibility Name Warranty Parameter Inquiry Second functions Function 30 Motor constants Function Parameter Name Setting Range Minimum Setting Increments Initial Value Refer to Page 0.01/0.1kW *2 9999 55 1 9999 55 9999 55 80 Motor capacity 0.4 to 55kW, 9999/ 0 to 3600kW, 9999 *2 81 Number of motor poles 2, 4, 6, 12, 14, 16, 9999 82 Motor excitation current 0 to 500A, 9999/ 0 to 3600A, 9999 *2 83 Motor rated voltage 0 to 1000V 0.1V 200/400V 55 84 Rated motor frequency 10 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 55 89 Speed control gain (magnetic flux vector) 0 to 200% 0.1% 9999 55 90 Motor constant (R1) 0 to 50Ω, 9999/ 0 to 400mΩ, 9999 *2 9999 55 91 Motor constant (R2) 0 to 50Ω, 9999/ 0 to 400mΩ, 9999 *2 9999 55 92 Motor constant (L1) 0 to 50Ω (0 to 1000mH), 9999/ 0 to 3600mΩ (0 to 400mH), 9999 *2 9999 55 9999 55 9999 55 0.01/0.1A *2 0.001Ω/ 0.01mΩ *2 0.001Ω/ 0.01mΩ *2 0.001Ω (0.1mH)/ 0.01mΩ(0.01mH) *2 0.001Ω (0.1mH)/ 93 Motor constant (L2) 0 to 50Ω (0 to 1000mH), 9999/ 0 to 3600mΩ (0 to 400mH), 9999 *2 0.01mΩ(0.01mH) *2 PU connector communication Third functions Adjustable 5 points V/F 94 0 to 500Ω (0 to 100%), 9999/ 0 to 100Ω (0 to 100%), 9999 *2 0.01Ω (0.1%)/ 0.01Ω (0.01%) *2 95 Online auto tuning selection 0 to 2 1 0 56 96 Auto tuning setting/status 0, 1, 101 1 0 55 100 V/F1(first frequency) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 56 101 V/F1(first frequency voltage) 0 to 1,000V 0.1V 0V 56 102 V/F2(second frequency) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 56 103 V/F2(second frequency voltage) 0 to 1,000V 0.1V 0V 56 104 V/F3(third frequency) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 56 105 V/F3(third frequency voltage) 0 to 1,000V 0.1V 0V 56 106 V/F4(fourth frequency) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 56 107 V/F4(fourth frequency voltage) 0 to 1,000V 0.1V 0V 56 108 V/F5(fifth frequency) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 56 109 V/F5(fifth frequency voltage) 0 to 1,000V 0.1V 0V 56 110 Third acceleration/deceleration time 0 to 3600/360s, 9999 0.1/0.01s 9999 43 0.1/0.01s 9999 43 0.1% 9999 42 0.01Hz 9999 42 0.1% 150% 44 111 Third deceleration time 0 to 3600/360s, 9999 112 Third torque boost 0 to 30%, 9999 113 Third V/F (base frequency) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 114 Third stall prevention operation current 0 to 220% 115 Thrid stall prevention operation frequency 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 0 44 116 Third output frequency detection 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 47 117 PU communication station 0 to 31 1 0 56 118 PU communication speed 48, 96, 192, 384 1 192 56 119 PU communication stop bit length 0, 1, 10, 11 1 1 56 120 PU communication parity check 0, 1, 2 1 2 56 121 Number of PU communication retries 0 to10, 9999 122 PU communication check time interval 0, 0.1 to 999.8s, 9999 123 PU communication waiting time setting 0 to 150ms, 9999 124 31 Motor constant (X) 125 126 PU communication CR/LF presence/ absence selection Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 1 1 56 0.1s 9999 56 1 9999 56 1 1 56 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 57 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 57 0, 1, 2 Customer Setting 130 PID integral time 0.1 to 3600s, 9999 0.1s 1s 58 131 PID upper limit 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 58 132 PID lower limit 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 58 133 PID action set point 0 to 100%, 9999 0.01% 9999 58 134 PID differential time 0.01 to 10.00s, 9999 0.01s 9999 58 135 Commercial power-supply switchover sequence output terminal selection 0, 1 1 0 58 136 MC switchover interlock time 0 to 100s 0.1s 1s 58 137 Start waiting time 0 to 100s 0.1s 0.5s 58 1 0 58 0 to 60Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 58 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 1Hz 46 0.1s 0.5s 46 0.01Hz 1Hz 46 138 139 Commercial power-supply operation switchover selection at an alarm Automatic switchover frequency between inverter and commercial power-supply operation Backlash acceleration stopping frequency 0, 1 Backlash acceleration stopping time 0 to 360s 142 Backlash deceleration stopping frequency 0 to 400Hz 143 Backlash deceleration stopping time 0 to 360s 0.1s 0.5s 46 1 4 47 144 Speed setting switchover 145 PU display language selection 0 to 7 1 0 58 148 Stall prevention level at 0V input 0 to 220% 0.1% 150% 44 149 Stall prevention level at 10V input 0 to 220% 0.1% 200% 44 150 Output current detection level 0 to 220% 0.1% 150% 58 151 Output current detection signal delay time 0 to 10s 0.1s 0s 58 152 Zero current detection level 0 to 220% 0.1% 5% 58 153 Zero current detection time 0 to 1s 0.01s 0.5s 58 154 Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation 0, 1 1 1 44 155 RT signal reflection time selection 0, 10 1 0 59 156 Stall prevention operation selection 0 to 31, 100, 101 157 OL signal output timer 0 to 25s, 9999 158 AM terminal function selection 1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18, 21, 24, 32 to 34, 50, 52, 53 159 Automatic switchover ON range between commercial power-supply and inverter operation 0 to 10Hz, 9999 User group read selection Current detection 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 102, 104, 106, 108, 110 PU 141 160 161 162 Current detection Automatic restart functions Frequency setting/key lock operation selection Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection 1 0 44 0.1s 0s 44 1 1 48 0.01Hz 9999 58 0, 1, 9999 1 0 59 0, 1, 10, 11 1 0 59 0, 1, 2, 10, 11, 12 1 0 49 163 First cushion time for restart 0 to 20s 0.1s 0s 49 164 First cushion voltage for restart 0 to 100% 0.1% 0% 49 165 Stall prevention operation level for restart 0 to 220% 0.1% 150% 49 166 Output current detection signal retention time 0 to 10s, 9999 0.1s 0.1s 58 167 Output current detection operation selection 0, 1 1 0 58 Features 58 0.1 to 1000%, 9999 Peripheral Devices 100% PID proportional band Standard Specifications 0.1% 129 Outline Dimension Drawings 58 10, 11, 20, 21, 50, 51, 60, 61 Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation 10 PID action selection Operation Panel 1 128 Parameter List 58 Explanations of Parameters 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999 Protective Functions 0.01Hz PID control automatic switchover freqeuncy Customer Setting Options Refer to Page Instructions Initial Value Motor Minimum Setting Increments Compatibility Setting Range 127 140 Backlash measures Name Warranty Parameter Inquiry Commercial power supplyinverter switch-over PID operation Function 32 Parameter 168 169 33 Name Setting Range Minimum Setting Increments Initial Value Refer to Page Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set. 170 Watt-hour meter clear 0, 10, 9999 1 9999 48 171 Operation hour meter clear 0, 9999 1 9999 48 172 User group registered display/batch clear 9999, (0 to 16) 1 0 59 173 User group registration 0 to 999, 9999 1 9999 59 174 User group clear 0 to 999, 9999 1 9999 59 1 60 60 1 61 60 1 0 60 1 1 60 1 2 60 1 3 60 1 4 60 1 5 60 1 6 60 1 24 60 1 25 60 1 62 60 1 0 60 1 1 60 1 2 60 1 3 60 1 4 60 1 99 60 1 9999 60 0.01Hz 9999 42 178 STF terminal function selection 179 STR terminal function selection 180 RL terminal function selection 181 RM terminal function selection 182 RH terminal function selection 183 RT terminal function selection 0 to 20, 22 to 28, 42 to 44, 60, 62, 64 to 71, 9999 0 to 20, 22 to 28, 42 to 44, 61, 62, 64 to 71, 9999 0 to 20, 22 to 28, 42 to 44, 62, 64 to 71, 9999 0 to 20, 22 to 28, 42 to 44, 62 to 71, 9999 184 AU terminal function selection 185 JOG terminal function selection 186 CS terminal function selection 187 MRS terminal function selection 188 STOP terminal function selection 189 RES terminal function selection 190 RUN terminal function selection 191 SU terminal function selection 192 IPF terminal function selection 193 OL terminal function selection 194 FU terminal function selection 195 ABC1 terminal function selection 196 ABC2 terminal function selection Multi-speed setting(8 speed to 15 speed) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0 to 20, 22 to 28, 42 to 44, 62, 64 to 71, 9999 0 to 8, 10 to 20, 25 to 28, 30 to 36, 39, 41 to 47, 64, 70, 84, 85, 90 to 99, 100 to 108, 110 to 116, 120, 125 to 128, 130 to 136, 139, 141 to 147, 164, 170, 184, 185, 190 to 199, 9999 0 to 8, 10 to 20, 25 to 28, 30 to 36, 39, 41 to 47, 64, 70, 84, 85, 90, 91, 94 to 99, 100 to 108, 110 to 116, 120, 125 to 128, 130 to 136, 139, 141 to 147, 164, 170, 184, 185, 190, 191, 194 to 199, 9999 Multi-speed setting Output terminal function assignment input terminal function assignment User group Cumulative monitor clear Function 232 to 239 240 Soft-PWM operation selection 0, 1 1 1 52 241 Analog input display unit switchover 0, 1 1 0 57 0 to 100% 0.1% 100% 52 0 to 100% 0.1% 75% 52 1 1 61 242 243 244 Terminal 1 added compensation amount (terminal 2) Terminal 1 added compensation amount (terminal 4) Cooling fan operation selection 0, 1 Customer Setting 0, 9999 1 9999 61 250 Stop selection 0 to 100s,1000 to 1100s 8888, 9999 0.1s 9999 61 251 Output phase failure protection selection 0, 1 1 1 61 252 Override bias 0 to 200% 0.1% 50% 52 253 Override gain 0 to 200% 0.1% 150% 52 255 Life alarm status display (0 to 15) 1 0 61 256 Inrush current limit circuit life display (0 to 100%) 1% 100% 61 257 Control circuit capacitor life display (0 to 100%) 1% 100% 61 258 Main circuit capacitor life display (0 to 100%) 1% 100% 61 259 Main circuit capacitor life measuring 0, 1 1 0 61 261 Power failure stop selection 0, 1, 2, 11, 12 1 0 62 262 Subtracted frequency at deceleration start 0 to 20Hz 0.01Hz 3Hz 62 263 Subtraction starting frequency 0 to 120Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 60Hz 62 264 Power-failure deceleration time 1 0 to 3600/360s 0.1/0.01s 5s 62 265 Power-failure deceleration time 2 0 to 3600s/360s, 9999 0.1/0.01s 9999 62 266 Power failure deceleration time switchover frequency 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 62 267 Terminal 4 input selection 0, 1, 2 1 0 52 268 Monitor decimal digits selection 0,1, 9999 1 9999 48 269 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set. 270 Stop-on contact/load torque highspeed frequency control selection 0, 1, 2, 3 1 0 63 271 High-speed setting maximum current 0 to 220% 0.1% 50% 63 272 Middle-speed setting minimum current 0 to 220% 0.1% 100% 63 273 Current averaging range 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 63 274 Current averaging filter time constant 1 to 4000 1 16 63 275 Stop-on contact excitation current lowspeed multiplying factor 0 to 1000%, 9999 0.1% 9999 63 276 PWM carrier frequency at stop-on contact 0 to 9, 9999/ 0 to 4, 9999 *2 1 9999 63 Stop-on contact Load torque control high speed frequency control Power failure stop Life check Frequency compensation function Features Constant-power region slip compensation selection Peripheral Devices 247 Standard Specifications 61 Outline Dimension Drawings 0.5s Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation 0.01s Operation Panel 0.01 to 10s Parameter List Slip compensation time constant 246 Explanations of Parameters 61 Protective Functions 9999 Options 0.01% Instructions 0 to 50%, 9999 Rated slip Customer Setting Motor Slip compensation 245 Setting Range Compatibility Refer to Page Name Warranty Initial Value Parameter Inquiry Minimum Setting Increments Function 34 Brake sequence function Function Parameter Setting Range Minimum Setting Increments Initial Value Refer to Page 278 Brake opening frequency 0 to 30Hz 0.01Hz 3Hz 64 279 Brake opening current 0 to 220% 0.1% 130% 64 280 Brake opening current detection time 0 to 2s 0.1s 0.3s 64 281 Brake operation time at start 0 to 5s 0.1s 0.3s 64 282 Brake operation frequency 0 to 30Hz 0.01Hz 6Hz 64 283 Brake operation time at stop 0 to 5s 0.1s 0.3s 64 1 0 64 0.01Hz 9999 64 284 Deceleration detection function selection Overspeed detection frequency (Speed deviation excess detection frequency) 0, 1 0 to 30Hz, 9999 Droop control 285 286 Droop gain 0 to 100% 0.1% 0% 65 287 Droop filter time constant 0 to 1s 0.01s 0.3s 65 288 Droop function activation selection 0, 1, 2, 10, 11 1 0 65 291 Pulse train I/O selection 0, 1, 10, 11, 20, 21, 100 1 0 65 292 Automatic acceleration/deceleration 0, 1, 3, 5 to 8, 11 1 0 50 293 Acceleration/deceleration individual operation selection 0 to 2 1 0 50 294 UV avoidance voltage gain 0 to 200% 0.1% 100% 62 299 Rotation direction detection selection at restarting 0, 1, 9999 1 0 49 331 RS-485 communication station 0 to 31(0 to 247) 1 0 56 332 RS-485 communication speed 3, 6, 12, 24, 48, 96, 192, 384 1 96 56 333 RS-485 communication stop bit length 0, 1, 10, 11 1 1 56 334 RS-485 communication parity check selection 0, 1, 2 1 2 56 335 RS-485 communication retry count 0 to 10, 9999 1 1 56 0 to 999.8s, 9999 0.1s 0s 56 0 to 150ms, 9999 1 9999 56 0, 1 1 0 65 0, 1, 2 1 0 65 0, 1, 2, 10, 12 1 0 54 0, 1, 2 1 1 56 0, 1 1 0 56 1 0 56 RS-485 communication 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 35 Name RS-485 communication check time interval RS-485 communication waiting time setting Communication operation command source Communication speed command source Communication startup mode selection RS-485 communication CR/LF selection Communication EEPROM write selection Communication error count Customer Setting Acceleration S-pattern 2 0 to 50% 1% 0 46 383 Deceleration S-pattern 2 0 to 50% 1% 0 46 Orientation control Pulse train input 384 Input pulse division scaling factor 0 to 250 1 0 65 385 Frequency for 0 input pulse 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 0 65 386 Frequency for maximum input pulse 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 65 393 *6 Orientation selection 0, 1, 2 1 0 66 396 *6 Orientation speed gain (P term) 0 to 1000 1 60 66 397 *6 Orientation speed integral time 0 to 20s 0.001s 0.333s 66 398 *6 Orientation speed gain (D term) 0 to 100 0.1 1 66 399 *6 Orientation deceleration ratio 0 to 1000 1 20 66 419 *6 Position command source selection 0, 2 1 0 67 0 to 32767 1 1 67 0 to 32767 1 1 67 1sec-1 25sec-1 68 1% 0 68 0s 67 Orientation control 420 *6 Position control 421 *6 Command pulse scaling factor numerator Command pulse scaling factor denominator 422 *6 Position loop gain 0 to 150sec-1 423 *6 Position feed forward gain 0 to 100% 424 *6 Position command acceleration/ deceleration time constant 0 to 50s 0.001s 425 *6 Position feed forward command filter 0 to 5s 0.001s 0s 68 426 *6 In-position width 0 to 32767pulse 1 100 68 427 *6 Excessive level error 0 to 400, 9999 1 40 68 428 *6 Command pulse selection 0 to 5 1 0 67 429 *6 Clear signal selection 0, 1 1 1 67 430 *6 Pulse monitor selection 0 to 5, 9999 1 9999 67 Features 382 Peripheral Devices 46 Standard Specifications 0 Outline Dimension Drawings 1% Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation 0 to 50% Operation Panel Deceleration S-pattern 1 381 Parameter List 46 Explanations of Parameters 0 0, 1 Protective Functions 1% Acceleration S-pattern 1 376 *6 Customer Setting Options 0 to 50% 0, 1, 9999 0 to 30Hz 0 to 10Hz 0 to 16383 0 to 8191 0 to 255 0 to 16383 0 to 255 0 to 13 0, 1 0 to 127 0 to 16383 0.1 to 100 0 to 5s 0 to 5s 0 to 60s, 9999 0 to 5s, 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0 to 100 0 to 4096 0 to 400Hz Initial Value Instructions S-pattern acceleration/ deceleration C 380 Stop position command selection Orientation speed Creep speed Creep switchover position Position loop switchover position DC injection brake start position Internal stop position command In-position zone Servo torque selection Encoder rotation direction 16 bit data selection Position shift Orientation position loop gain Completion signal output delay time Encoder stop check time Orientation limit Recheck time Speed feedback range Feedback gain Number of encoder pulses Overspeed detection level Open cable detection enable/disable selection Minimum Setting Increments 1 0.01Hz 0.01Hz 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.1 0.1s 0.1s 1s 0.1s 0.01Hz 0.1 1 0.01Hz Motor 66 Setting Range Compatibility 0 350 *6 351 *6 352 *6 353 *6 354 *6 355 *6 356 *6 357 *6 358 *6 359 *6 360 *6 361 *6 362 *6 363 *6 364 *6 365 *6 366 *6 367 *6 368 *6 369 *6 374 Name Warranty 1 Parameter Inquiry 9999 2Hz 0.5Hz 511 96 5 0 5 1 1 0 0 1 0.5s 0.5s 9999 9999 9999 1 1024 140Hz Refer to Page 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 Function 36 Second motor constants Function Parameter Name Setting Range Minimum Setting Increments Initial Value Refer to Page 450 Second applied motor 0 to 8, 13 to 18, 20, 23, 24, 30, 33, 34, 40, 43, 44, 50, 53, 54, 9999 1 9999 51 451 Second motor control method selection 10, 11, 12, 20, 9999 1 9999 55 453 Second motor capacity 0.4 to 55kW, 9999/ 0 to 3600kW, 9999 *2 0.01kW/0.1kW 9999 55 454 Number of second motor poles 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 9999 1 9999 55 455 Second motor excitation current 0 to 500A,9999/ 0 to 3600A, 9999 *2 0.01/0.1A *2 9999 55 456 Rated second motor voltage 0 to 1000V 0.1V 200/400V 55 457 Rated second motor frequency 10 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 55 458 Second motor constant (R1) 0 to 50Ω, 9999/ 0 to 400mΩ, 9999 *2 9999 55 459 Second motor constant (R2) 0 to 50Ω, 9999/ 0 to 400mΩ, 9999 *2 9999 55 460 Second motor constant (L1) 0 to 50Ω (0 to 1000mH), 9999/ 0 to 3600mΩ (0 to 400mH), 9999 *2 9999 55 9999 55 9999 55 1 0 55 0.1s 0 67 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 0 to 9999 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 *2 0.001Ω/ 0.01mΩ *2 0.001Ω/ 0.01mΩ *2 0.001Ω (0.1mH)/ 0.01mΩ(0.01mH) *2 0.001Ω (0.1mH)/ 461 Second motor constant (L2) 0 to 50Ω (0 to 1000mH), 9999/ 0 to 3600mΩ (0 to 400mH), 9999 *2 0.01mΩ(0.01mH) *2 462 463 Remote output Conditional position feed function 464 *6 37 465 *6 466 *6 467 *6 468 *6 469 *6 470 *6 471 *6 472 *6 473 *6 474 *6 475 *6 476 *6 477 *6 478 *6 479 *6 480 *6 481 *6 482 *6 483 *6 484 *6 485 *6 486 *6 487 *6 488 *6 489 *6 490 *6 491 *6 492 *6 493 *6 494 *6 Second motor constant (X) Second motor auto tuning setting/ status Digital position control sudden stop deceleration time First position feed amount lower 4 digits First position feed amount upper 4 digits Second position feed amount lower 4 digits Second position feed amount upper 4 digits Third position feed amount lower 4 digits Third position feed amount upper 4 digits Fourth position feed amount lower 4 digits Fourth position feed amount upper 4 digits Fifth position feed amount lower 4 digits Fifth position feed amount upper 4 digits Sixth position feed amount lower 4 digits Sixth position feed amount upper 4 digits Seventh position feed amount lower 4 digits Seventh position feed amount upper 4 digits Eighth position feed amount lower 4 digits Eighth position feed amount upper 4 digits Ninth position feed amount lower 4 digits Ninth position feed amount upper 4 digits Tenth position feed amount lower 4 digits Tenth position feed amount upper 4 digits Eleventh position feed amount lower 4 digits Eleventh position feed amount upper 4 digits Twelfth position feed amount lower 4 digits Twelfth position feed amount upper 4 digits Thirteenth position feed amount lower 4 digits Thirteenth position feed amount upper 4 digits Fourteenth position feed amount lower 4 digits Fourteenth position feed amount upper 4 digits Fifteenth position feed amount lower 4 digits Fifteenth position feed amount upper 4 digits 0 to 500Ω (0 to 100%), 9999/ 0 to 100Ω (0 to 100%), 9999 *2 0, 1, 101 0 to 360.0s 0.01Ω (0.1%)/ 0.01Ω (0.01%) *2 495 Remote output selection 0, 1 1 0 68 496 Remote output data 1 0 to 4095 1 0 68 497 Remote output data 2 0 to 4095 1 0 68 Customer Setting 0.01Hz 60Hz 46 516 S-pattern time at a start of acceleration 0.1 to 2.5s 0.1s 0.1s 46 517 S-pattern time at a completion of acceleration 0.1 to 2.5s 0.1s 0.1s 46 518 S-pattern time at a start of deceleraiton 0.1 to 2.5s 0.1s 0.1s 46 519 S-pattern time at a completion of deceleraiton 0.1 to 2.5s 0.1s 0.1s 46 547 USB communication station number 0 to 31 1 0 68 548 USB communication check time interval 0 to 999.8s, 9999 0.1s 9999 68 549 Protocol selection 0, 1 1 0 56 550 NET mode operation command source selection 0, 1, 9999 1 9999 65 551 PU mode operation command source selection 1, 2, 3 1 2 65 555 Current average time 0.1 to 1.0s 0.1s 1s 68 556 Data output mask time 0.0 to 20.0s 0.1s 0s 68 557 Current average value monitor signal output reference current 0 to 500/0 to 3600A 0.01/0.1A *2 *2 Rated inverter current 68 563 Energization time carrying-over times (0 to 65535) 1 0 48 564 Operating time carrying-over times (0 to 65535) 1 0 48 569 Second motor speed control gain 0 to 200% 0.1% 571 Holding time at a start 0.0 to 10.0s, 9999 0.1s 9999 43 574 Second motor online auto tuning 0, 1 1 0 56 575 Output interruption detection time 0 to 3600s, 9999 0.1s 1s 58 576 Output interruption detection level 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 0Hz 58 577 Output interruption cancel level 900 to 1100% 0.1% 1000% 58 611 Acceleration time at a restart 0 to 3600s,9999 0.1s 5/15s *2 49 665 Regeneration avoidance frequency gain 0 to 200% 0.1% 100 49 684 Tuning data unit switchover 0, 1 1 0 55 800 Control method selection 0 to 5, 9 to 12, 20 1 20 55 802 *6 0, 1 1 0 43 803 Pre-excitation selection Constant power range torque characteristic selection 0, 1 1 0 45 804 Torque command source selection 0, 1, 3 to 6 1 0 69 805 Torque command value (RAM) 600 to 1400% 1% 1000% 69 806 Torque command value (RAM,EEPROM) 600 to 1400% 1% 1000% 69 807 Speed limit selection 0, 1, 2 1 0 69 808 Forward rotation speed limit 0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 69 809 Reverse rotation speed limit 0 to 120Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 69 100% 55 Features 1 to 120Hz Peripheral Devices Speed setting reference Standard Specifications 505 Outline Dimension Drawings Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation 68 Operation Panel 9999 Parameter List 1 Explanations of Parameters 0 to 9998, 9999 Protective Functions Maintenance timer alarm output set time Options 504 Instructions 68 Motor 0 Compatibility 1 Warranty 0 (1 to 9998) Customer Setting Inquiry Maintenance timer USB 503 S-pattern acceleration/ deceleration D Refer to Page Communication Initial Value Current average value monitor Minimum Setting Increments Second motor constants Setting Range PID control Name Torque command Parameter Speed limit Maintenance Function 38 Indication function Additional function Torque bias Adjustment function Easy gain tuning Torque limit Function 39 Parameter Name Setting Range Minimum Setting Increments Initial Value Refer to Page 810 Torque limit input method selection 0, 1 1 0 45 811 Set resolution switchover 0, 1, 10, 11 1 0 45 812 Torque limit level (regeneration) 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 45 813 Torque limit level (3rd quadrant) 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 45 814 Torque limit level (4th quadrant) 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 45 815 Torque limit level 2 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 45 816 Torque limit level during acceleration 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 45 817 Torque limit level during deceleration 0 to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 45 818 Easy gain tuning response level setting 1 to 15 1 2 69 819 Easy gain tuning selection 0 to 2 1 0 69 820 Speed control P gain 1 0 to 1000% 1% 60% 70 821 Speed control integral time 1 0 to 20s 0.001s 0.333s 70 822 Speed setting filter 1 0 to 5s, 9999 0.001s 9999 52 823 *6 Speed detection filter 1 0 to 0.1s 0.001s 0.001s 70 824 Torque control P gain 1 0 to 200% 1% 100% 70 825 Torque control integral time 1 0 to 500ms 0.1ms 5ms 70 826 Torque setting filter 1 0 to 5s, 9999 0.001s 9999 52 827 Torque detection filter 1 0 to 0.1s 0.001s 0s 70 828 Model speed control gain 0 to 1000% 1% 60% 70 830 Speed control P gain 2 0 to 1000%, 9999 1% 9999 70 831 Speed control integral time 2 0 to 20s, 9999 0.001s 9999 70 832 Speed setting filter2 0 to 5s, 9999 0.001s 9999 52 833 *6 Speed detection filter 2 0 to 0.1s 0.001s 0.001s 70 834 Torque control P gain 2 0 to 200%, 9999 1% 9999 70 835 Torque control integral time 2 0 to 500ms, 9999 0.1ms 9999 70 836 Torque setting filter2 0 to 5s, 9999 0.001s 9999 52 837 Torque detection filter 2 0 to 0.1s, 9999 0.001s 9999 70 Torque bias selection Torque bias 1 Torque bias 2 Torque bias 3 Torque bias filter Torque bias operation time Torque bias balance compensation Fall-time torque bias terminal 1 bias Fall-time torque bias terminal 1 gain 0 to 3, 9999 600 to 1400%, 9999 600 to 1400%, 9999 600 to 1400%, 9999 0 to 5s, 9999 0 to 5s, 9999 0 to 10V, 9999 0 to 400%, 9999 0 to 400%, 9999 1 1% 1% 1% 0.001s 0.01s 0.1V 1% 1% 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 849 Analog input off set adjustment 0 to 200% 0.1% 100% 52 850 Control operation selection 0, 1 1 0 43 853 Speed deviation time 0 to 100s 0.1s 1s 64 854 Excitation ratio 0 to 100% 1% 100% 71 858 Terminal 4 function assignment 0, 1, 4, 9999 1 0 71 0.01A/0.1A *2 9999 55 0.01A/0.1A *2 9999 55 840 *6 841 *6 842 *6 843 *6 844 *6 845 *6 846 *6 847 *6 848 *6 0 to 500A, 9999/ 0 to 3600A, 9999 *2 0 to 500A, 9999/ 0 to 3600A, 9999 *2 859 Torque current 860 Second motor torque current 862 Notch filter time constant 0 to 60 1 0 72 863 Notch filter depth 0, 1, 2, 3 1 0 72 864 Torque detection 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 72 865 Low speed detection 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 1.5Hz 47 866 Torque monitoring reference 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 48 Customer Setting 0, 1, 2 1 0 70 Speed feed forward filter 0 to 1s 0.01s 0s 70 879 Speed feed forward torque limit 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 70 880 Load inertia ratio 0 to 200 times 0.1 7 70 881 Speed feed forward gain 0 to 1000% 1% 0% 70 882 Regeneration avoidance operation selection 0, 1, 2 1 0 72 883 Regeneration avoidance operation level 300 to 800V 0.1V 380/760VDC 72 884 Regeneration avoidance at deceleration detection sensitivity 0 to 5 1 0 72 886 Regeneration avoidance voltage gain 0 to 200% 0.1% 100% 72 888 Free parameter 1 0 to 9999 1 9999 73 889 Free parameter 2 0 to 9999 1 9999 73 891 Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times 0 to 4, 9999 1 9999 48 892 Load factor 30 to 150% 0.1% 100% 73 893 Energy saving monitor reference (motor capacity) 0.1 to 55/0 to 3600kW *2 0.01/ 0.1kW *2 Inverter rated capacity 73 894 Control selection during commercial power-supply operation 0, 1, 2, 3 1 0 73 895 Power saving rate reference value 0, 1, 9999 1 9999 73 896 Power unit cost 0 to 500, 9999 0.01 9999 73 897 Power saving monitor average time 0,1 to 1000h, 9999 1 9999 73 898 Power saving cumulative monitor clear 0, 1, 10, 9999 1 9999 73 899 Operation time rate (estimated value) 0.1% 9999 73 0, 1 877 Speed feed forward control/model adaptive speed control selection 878 Energy saving monitor Free Regeneration avoidance function parameters Control system functions Protective Functions Fault definition 0 to 100%, 9999 *5 Features 72 875 Peripheral Devices 45 0 0 to 200% Standard Specifications 150% 1 874 OLT level setting Outline Dimension Drawings 0.1% 0 to 120Hz Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation 72 Speed limit Operation Panel 61 Input phase failure protection selection 0§1 873 Parameter List 0 20Hz 872 Explanations of Parameters 1 0.01Hz 0 to 6, 9999 Protective Functions 71 0 to 5s Terminal 1 function assignment Options 48 0 AM output filter 868 Instructions 0.01s 1 867 Customer Setting Motor 0.01s Setting Range Compatibility Refer to Page Name Warranty Initial Value Parameter Inquiry Minimum Setting Increments Function 40 Function Calibration parameters Calibration parameters C0 (900) C1 (901) C2 (902) C3 (902) 125 (903) C4 (903) C5 (904) C6 (904) 126 (905) C7 (905) C12 (917) C13 (917) C14 (918) C15 (918) C16 (919) C17 (919) C18 (920) C19 (920) C38 (932) C39 (932) C40 (933) C41 (933) 989 Clear parameters PU *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 41 Parameter Name Setting Range Minimum Setting Increments Initial Value Refer to Page FM terminal calibration 73 AM terminal calibration 73 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 0Hz 57 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 0 to 300% 0.1% 0% 57 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 57 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 57 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 0Hz 57 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 0 to 300% 0.1% 20% 57 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 57 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 57 Terminal 1 bias frequency (speed) 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 0Hz 57 Terminal 1 bias frequency (speed) 0 to 300% 0.1% 0% 57 Terminal 1 gain frequency (speed) 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 57 Terminal 1 gain (speed) 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 57 Terminal 1 bias command (torque/ magnetic flux) 0 to 400% 0.1% 0% 57 Terminal 1 bias (torque/magnetic flux) 0 to 300% 0.1% 0% 57 Terminal 1 gain command (torque/ magnetic flux) 0 to 400% 0.1% 100% 57 Terminal 1 gain (torque/magnetic flux) 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 57 Terminal 4 bias command (torque/ magnetic flux) 0 to 400% 0.1% 0% 57 Terminal 4 bias (torque/magnetic flux) 0 to 300% 0.1% 20% 57 Terminal 4 gain command (torque/ magnetic flux) 0 to 400% 0.1% 100% 57 Terminal 4 gain (torque/magnetic flux) 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 57 10/100 *2 Parameter copy alarm release 10/100 1 990 PU buzzer control 0, 1 1 1 74 991 PU contrast adjustment 0 to 63 1 58 74 Pr. CL Parameter clear 0, 1 1 0 74 ALLC All parameter clear 0, 1 1 0 74 Er.CL Alarm history clear 0, 1 1 0 74 PCPY Parameter copy 0, 1, 2, 3 1 0 74 Differ according to capacities. (0.4K, 0.75K/1.5K to 3.7K/5.5K, 7.5K/11K to 55K/75K or more) Differ according to capacities. (55K or less/75K or more) Differ according to capacities. (7.5K or less/11K or more) Differ according to capacities. (7.5K or less/11K to 55K/75K or more) Differs according to the voltage class. (200V class/400V class) Setting can be made only when the FR-A7AP is mounted. Customer Setting Explanations of Parameters The abbreviations in the explanations below are as follows: V/F ...V/F control, Magnetic flux ...advanced magnetic flux vector control, 1.5K to 3.7K 5.5K, 7.5K 11K to 55K Pr.0 Setting Pr.46 Pr.112 range 6% 4% 3% 2% 75K or more 1% Output frequency (Hz) 0 * If the Pr.71 initial value is Base changed to the setting for use frequency with a constant-torque motor, the Pr.0 setting changes to the corresponding value in the above table. Pr. 1, 2, 18 Pr.19 Output frequency (Hz) Operation Panel 0.4K, 0.75K Output voltage When Using the Constant Torque Motor ← ← 2%* ← ← Pr.3 Pr.47 Pr.113 Motor speed can be limitted. Clamp the upper and lower limits of the output frequency. To perform operation above 120Hz (60Hz for the75K or more), set the maximum output frequency in Pr.18. (When Pr.18 is set, Pr.1 is automatically changed to the frequency set in Pr.18. Also, when Pr.1 is set, Pr.18 is automatically changed to the frequency set in Pr.1. Pr.18 is valid only under V/F control and advanced magnetic flux vector control. The maximum frequency is valid for the speed command obtained from the droop pulses during position control under vector control. The minimum frequency is invalid. Output frequency (Hz) 0 Clamped at the (4mA) minimum frequency Pr.4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) Pr.6 Multi-speed setting (low speed) Pr.25 Multi-speed setting (speed 5) Pr.27 Multi-speed setting (speed 7) Pr.233 Multi-speed setting (speed 9) Pr.235 Multi-speed setting (speed 11) Pr.237 Multi-speed setting (speed 13) Pr.239 Multi-speed setting (speed 15) Frequency setting 5, 10V (20mA) Pr.5 Multi-speed setting (middle speed) Pr.24 Multi-speed setting (speed4) Pr.26 Multi-speed setting (speed 6) Pr.232 Multi-speed input compensation selection Pr.234 Multi-speed setting (speed 10) Pr.236 Multi-speed setting (speed 12) Pr.238 Multi-speed setting (speed 14) Can be used to change the preset speed in the parameter with the contact signals. Any speed can be selected by merely turning on-off the contact signals (RH, RM, RL, REX signals). The inverter operates at frequencies set in Pr.4 when RH signal is on, Pr.5 when RM signal is on and Pr.6 when RL signal is on. Frequency from 4 speed to 15 speed can be set according to the combination of the RH, RM, RL and REX signals. Set the running frequencies in Pr.24 to Pr.27, Pr.232 to Pr.239 (In the initial value setting, speed 4 to speed 15 are unavailable) Clamped at the maximum frequency Pr.1 Pr.18 Pr.2 Multi-speed setting operation Speed 1 (High speed) Speed 10 Speed 5 Speed 2 (Middle speed) Speed 3 Speed 4 (Low speed) Speed 6 Speed 7 Time RH RM RL ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON Output frequency (Hz) Pr.2 Minimum frequency Output frequency (Hz) Pr.1 Maximum frequency Pr.18 High speed maximum frequency Parameter List Pr. 4 to 6, 24 to 27, 232 to 239 Maximum/minimum frequency Speed 9 Speed 11 Speed 12 Speed 13 Speed 8 Speed 14 Speed 15 ON ON ON ON RH ON ON RM RL REX ON ON Time ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON *1 When "9999" is set in Pr.232 Multi-speed setting (speed 8), operation is performed at frequency set in Pr.6 when RH, RM and RL are turned off and REX is turned on. Inquiry *1 Explanations of Parameters Pr.0 Initial Value 100% Used to adjust the inverter outputs (voltage, frequency) to the motor rating. When running a standard motor, generally set the rated frequency of the motor in Pr.3 Base frequency. When running the motor using commercial power supply-inverter switch-over operation, set Pr.3 to the same value as the power supply frequency. When you want to change the base frequency when switching multiple motors with one inverter, etc., use the Pr.47 Second V/F (base frequency) and Pr.113 Third V/F (base frequency) . Use Pr.19 Base frequency voltage to set the base voltage (e.g. rated motor voltage). This function is valid for V/F control only. Protective Functions Motor torque in the low-frequency range can be adjusted to the load to increase the starting motor torque. Three kinds of starting torque boost can be switched by using terminal RT and X9 signal. This function is valid for V/F control only. V/F Pr.19 Base frequency voltage Pr.113 Third V/F (base frequency) Options A voltage drop in the low-frequency region can be compensated to improve the motor torque reduction in the low speed range. Pr.3 Base frequency Pr.47 Second V/F (base frequency) Standard Specifications Base frequency, voltage Pr.46 Second torque boost Instructions Pr.0 Torque boost Pr.112 Third torque boost V/F Output voltage (V) Manual torque boost Outline Dimension Drawings Pr. 3, 19, 47, 113 Motor Pr. 0, 46, 112 Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation (Parameters without any indication are valid for all control) Peripheral Devices Features ...vector control Compatibility Vector Warranty Sensorless ...real sensorless vector control, When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions. 42 Pr. 7, 8, 20, 21, 44, 45, 110, 111 Pr. 10 to 12, 802, 850 Acceleration/deceleration time setting DC injection brake, zero speed control, servo lock Used to set motor acceleration/deceleration time. Set a larger value for a slower speed increase/decrease or a smaller value for a faster speed increase/decrease. Use Pr.7 Acceleration time to set the acceleration time taken to reach Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency from 0Hz. Use Pr.8 Deceleration time to set the deceleration time taken to reach 0Hz from Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency. Pr.21 Description Running Setting frequency Increments: 0 Output frequency (Hz) Pr.20 (60Hz) 0.1s (initial Range: value) 0 to 3600s Time Acceleration Pr.7 Deceleration Pr.8 Pr.44 time time Pr.45 Pr.110 Pr.111 1 Increments: 0.01s Range: 0 to 360s Increments and setting range of acceleration/ deceleration time setting can be changed. Pr.10 DC injection brake operation frequency Pr.12 DC injection brake operation voltage Pr.850 Brake operation selection the stop timing and braking torque. When "8888" is set in Pr. 11, DC brake is applied while X13 signal is on. Pr.12 is valid only under V/F control and advanced magnetic flux vector control. DC injection brake voltage Time Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay Pr.51 Second electronic thermal O/L relay the motor from overheat. This feature provides the optimum protective characteristics, including reduced motor cooling capability, at low speed. Used to detect the motor overload (overheat) and stop the inverter output transistor operation to stop the output. Set the rated current [A] of the motor in Pr.9. (When the power supply specification is 200V/220V(400V/440V) 60Hz, 3.7K or less 4% * ← 2%* ← ← ← 3% ← ← If the Pr.71 initial value is changed to the setting for use with a constant-torque motor, the Pr.12 setting changes to the corresponding value in the above table. DC brake (setting "0", initial value) and zero speed control (setting "1") can be selected using Pr.850 under real sensorless vector control. This function selects either zero speed control or servo lock for braking operation when pre-excitation is performed with the LX signal during speed control operation under vector control. Turning on the LX signal enables the pre-excitation function. Pr.802 Setting 0 Braking Description Operation (initial value) Zero speed control 1 Servo lock Even under load, an attempt is made to maintain 0r/min to keep the motor shaft stopped. Note that if the shaft is overcome and turned by external force, it does not return to the original position. Even under load, an attempt is made to maintain the motor shaft position. Note that if the shaft is turned by external force, it returns to the original position after the external force has gone away. set the 1.1 times the rated motor current.) Set "0" in Pr.9 to make the electronic thermal relay function invalid when using a motor with an external thermal relay, etc. (Note that the output transistor protection of the inverter functions (E.THT).) When using a Mitsubishi constant-torque motor 1) Set any of "1, 13 to 18, 50, 53, 54" in Pr.71. (This provides a 100% continuous torque characteristic in the low-speed range.) 2) Set the rated current of the motor in Pr.9. When the RT signal is on, thermal protection is provided based on the Pr.51 setting. Use this function when running two motors of different rated currents individually by a single inverter. (When running two motors together, use external thermal relays.) Pr.12 Initial Value 4% 11K to 55K 2% Time 75K or more 1% Pr. 9, 51 Set the current of the electronic thermal relay function to protect When Using the When Mitsubishi Using the Energy Constant Saving Torque Motor Motor 5.5K, 7.5K Pr.12 Operation voltage Pr.11 Operation time Motor protection from overheat (electronic thermal relay function ) Pr.11 DC injection brake operation time Pr.802 Pre-excitation selection The DC injection brake can be operated at a motor stop to adjust Pr.10 Operation frequency Pr.8 Deceleration time Pr.21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments Pr.45 Second deceleration time Pr.111 Third deceleration time Output frequency (Hz) Pr.7 Acceleration time Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency Pr.44 Second acceleration/deceleration time Pr.110 Third acceleration/deceleration time Set the frequency at which control changes to zero speed control or servo lock control (select using Pr.802 ) in Pr.10 and operation time in Pr.11 during vector control. The initial value of Pr.10 automatically changes to 0.5Hz during vector control. Pr. 13, 571 Starting frequency Pr.13 Starting frequency Pr.571 Holding time at a start You can set the starting frequency and hold the set starting frequency for a certain period of time. Set these functions when you need the starting torque or want smooth motor drive at a start. Setting range Output frequency (Hz) 60 Pr.13 0 Forward rotation 43 When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions. Pr.571 setting time ON Time 100% Setting "3" setting "5", RT signal is off For elevator loads Output voltage Forward rotation Reverse rotation Pr.0 Base frequency Output frequency (Hz) Reverse rotation Forward rotation Base frequency Output frequency (Hz) Pr.16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time You can set the frequency and acceleration/deceleration time for jog operation. Jog operation can be performed from either the outside or PU. Can be used for conveyor positioning, test operation, etc. Forward rotation Reverse rotation Time Pr.16 JOG signal Forward rotation STF Reverse rotation STR Refer to the section about Pr. 1. Pr. 19 Refer to the section about Pr. 3. Pr. 20, 21 Refer to the section about Pr. 7. ON ON ON When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions. V/F Magnetic flux Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level Pr.23 Stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed Pr.48 Second stall prevention operation current Pr.49 Second stall prevention operation frequency Pr.66 Stall prevention operation reduction starting frequency Pr.115 Thrid stall prevention operation frequency Pr.114 Third stall prevention operation current Pr.148 Stall prevention level at 0V input Pr.149 Stall prevention level at 10V input Pr.154 Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation Pr.156 Stall prevention operation selection Pr.157 OL signal output timer Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignment This function monitors the output current and automatically changes the output frequency to prevent the inverter from coming to an alarm stop due to overcurrent, overvoltage, etc. It can also limit stall prevention and fast-response current limit operation during acceleration/deceleration, driving or regeneration. Invalid for vector control. Stall prevention If the output current exceeds the stall prevention operation level, the output frequency of the inverter is automatically varied to reduce the output current. Also the second and third stall prevention function can restrict the output frequency range in which the stall prevention function is valid. Fast-response current limit If the current exceeds the limit value, the output of the inverter is shut off to prevent an overcurrent. Set in Pr.22 the percentage of the output current to the rated inverter current at which stall prevention operation will be performed. Normally set this parameter to 150% (initial value). For the 3.7kW or less, the Pr.22 setting changes from 150% (initial value) to 200% when operation is changed from V/F control or advanced magnetic flux vector control to real sensorless vector control or vector control. To set stall prevention operation level using an analog signal from terminal 1 (terminal 4) , set "4" in Pr.868 (Pr. 858). For the adjustment of bias/gain of analog signal, use Pr.148 and Pr.149. During high-speed operation above the rated motor frequency, acceleration may not be made because the motor current does not increase. If operation is performed in a high frequency range, the current at motor lockup becomes smaller than the rated output current of the inverter, and the protective function (OL) is executed even if the motor is at a stop. To improve the operating characteristics of the motor in this case, the stall prevention level can be reduced in the high frequency range. This function is effective for performing operation up to the high-speed range on a centrifugal separator etc. Normally, set 60Hz in Pr.66 and 100% in Pr.23. Peripheral Devices Standard Specifications Outline Dimension Drawings Pr. 18 Stall prevention operation Jog operation Output frequency(Hz) Pr.20 Pr.15 Jog frequency setting range ON Pr. 22, 23, 48, 49, 66, 114, 115, 148, 149, 154, 156, 157, 858, 868 Pr. 15, 16 Pr.15 Jog frequency ON STF (STR) signal At forward rotation boost...0% At reverse rotation boost...Pr.0 setting 100% Pr.0 MRS signal Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation At forward rotation boost...Pr.0 setting At reverse rotation boost...0% MRS SD (PC) Operation Panel MRS SD (PC) Inverter Parameter List Output voltage Output voltage Setting "2" setting "4", RT signal is off For elevator loads Setting value "2" Output stop Time Pr.3 Base frequency Output frequency (Hz) Pr.3 Base frequency Output frequency (Hz) (Initial value) Inverter Explanations of Parameters Setting "1" For variable-torque load 100% 100% Setting value "0" Output stop Protective Functions Motor coasts to stop Options The inverter output can be shut off by the MRS signal. Also, logic for the MRS signal can be selected. Instructions Setting "0" (initial value) setting "4, 5", RT signal is on For rated torque load (V/F Motor Pr.17 MRS input selection You can select the optimum output characteristic characteristic) for the application and load characteristics. This function is valid for V/F control only. Output voltage Logic selection of output stop signal (MRS) Compatibility V/F Pr.14 Load pattern selection Warranty V/F pattern matching applications Features Pr. 17 Inquiry Pr. 14 44 By setting "9999" (initial value) in Pr.23 Stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed, the stall prevention operation level is constant at the Pr.22 setting up to 400Hz. Stall prevention operation level (%) When Pr.23=9999 Pr.23 400Hz Output frequency (Hz) Pr.66 Setting "9999" in Pr.49 Second stall prevention operation frequency and turning the RT signal on make Pr.48 Second stall prevention operation current valid. Setting a value other than "0" in Pr.115 Thrid stall prevention operation frequency and turning the X9 signal on make Pr.114 Third stall prevention operation current valid. The stall prevention operation level from 0Hz to the output frequency set in Pr.49 (Pr.115) can be set in Pr. 48 (Pr.114). Set frequency is Pr. 49 (Pr.115)or less Set frequency exceeds Pr. 49(Pr.115) Output frequency (Hz) Output frequency Set frequency Pr.49 (Pr.115) Time Stall prevention level Pr. 22 used Output frequency (Hz) Pr.49 (Pr.115) Set frequency Torque limit level Output frequency Set the torque limit level within the range 0 to 400% in Pr.22 . If the TL signal is turned on, torque limit level 2 (Pr.815) functions. You can select whether the torque limit level is set using parameters or analog input teminals (terminal 1, 4). In addition, you can set torque limit level for forward (power driving/ regeneration) and reverse (power driving/regeneration) operation individually. Pr. Number 810 0 (initial value) Pr. 48 (Pr.114) used 0.01Hz to 400Hz 9999 Stall prevention operation and fast response current limit function can be limitted according to the operation condition using Pr.156. When real sensorless vector control is selected using Pr.800, Pr.22 serves as a torque limit level. 9999 (initial value) 0 to 400% Operation The second (third) stall prevention function is not activated. The second (third) stall prevention function is activated according to the frequency. The second stall prevention function is performed according to the RT signal. RT signal on...Stall level Pr.48 RT signal off...Stall level Pr.22 0 (initial value) 0 to 400% 813 Pr.49 Pr.115 Setting Setting Setting Range 1 Time Pr. 22 used Vector This function limits the output torque to the predetermined value during speed control under real sensorless vector control or vector control. 812 Pr. 48 (Pr.114) used Sensorless Pr.22 Torque limit level Pr.803 Constant power range torque characteristic selection Pr.811 Set resolution switchover Pr.810 Torque limit input method selection Pr.812 Torque limit level (regeneration) Pr. 813 Torque limit level (3rd quadrant) Pr.814 Torque limit level (4th quadrant) Pr.815 Torque limit level 2 Pr.817 Torque limit level during deceleration Pr.816 Torque limit level during acceleration Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignment Pr.874 OLT level setting Reduction ratio compensation factor (%) Pr.22 Pr. 22, 803, 810 to 817, 858, 868, 874 9999 (initial value) 0 to 400% 814 9999 (initial value) Description Torque limit by parameter Torque limit based on the analog input from terminal 1 and 4. Set the torque limit level for forward rotation regeneration. Pr.22 value is used for limit. Set the torque limit level for reverse rotation driving. Pr.22 value is used for limit. Set the torque limit level for reverse rotation regeneration. Pr.22 value is used for limit. To set torque limit level using an analog signal from terminal 1 (terminal 4) , set "1" in Pr.810 and "4" in Pr.868 (Pr.858). Torque limit value during acceleration/deceleration can be set using Pr.816 and Pr.817. You can select whether the torque limit in the constant output range be constant torque limit or constant output limit using Pr.803. This function can make an alarm stop if the torque limit is activated to stall the motor. Set the output torque at which an alarm stop is made in Pr.874 . Using Pr.811, the setting increments of the parameter-set torque limit can be changed from 0.1% to 0.01% increments. (valid during vector control) When V/F control and advanced magnetic flux vector control are selected using Pr.800 , Pr.22 serves as a stall prevention operation level. Pr. 24 to 27 Refer to the section about Pr. 4. Pr. 28 Input compensation of multi-speed and remote setting Pr.28 Multi-speed input compensation selection By inputting the frequency setting compensation signal (terminal 1, 2), speed (frequency) compensation can be applied for the speed setting such as the multi-speed setting and remote setting function. Pr.28 Setting 0 (initial value) 1 45 When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions. Description Without compensation With compensation 1 10/6% *2 2 0% (initial value) 10 *1 11 10/6% *2 20 *1 21 10/6% *2 Setting value "3" [Anti-backlash measure function] Pr. 142 Pr. 140 Pr. 13 Pr. 141 Pr. 143 Time Backlash measures (setting "3", Pr.140 to Pr.143 ) ⋅ To avoid backlash, acceleration/ deceleration is temporarily stopped. Set the acceleration/deceleration stopping frequency and time in Pr.140 to Pr.143. S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C (setting "4", Pr.380 to Pr.383) ⋅ The S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C switch signal (X20) changes an acceleration/deceleration curve. ⋅ Set % of time taken for forming an S-pattern in Pr.380 to Pr.383 as acceleration time is 100%.. Frequency Pr.381 Pr.382 Output frequency Pr.383 Set frequency Pr.380 S-pattern acceleration/ deceleration C switchover (X20) Time OFF ON OFF S-pattern acceleration/deceleration D (setting "5", Pr.516 to Pr.519) ⋅ Set the time taken for operations for S-pattern of S-pattern Pr.516 Pr.517 Pr.518 R, S, T Features Peripheral Devices Standard Specifications Outline Dimension Drawings R, S, T P, N P, N P, N R, S, T/P, N R, S, T/P, N The brake duty varies according to the inverter capacity. 7.5K or less/11K or more <75K or more> Power Supply Pr.30 Setting Pr.70 Setting 0 (initial value) — Not used R, S, T 0% Power regeneration converter (MT-RC) R, S, T 10% Brake unit (MT-BU5) 1 Regeneration Unit — High power factor converter (MT-HC) P, N 10 — Not used P, N 11 10% Brake unit (MT-BU5) P, N 20 — Not used R, S, T/P, N 21 10% Brake unit (MT-BU5) R, S, T/P, N 2 Pr.519 Inquiry Output frequency acceleration/deceleration in Pr.516 to Pr. 519 . *1 *2 Built-in brake, brake unit (FR-BU, BU) High-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR) High power factor converter (FR-HC), power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) Built-in brake, brake unit (FR-BU, BU) High-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR) Built-in brake, brake unit (FR-BU, BU) High-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR) Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation *1 Power Supply Operation Panel 0 (initial value) Regeneration Unit Parameter List Pr.70 Setting Explanations of Parameters Pr.30 Setting Options Output frequency (Hz) <55K or less> Set frequency (Hz) Output frequency (Hz) Output frequency (Hz) Time Pr.70 Special regenerative brake duty When making frequent starts/stops, use the optional "high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR)" to increase the regenerative brake duty. (22K or less) Use the power regeneration common converter (FR-CV for the 55K or less) or power regeneration converter (MT-RC 75K or more) for continuous operation in regeneration status. Use a high efficiency converter (FR-HC for the 55K or less, MT-HC for the 75K or more) for harmonic suppression and power factor improvement. For the 75K or more, use the brake unit MT-BU5 or BR5 when the regenerative brake duty is need to be increased due to frequent starts and stops. You can select either DC feeding mode 1 in which operation is performed with DC power (terminal P, N) or DC feeding mode 2 in which operation is performed normally with the AC power (R, S, T) and performed with DC power such as battery at occurrence of power failure. Protective Functions Pr.30 Regenerative function selection Output frequency (Hz) Acceleration/deceleration patterns suitable for applications can be selected. The backlash measures to stop acceleration/deceleration at the frequency and time set in parameter during acceleration/deceleration can be set. Linear acceleration/deceleration (setting "0", initial value) Setting value "0" ⋅ For the inverter operation, the output [Linear acceleration frequency is made to change linearly / deceleration] (linear acceleration/deceleration) to prevent the motor and inverter from excessive stress to reach the set frequency during acceleration, Time deceleration, etc. when frequency changes. S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A Setting value "1" (setting "1") [S-pattern acceleration ⋅ For machine tool spindle applications, /deceleration A] etc. Used when acceleration/deceleration fb must be made in a short time to a high-speed range of not lower than Time the base frequency. S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B Setting value "2" (setting "2") [S-pattern acceleration /deceleration B] ⋅ For prevention of load shifting in conveyor and other applications. Since acceleration/deceleration is always made in an S shape from current frequency (f2) to target f1 frequency (f1), this function eases shock produced at acceleration/ deceleration and is effective for load f2 collapse prevention, etc. Selection of regeneration unit Instructions Pr.140 Backlash acceleration stopping frequency Pr.142 Backlash deceleration stopping frequency Pr.380 Acceleration S-pattern 1 Pr.382 Acceleration S-pattern 2 Pr.516 S-pattern time at a start of acceleration Pr.518 S-pattern time at a start of deceleraiton Motor Pr.29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection Pr.141 Backlash acceleration stopping time Pr.143 Backlash deceleration stopping time Pr.381 Deceleration S-pattern 1 Pr.383 Deceleration S-pattern 2 Pr.517 S-pattern time at a completion of acceleration Pr.519 S-pattern time at a completion of deceleraiton Compatibility Acceleration/deceleration pattern and backlash measures Pr. 30, 70 Warranty Pr. 29, 140 to 143, 380 to 383, 516 to 519 Time Start signal ON When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions. 46 Pr. 31 to 36 Pr. 41 to 43, 50, 116, 865 Avoid mechanical resonance points (frequency jump) Detection of output frequency and motor speed (SU, FU, FU2, FU3, FB, FB2, FB3, LS signal) Pr.31 Frequency jump 1A Pr.33 Frequency jump 2A Pr.35 Frequency jump 3A Pr.41 Up-to-frequency sensitivity Pr.43 Output frequency detection for reverse rotation Pr.116 Third output frequency detection Frequency jump Set frequency (Hz) The Pr.41 value can be adjusted within the range ±1% and ±100% on the assumption that the set frequency is 100%. This parameter can be used to ensure that the running frequency has been reached to provide the operation start signal etc. for related equipment. Pr.34 Pr.33 Pr.32 Pr.31 Pr.37 Speed display Pr. 505 Speed setting reference Pr.144 Speed setting switchover Pr. 811 Set resolution switchover The monitor display and frequency setting of the PU (FR-DU07/ FR-PU04/FR-PU07) can be changed to the motor speed and machine speed. When the running speed monitor is selected, each monitor and setting are determined according to the combination of Pr.37 and Pr.144. (The units within the thick frame are the initial values.) Using Pr.811, the setting increments of running speed monitor and speed setting (r/min) can be changed from 1r/min to 0.1 r/min. Output Set Pr.37 Pr.144 Frequency Frequency Setting Setting Monitor Monitor 1 to 9998 *1 *2 *3 Running Speed Monitor Frequency Setting Parameter Setting 0 2 to 10 Hz Hz Hz Hz r/min*1 r/min*1 Hz Hz 102 to 110 r/min*1 r/min*1 r/min*1 r/min*1 0 Hz Hz Machine speed*1 Hz 2 to 10 Machine speed*1 Machine speed*1 Machine speed*1 Machine speed*1 102 to 110 Hz Hz r/min*1 Hz Motor speed (r/min) conversion formula ... frequency × 120/number of motor poles (Pr.144) Machine speed conversion formula ......Pr.37 × frequency/Pr. 505 For Pr.144 in the above formula, the value is "Pr.144 - 100" when "102 to 110" is set in Pr.144 and the value is “4” when Pr.37 =0 and Pr.144 =0. The increments for Hz are 0.01Hz, machine speed are 1m/min, and r/min are 1r/min. Running speed monitor displays actual motor speed (encoder) during encoder feedback control and vector control. Adjustment range Pr.41 Time OFF ON OFF When the output frequency reaches or exceeds the Pr.42 setting, the output frequency detection signals (FU, FB) are output. This function can be used for electromagnetic brake operation, open signal, etc. When the detection frequency is set in Pr.43, frequency detection for reverse rotation use only can also be set. This function is effective for switching the timing of electromagnetic brake operation between forward rotation (rise) and reverse rotation (fall) during vertical lift operation, etc. When outputting a frequency detection signal besides the FU (FB) signal, set the detection frequency in Pr.50 or Pr.116. The FU2 (FB2) signal is output when the output frequency reaches or exceeds the Pr.50 setting (FU3 (FB3) signal is output if reaches or exceeds the Pr.116 setting). Pr.42 Pr.50 Pr.116 Forward rotation (Hz) Speed display and speed setting SU Output frequency Pr. 37, 144, 505, 811 Output frequency (Hz) Running frequency Up to three areas may be set, with the jump frequencies set to either the top or bottom point of each area. The value set to 1A, 2A or 3A is a jump point and operation in the jump zone is performed at these frequencies. Frequency jump is not performed if the initial value is set to "9999". During acceleration/deceleration, the running frequency within the set area is valid. 0 Pr.42 Output frequency detection Pr.50 Second output frequency detection Pr.865 Low speed detection The inverter output frequency is detected and output at the output signals. Pr.36 Pr.35 Reverse rotation Output signal OFF FU, FU2, FU3 (FB,FB2,FB3) ON OFF ON Time Pr.43 Pr.50 Pr.116 OFF The FU (FU2 and FU3) signal is output when the output frequency reaches the speed command value and output the FB (FB2, FB3) signal when the output frequency reaches the actual motor speed (estimated actual speed value) under real sensoreless vector control and vector control. (The output timing of the FU and FB signals is the same under V/F control and advanced magnetic flux vector control.) The LS signal is output when the output frequency reduces below the Pr.865 setting under real sensorless vector control and vector control. The signal is output during inverter operation under the following conditions. Output frequency (Hz) When it is desired to avoid resonance attributable to the natural frequency of a mechanical system, these parameters allow resonant frequencies to be jumped. Pr.32 Frequency jump 1B Pr.34 Frequency jump 2B Pr.36 Frequency jump 3B Pr.865 Time LS Pr. 44, 45 When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions. OFF ON Refer to the section about Pr. 7. Pr. 46 Refer to the section about Pr. 0. Pr. 47 Refer to the section about Pr. 3. Pr. 48, 49 47 ON Refer to the section about Pr. 22. Pr. 50 Refer to the section about Pr. 41. Pr. 51 Refer to the section about Pr. 9. ⋅ The digits of the cumulative power monitor value can be shifted to the Pr. 52, 54, 158, 170, 171, 268, 563, 564, 867, 891 right for the number of Pr.891 settings. 200V class: 400V 400V class: 800V 0/100 3 — 0.01Hz 0/100 5 *1 — 5 Running speed 1(r/min) 6 *1 6 0.1% 7 *1 7 0.1V 8 *1 8 0.1% 9 *1 9 0.1% 10 *1 10 Input power Output power Input terminal status Output terminal status Option input terminal status Option output terminal status Load meter Motor excitation current Position pulse*3 Cumulative energization time*4 Reference voltage output Orientation status *3 Actual operation time*4, 5 Motor load factor Cumulative power Torque command Torque current command Motor output Feedback pulse Power saving effect Cumulative saving power PID set point PID measured value PID deviation *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 0.01A/ 0.1A*7 11 *1 11 0.1V 12 *1 12 13 *1 13 14 *1 14 55 *1 *1 — — — 56 × — 57 × 0.01kW/ 0.1kW*7 0.01kW/ 0.1kW*7 — — — Pr.55 The value converted with the Pr.37 value from Pr.55. Pr.866 200V class: 400V 400V class: 800V Brake duty set in Pr.30 and Pr.70 Electronic thermal relay function operation level 200V class: 400V 400V class: 800V Rated inverter power x 2 Rated inverter power x 2 Pr.52 0 Output frequency 100 During running/stop During stop During running Output frequency Set frequency Output frequency Output current Output current — — Output voltage Output voltage — — Alarm display Alarm display — — 17 17 Pr.866 18 18 Pr.56 19 — — 1h 20 — — — — 21 — 1 22 — — — 1h 23 — 0.1% 0.01kWh/ 0.1kWh*6*7 0.1% 24 24 25 — 32 32 Pr.866 0.1% 33 33 Pr.866 34 34 Rated motor capacity 35 50 — 50 51 52 53 54 — 52 53 — 200% — ⋅ Using Pr.867, the output voltage response of the terminal AM can be adjusted within the range 0 to 5s. Pr. 55, 56, 866 — 100% 100% — Selected by the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) The motor torque display remains "0 " under V/F control. Position pulse and orientation status function when used with an option (FR-A7AP) and orientation control is made valid. When orientation control is invalid, "0" remains displayed and these functions are invalid. The cumulative energization time and actual operation time are accumulated from 0 to 65535 hours, then cleared, and accumulated again from 0. When the operation panel (FR-DU07) is used, the time is displayed up to 65.53 (65530h) on the assumption that 1h=0.001, and thereafter, it is added up from 0. The actual operation time is not added up if the cumulative operation time before power supply-off is less than 1h. When using the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07), "kW " is displayed. The setting depends on the inverter capacity. (55K or less/75K or more) Available only when the FR-A7AP is mounted. When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions. Features Reference of the monitor output from terminal FM and AM Pr.55 Frequency monitoring reference Pr.866 Torque monitoring reference Pr.56 Current monitoring reference Set the full-scale value of the monitor value output from terminal FM and AM. Monitor* Reference Parameter Frequency Pr.55 Initial Value 60Hz Current Pr.56 Rated inverter current Torque Pr.866 150% — Inverter capacity Standard Specifications Peripheral Devices ⋅ When Pr.52 is set to "100", the set frequency monitor is displayed during a stop and the output frequency monitor is displayed during operation. (LED of Hz flickers during stop and is lit during operation.) Pr.56 0.1% 0.01A/ 0.1A*7 — 0.01kW/ 0.1kW*7 — Variable according to parameters 0.1% 0.1% 0.1% 1 When 2 decimal places (0.01 increments) are monitored, the 0.01 decimal place is dropped and the monitor displays the first decimal place (0.1 increments). When the monitor display digit is originally in 1 increments, it is displayed unchanged in 1 increments. Outline Dimension Drawings Pr.56 Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation Pr.55 2 0 When 1 or 2 decimal places (0.1 increments or 0.01 increments) are monitored, the decimal places are dropped and the monitor displays an integer value (1 increments). The monitor value of 0.99 or less is displayed as 0. Operation Panel 1 0/100 No function Parameter List 0/100 0.1V Motor torque *2 Converter output voltage Regenerative brake duty Electronic thermal relay function load factor Output current peak value Converter output voltage peak value Full-Scale Value 0.01Hz 0.01A/ 0.1A*7 Alarm display Frequency setting (initial value) Description Explanations of Parameters Output voltage 9999 Protective Functions Output current Pr.268 Setting Motor Output frequency Unit monitor exceeded 65535h with Pr.564. ⋅ Writing "0" in Pr.171 clears the actual operation time monitor. * Refer to the section about Pr.52 for monitor names. Pulse speed(terminal FM) Output voltage(terminal AM) 2400 pulse/s Compatibility Types of Monitor Pr.52 Parameter Pr.54 Setting Value (FM) Pr.158 PU DU (AM) main LED monitor Setting exceeded 65535h with Pr.563 and the numbers of actual operation time 10VDC 1440 pulse/s Output frequency Pr.55 reference Output current Pr.56 reference Output torque Pr.866 reference Options The monitor to be displayed on the main screen of the operation panel (FR-DU07)/parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) can be selected. ⋅ You can check the numbers of cumulative energization time monitor Instructions Pr.54 FM terminal function selection Pr.170 Watt-hour meter clear Pr.268 Monitor decimal digits selection Pr.564 Operating time carrying-over times Pr.891 Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times 400Hz 500A 400% Pr.55 Pr.56 Pr.866 400Hz 500A 400% Warranty Pr.52 DU/PU main display data selection Pr.158 AM terminal function selection Pr.171 Operation hour meter clear Pr.563 Energization time carrying-over times Pr.867AM output filter Inquiry Change of DU/PU monitor descriptions, cumulative monitor clear ⋅ Writing "0" in Pr.170 clears the cumulative power monitor. 48 Pr. 57, 58, 162 to 165, 299, 611 Automatic restart operation after instantaneous power failure/flying start Pr.57 Restart coasting time Pr.58 Restart cushion time Pr.162 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection Pr.163 First cushion time for restart Pr.164 First cushion voltage for restart Pr.165 Stall prevention operation level for restart Pr.299 Rotation direction detection selection at restarting Pr.611 Acceleration time at a restart You can restart the inverter without stopping the motor in the following cases: ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ when commercial power supply operation is switched to inverter operation when power comes back on after an instantaneous power failure when motor is coasting at start Pr. Number Setting Range Description 1.5K or less..........0.5s, 2.2K to 7.5K.........1s, 0 11K to 55K ...........3s 75K or more.........5s The above times are coasting time. 57 Set the waiting time for inverter-triggered restart after an instantaneous power failure. 0.1 to 5s/ 0.1 to 30s * 9999 (initial value) 58 0 to 60s 2 Encoder detection frequency 10 Frequency search at every start 11 Reduced voltage system at every start 12 Encoder detection frequency at every start 164 0 to 100% 165 With frequency search Without frequency search (reduced voltage system) 0 to 20s Set a voltage starting time at restart. Consider using these parameters according to the load (moment of inertia/ torque) magnitude. Consider the rated inverter current as 100% and set the stall prevention operation level during restart operation. 0 to 220% 0 Without rotation direction detection 1 With rotation direction detection Motor speed N (r/min) Inverter output frequency f (Hz) Inverter output voltage E (V) Coasting time (Pr.57) * + Acceleration time at a restart (Pr. 611 setting) * The output shut off timing differs according to the load condition. Instaneous (power failure) time Power supply (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) Motor speed N (r/min) Inverter output frequency f(Hz) * output voltage E(V) Speed Coasting detection time (Pr.57) + time * The output shut off timing differs according to the load condition. 0 to 3600s Set the acceleration time to reach the set frequency at a restart. Power supply (R/L1,S/L2,T/L3) 9999 Acceleration time for restart is the normal acceleration time (e.g. Pr.7). Motor speed N (r/min) Inverter output frequency f (Hz) Inverter output voltage E (V) * The setting range depends on the inverter capacity. (55K or less/75K or more) <Connection diagram> R/L1 U S/L2 V T/L3 W R1/L11 S1/L21 STF CS SD CS SD V/F control, advanced magnetic flux vector control Instantaneous (power failure) time * Coasting time Pr. 57 setting MC2 MC1 Acceleration time at a restart (Pr.611 setting) When Pr.162="1" or "11", automatic restart operation is performed in a reduced voltage system, where the voltage is gradually risen with the output frequency unchanged from prior to an instantaneous power failure independently of the coasting speed of the motor. For real sensorless vector control, output frequency and voltage before instantaneous power failure are output. (Pr. 58 is made invalid) When Pr.78=0, the rotation direction is detected. When Pr.78=1,2, the rotation direction is not detected. 611 Restart cushion time (Pr. 58 setting) Speed detection time 9999 299 MCCB Instantaneous (power failure) time Power supply (R/L1,S/L2,T/L3) Realsensorless vector control, vector control 1 163 V/F control, advanced magnetic flux vector control Set a voltage starting time at restart. 0 (initial value) 162 No restart When " 0 (initial value) or 10 " is set in Pr.162, the inverter smoothly starts after detecting the motor speed upon power restoration. The motor starts at the motor speed and in the rotation direction detected from the encoder at power restoration when "2 or 12" is set in Pr.162 under encoder feedback control or vector control. (Valid when the FR-A7AP is fitted) Even when the motor is rotating in the opposite direction, the inverter can be restarted smoothly as the direction of rotation is detected. (You can select whether to make rotation direction detection or not with Pr.299 Rotation direction detection selection at restarting.) Restart cushion time Pr. 58 setting * The output shut off timing differs according to the load condition. MC3 IM Realsensorless vector control Instaneous (power failure) time MC switchover sequence For use for only automatic restart after instantaneous power failure or flying start, short CS-SD in advance. Power supply (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) Motor speed N (r/min) Inverter output * frequency f(Hz) output voltage E(V) Coasting time Pr.57 setting * The output shut off timing differs according to the load condition. 49 When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions. With 2 Remote setting Not used 3 Remote setting Not used (Turning off STF/STR clears remotely set frequency used) When Pr. 59 = 1 Output frequency (Hz) When Pr. 59 = 1, 2 When Pr. 59 = 3 When Pr. 59 = 2, 3 * 0Hz Time ON ON Acceleration (RH) Deceleration (RM) Clear (RL) Forward rotation (STF) ON ON ON * ON ON ON ON Power supply ON ON External running frequency (other than multi-speed) or PU running frequency Pr. 60 Energy saving control selection V/F Magnetic flux Pr.292 Setting Operation Automatic Setting Parameter 0 (initial value normal mode) 1 (shortest acceleration/ deceleration mode) Without brake resistor and brake unit 11 (shortest acceleration/ deceleration mode) With brake resistor and brake unit 3 (optimum acceleration/ deceleration mode) The inverter performs optimum operation fully utilizes its' capability within the continuous rating range. 5 (elevator mode 1) Stall prevention operation level 150% 6 (elevator mode 2) Stall prevention operation level 180% 7 (brake sequence mode 1) With mechanical brake opening completion signal input 8 (brake sequence mode 2) Without mechanical brake opening completion signal input Pr.60 Energy saving control selection Without a fine parameter setting, the inverter automatically performs energy saving operation. This inverter is optimum for fan and pump applications Valid only under V/F control and advanced magnetic flux vector control. Pr. 60 Setting 0 (initial value) 4 Description Normal operation mode Energy saving operation mode In the energy saving operation mode, the inverter automatically controls the output voltage to minimize the inverter output voltage during a constant operation. Set when you want to accelerate/decelerate the motor for the shortest time. (stall prevention operation level 150%) Inverter output voltage is controlled so that enough torque can be generated even under power driving and regeneration. Pr.7, Pr.8 Pr.0, Pr.7, Pr.8 Pr.0, Pr.13, Pr.19 Operation mode in which a machine brake operation timing signal for vertical lift applications is output. Use Pr.61 to Pr.63 to change the reference current for the shortest acceleraiton/deceleration mode and optimum acceleraiton/ deceleration mode. Use Pr.64 to set the starting frequency for the elevator mode. Calculation of acceleration/deceleration can be performed individually. This function is made valid in the shortest acceleration/deceleraion mode and optimum acceleration/deceleration mode. Pr.293 Setting 0 (initial value) Features Peripheral Devices Standard Specifications Remote setting Outline Dimension Drawings Multi-speed setting 1 Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation 0 (initial value) Frequency setting storage function The inverter operates in the same conditions as when appropriate values are set in each parameter even if acceleration/deceleration time and V/F pattern are not set. This operation mode is useful when you just want to operate, etc. without fine parameter setting. Even if automatic acceleration/deceleration has been selected, inputting the jog, RT (second function selection) or X9 (third function selection) signal during an inverter stop will switch to the normal operation and give priority to jog operation, second function selection or third function selection. After automatic acceleration/deceleration operation has been started, none of jog signal, RT signal and RT signal are accepted. Operation Panel RH, RM, RL signal function The inverter automatically sets appropriate parameters for operation. Parameter List Description Pr.59 Setting Pr.61 Reference current Pr.62 Reference value at acceleration Pr.63 Reference value at deceleration Pr.64 Starting frequency for elevator mode Pr.292 Automatic acceleration/deceleration Pr.293 Acceleration/deceleration individual operation selection Description Both acceleraion/deceleration time is calculated. Only acceleration time is calcurated. 2 Only deceleration time is calcurated. Inquiry Warranty Compatibility 1 Motor Even if the operation panel is located away from the enclosure, you can use contact signals to perform continuous variable-speed operation, without using analog signals. By merely setting this parameter, you can use the acceleration, deceleration and setting clear functions of the motorized speed setter (FR-FK). Explanations of Parameters Automatic acceleration/deceleration Pr.59 Remote function selection Protective Functions Remote setting function Options Pr. 61 to 64, 292, 293 Instructions Pr. 59 When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions. 50 Pr. 65, 67 to 69 Pr. 71, 450 Retry function at alarm occurrence Pr.65 Retry selection Pr.68 Retry waiting time Motor selection (applied motor) Pr.67 Number of retries at alarm occurrence Pr.69 Retry count display erase If an alarm occurs, the inverter resets itself automatically to restart. You can also select the alarm description for a retry. When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is Pr.71 Applied motor selected (Pr.57 Restart coasting time ≠9999), restart operation is performed at retry operation as at an instantaneous power failure. Use Pr.65 to select the alarm to be activated for retries. " " indicates the alarms selected for retry. Alarm Indication for Retry E.OC1 E.OC2 E.OC3 E.OV1 E.OV2 E.OV3 E.THM E.THT E.IPF E.UVT E. BE E. GF E.OHT E.OLT E.OPT E.OP1 E.OP2 E.OP3 E. PE E.MB1 E.MB2 E.MB3 E.MB4 E.MB5 E.MB6 E.MB7 E.OS E.OSD E.OD E.PTC E.CDO E.SER E.ILF 0 1 2 3 4 5 20 30 40 50 3 13 23 33 43 53 4 14 24 34 44 54 5 15 6 16 7 17 8 18 9999 *1 *2 *3 *4 101 to 110 Pr. 67 to 69 Pr. 70 51 Thermal characteristics of a standard motor (Pr. 71 initial value) Thermal characteristics of the Mitsubishi constant-torque motor Thermal characteristics of a standard motor Adjustable 5 points V/F Mitsubishi standard motor SF-JR4P (1.5kW or less) thermal characteristic for the constant-torque motor Thermal characteristics of the Mitsubishi vector motor SF-V5RU Thermal characteristic of Mitsubishi *1 standard motor SF-HR Thermal characteristic of Mitsubishi constant-torque motor SF-HRCA Standard Constant-torque Mitsubishi standard SF-JR4P (1.5kW or less) Select "offline Mitsubishi vector auto tuning SF-V5RU/SF-THY setting" Mitsubishi high *1 efficiency SF-HR Mitsubishi constanttorque SF-HRCA Standard Constant-torque Mitsubishi standard SF-JR4P (1.5kW or less) Auto tuning data Mitsubishi vector can be read, SF-V5RU/SF-THY changed, and set Mitsubishi high *1 efficiency SF-HR Mitsubishi constanttorque SF-HRCA Standard *3 Direct input of Constant-torque *3 motor constants Standard *4 is enabled Constant-torque *4 Standard *3 Motor constants direct input Constant-torque *3 + Standard *4 offline auto Constant-torque *4 tuning Function invalid (only Pr.450 can be set, initial value) *2 *2 *2 Motor constants of Mitsubishi high efficiency motor SF-HR Motor constants of Mitsubishi constant-torque motor SF-HRCA. Star connection Delta connection Pr.71 Pr.450 Standard Motor Setting 0, 2, 3 to 8, 20, 23, 24, 40, 43, 44 Constant-Torque Motor Setting 1, 13 to 18, 50, 53, 54 No retry function Pr.0 3% 2% Set the number of retries at alarm occurrence. An alarm output is not provided during retry operation. Pr.12 4% 2% Description Set the number of retries at alarm occurrence. (The setting value of minus 100 is the number of retries.) An alarm output is provided during retry operation. Use Pr.68 to set the waiting time from when an inverter alarm occurs until a retry is made in the range 0 to 10s. Reading the Pr.69 value provides the cumulative number of successful restart times made by retry. Pr. 66 Motor ({: Motor used) Thermal Characteristic of the Constant Electronic Thermal Relay Standard Vector torque Function (SF-JR, (SF-V5RU, (SF-JRCA, etc.) etc.) etc.) For the 5.5K and 7.5K, the Pr. 0 Torque boost and Pr. 12 DC injection brake operation voltage settings are automatically changed according to the Pr. 71 and Pr.450 settings as follows. Pr.67 Setting 1 to 10 1 2 Set the number of retries at alarm occurrence in Pr.67. 0 (initial value) Pr.71, Pr.450 Setting Pr.65 Setting 0 Pr.450 Second applied motor Setting of the used motor selects the thermal characteristic appropriate for the motor. Setting is necessary when using a constant-torque motor. Thermal characteristic of the electronic thermal relay function suitable for the motor is set. Refer to the section about Pr. 22. Refer to the section about Pr. 65. Refer to the section about Pr. 30. When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions. (1) Added compensation (Pr.242, Pr.243) Pr. 72, 240 ⋅ The compensation signal can be added to the main speed 0 to 10V 0 to ±10V 1 (initial value) 0 to 5V 0 to ±10V 2 0 to 10V 0 to ±5V 3 0 to 5V 0 to ±5V 4 0 to 10V 0 to ±10V 5 0 to 5V 0 to ±5V 6 4 to 20mA 0 to ±10V 7 4 to 20mA 0 to ±5V 10 0 to 10V 0 to ±10V 11 0 to 5V 0 to ±10V 12 0 to 10V 0 to ±5V 13 0 to 5V 0 to ±5V 14 0 to 10V 0 to ±10V 15 0 to 5V 0 to ±5V 16 4 to 20mA 0 to ±10V 17 4 to 20mA 0 to ±5V 0 1 (initial value) × 0 to 10V 5 0 to 5V 6 × 10 × 13 Terminal 1 added compensation Terminal 2 override Function Terminal 1 added compensation Terminal 1 added compensation × Terminal 2 When the AU override signal is on 0 to ±10V According to the setting 0 to ±5V 0:4Pr.267 to 20mA (initial Terminal 1 value) 0 to ±10V added 1:0 to 5V 0 to ±10V compensation 2:0 to 10V 0 to ±5V Not function (Indicates that a frequency command signal of negative polarity is not accepted.) 0 to±5V 14 0 to 10V 15 0 to 5V 16 × 17 Not function (Indicates that a frequency command signal of negative polarity is not accepted.) When the AU signal is off 0 to ±5V 4 11 0 to ±10V 0 to ±5V 3 12 Terminal 2 override Polarity Reversible 0 to ±10V 2 7 Compensation Input Terminal and Compensation Method Terminal 1 added compensation × × Terminal 2 override 0 to ±10V Terminal 1 added compensation 0 to ±5V (a) When Pr. 73 setting is 0 to 5 (b) When Pr. 73 setting is 10 to 15 ⋅ The terminal 1 (frequency setting auxiliary input) signal is Function When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions. Initial value (50% to 150%) 100 Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation Parameter List Pr.252 Pr.253 150 Outline Dimension Drawings added to the main speed setting signal of terminal 2 or 4. 200 You can select the function that switches between forward rotation and reverse rotation according to the analog input terminal specifications, override function and input signal polarity. For the terminals 1, 2, 4 used for analog input, voltage input (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V) or current input (4 to 20mA) can be selected. The additional compensation and fixed ratio of analog compensation (override) using terminal 2 as an auxiliary input can be made to multi-speed operation or the speed setting signal (main speed) of the terminal 2 or terminal 4. ( indicates the main speed setting) 0 Forward rotation STF signal is ON is used for the main speed setting and the terminal 2 for the override signal. (When the main speed of the terminal 1 or terminal 4 is not input, compensation by the terminal 2 is made invalid.) Pr.73 Analog input selection Pr.242 Terminal 1 added compensation amount (terminal 2) Pr.243 Terminal 1 added compensation amount (terminal 4) Pr.252 Override bias Pr.253 Override gain Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selection Terminal 4 Input Reverse rotation Forward rotation ⋅ When an override is selected, the terminal 1 or terminal 4 Analog input selection Terminal Terminal 2 Input 1 Input Forward rotation (2) Override function (Pr. 252, Pr. 253) Pr. 73, 242, 243, 252, 253, 267 Pr.73 Setting +5V Terminal 1 (+10V) STF signal is ON STF signal is ON STF signal is ON * The setting range depends on the inverter capacity. (55K or less/75K or more) Reverse rotation +2.5V (+5V) Operation Panel 1 When "0 to 5" ("0 to 4" for the 75K or more.) is set in Pr.72, Soft-PWM is valid Forward rotation 0 50 0 0V 2.5V 5V (5V) (10V) Voltage across terminals 2-5 ⋅ When "4" is set in Pr.868 (Pr.865) , the setting of terminal 1 (terminal 4) is used for stall prevention operation level setting. Pr. 74, 822, 826, 832, 836, 849 Response level of analog input Pr.74 Input filter time constant Pr.826 Torque setting filter 1 Pr.836 Torque setting filter 2 Pr.822 Speed setting filter 1 Pr.832 Speed setting filter 2 Pr.849 Analog input offset adjustment The time constant of the primary delay filter relative to external frequency command (analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4) signal) can be set. ⋅ Effective for filtering noise in the frequency setting circuit. ⋅ Increase the filter time constant if steady operation cannot be performed due to noise. A larger setting results in slower response. (The time constant can be set between approximately 10ms to 1s with the setting of 0 to 8.) ⋅ Set the time constant of the primary delay filter relative to the external speed command (analog input command) using Pr.822 and Pr.832 . Set a large time constant when you want to delay the tracking of the speed command, when the analog input voltage fluctuates, etc. ⋅ Set the time constant of the primary delay filter relative to the external torque command (analog input command) using Pr.826 and Pr.836 . Set a large time constant value when you want to delay the tracking of the torque command, when the analog input voltage fluctuates, etc. ⋅ Pr.832 Speed setting filter 2 and Pr.836 Torque setting filter 2 are valid when a value other than "9999" is set and the RT signal is on. Setting Pr.849 provides frequency command by analog input (terminal 2) with offset and avoids frequency command to be given due to noise under 0 speed command. Explanations of Parameters Soft-PWM is invalid -5V -2.5V (-10V) (-5V) Protective Functions 0 +2.5V +5V Terminal 1 (+5V) (+10V) Options 240 0 Instructions vector control. 0 to 5: 2kHz, 6 to 9: 6kHz, 10 to 13: 10kHz, 14 and 15: 14kHz -5V -2.5V (-10V) (-5V) Motor 0 to 15/ filter.) 0 to 6, 25* The following settings are for real sensorless vector control or Compatibility Note that 0 indicates 0.7kHz, 15 indicates 14.5kHz and 25 indicates 2.5kHz. (Set 25 when using an optional sine wave 72 When voltage across terminals 2-5 is 0V When voltage across terminals 2-5 is 0V Description Warranty Setting Range Override value (%) Pr.Number Features You can change the motor sound. Output frequency When voltage across terminals 2-5 is 2.5V (5V) Standard Specifications Output frequency When voltage across terminals 2-5 is 2.5V (5V) Pr.240 Soft-PWM operation selection control Inquiry Pr.72 PWM frequency selection speed Peripheral Devices setting for synchronous/continuous operation, etc. Carrier frequency and SoftPWM selection 52 ⋅ On the assumption that the Pr.849 setting 100% as 0, the offset voltage is offset as follows: 100%<Pr.849...positive side 100%>Pr.849...negative side The offset voltage is found by the following formula. Pr.849 -100 100 × (according to the Pr.73 setting) Frequency command Offset voltage = Voltage at 100% Pr. 76 Output function of alarm code Pr.76 Alarm code output selection At alarm occurrence, its description can be output as a 4-bit digital signal from the open collector output terminals. The alarm code can be read by a programmable controller, etc., and its corrective action can be shown on a display, etc. [V] Slope determined according to Pr.125 and C2 to C4 Pr.76 Setting 0 (initial value) Slope does not change. 0% 0% 100% Pr.849 setting Reset selection, disconnected PU detection Pr.75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection You can select the reset input acceptance, disconnected PU (FRDU07/FR-PU04/FR-PU07) connector detection function and PU stop function. 0 1 2 3 14 (initial value) 15 16 17 Reset Selection Disconnected PU Detection PU Stop Selection Reset input normally enabled If the PU is disconnected, Reset input enabled only operation will be when the protective continued as-is. function is activated Reset input normally enabled When the PU is disconnected, the Reset input enabled only inverter output is shut when the protective off. function is activated Pressing decelerates the motor to a stop only in the PU operation mode. Reset input normally enabled If the PU is disconnected, Reset input enabled only operation will be continued as-is. when the protective function is activated Reset input normally enabled When the PU is disconnected, the Reset input enabled only inverter output is shut when the protective off. function is activated Pressing decelerates the motor to a stop in any of the PU, external and communication operation modes. signal, reset command through communication) input. Disconnected PU detection ⋅ This function detects that the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FR- PU07) has been disconnected from the inverter for longer than 1s and causes the inverter to provide an alarm output (E.PUE) and come to an alarm stop. PU stop selection ⋅ In any of the PU operation, external operation and network modes, the of the PU. motor can Alarm code output at alarm occurrence only (refer to the table below) Normal* E.OC1 E.OC2 E.OC3 E.OV1 to E.OV3 E.THM E.THT E.IPF E.UVT E.FIN E.BE E. GF E.OHT E.OLT E.OPT E.OP3 Other than the above Output of Output Terminals Alarm Code SU IPF OL FU 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 3 0 1 0 0 4 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E E 1 1 1 1 F * When Pr.76 = "2", the output terminals output the signals assigned to Pr.190 to Pr.196 Reset selection ⋅ You can select the operation timing of reset function (RES operation pressing With alarm code output (refer to the table below) 2 Operation Panel Indication (FR-DU07) Pr. 75 Pr.75 Setting 1 The following table indicates alarm codes to be output. (0: output transistor off, 1: output transistor on) Speed setting signal 100% (10V or 5V) 200% Description Without alarm code output be stopped by Pr. 77 Prevention of parameter rewrite Pr.77 Parameter write selection You can select whether write to various parameters can be performed or not. Use this function to prevent parameter values from being rewritten by misoperation. Pr. 77 Setting Description 0 (initial value) Write is enabled only during a stop. Parameter write is not enabled. 1 Parameter write is enabled in any operation mode regardless of operation status. 2 Pr. 78 Prevention of reverse rotation of the motor Pr.78 Reverse rotation prevention selection This function can prevent reverse rotation fault resulting from the incorrect input of the start signal. Pr.78 Setting 0 (initial value) 1 2 53 When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions. Description Both forward and reverse rotations allowed Reverse rotation disabled Forward rotation disallowed Specify the operation mode at power on (Pr.340) Pr. 79, 340 ⋅ When power is switched on or when power comes back on after RS-485 terminals or communication option. ⋅ You can set the operation mode at power on (reset) according *2 PU operation mode Fixed to PU operation mode 2 NET operation mode Switching between the PU and Net operation mode is enabled Switching to PU operation mode is disabled 3, 4 External/PU combined operation mode Operation mode switching is disabled 6 NET operation mode Switching among the external, PU, and NET operation mode is enabled while running. 1 External/PU combined operation mode 1 Running frequency 3 Start signal PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FRPU07) setting or external signal External signal input input (multi-speed setting, (terminal STF, STR) across terminals 4-5 (valid when AU signal turns on)). 1, 2 *1 External/PU combined operation mode 2 Running frequency 4 External signal input (terminal 2, 4, 1, JOG, multispeed selection, etc.) Start signal Input from the PU (FR - DU07/FR- PU04/FRPU07) ( , ) PU operation mode 6 7 Switchover mode Switch among PU operation, external operation, and NET operation while keeping the same operation status. External operation mode (PU operation interlock) X12 signal ON Operation mode can be switched to the PU operation mode. (output stop during external operation) X12 signal OFF Operation mode can not be switched to the PU operation mode. 7 External operation mode X12 (MRS)signal ON .......NET operation mode Switching among the external, PU, and NET operation mode is enabled X12(MRS)signal OFF .......External operation mode Fixed to external operation mode (Forcibly switched to external operation mode.) *2 NET operation mode 0 NET operation mode Switching between the PU and NET operation mode is enabled *3 PU operation mode 1 PU operation mode Fixed to PU operation mode External operation mode 2 NET operation mode Fixed to NET operation mode 3, 4 External/PU combined operation mode Operation mode switching is disabled 6 NET operation mode Switching between the PU and NET operation mode is enabled while running *3 7 External operation mode Fixed to external operation mode (Forcibly switched to external operation mode.) 10, 12 *1 *2 *3 *1 The Pr.340 settings "2 or 12" is mainly used for communication operation using the inverter RS-485 terminals. When a value other than "9999" (selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure) is set in Pr.57 Restart coasting time , the inverter will resume the same operation state which was in before after power has been restored from an instantaneous power failure. The operation mode cannot be switched directly between the PU operation mode and network operation mode. Operation mode can be changed between the PU operation mode and network operation mode with key of the operation panel (FR-DU07) Inquiry and X65 signal. Outline Dimension Drawings Switching among the external, PU, and NET operation mode is enabled Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation NET operation mode Operation Panel 0 Parameter List As set in Pr.79. Fixed to PU operation mode External operation mode Fixed to external operation mode Operation can be performed by switching between the NET operation mode external and Net operation mode. Operation Mode Switchover Explanations of Parameters Operation Mode at Power on, Power Restoration, Reset Protective Functions 0 (initial value) Pr.79 Setting Options Pr.340 Setting Standard Specifications to the Pr.79 and Pr.340 settings. Instructions External operation mode at power-on. Peripheral Devices Set this mode for communication operation using the inverter Motor 0 External/PU switchover mode (Press to switch (initial between the PU and external operation mode.) PU operation mode value) 2 parameter write and operation can be performed from a program. LED Indication :Off :On Description External operation mode 1 After the inverter has started up in the network operation mode, Compatibility Used to select the operation mode of the inverter. Mode can be changed as desired between operation using external signals (external operation), operation from the PU (FR-DU07/FRPU07/FR-PU04), combined operation of PU operation and external operation (external/PU combined operation), and network operation (when RS-485 terminals or a communication option is used). Pr.79 Setting network operation mode. Pr.340 Communication startup mode selection Warranty Pr.79 Operation mode selection Features instantaneous power failure, the inverter can be started up in the Operation mode selection When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions. 54 Pr. 80, 81, 89, 451, 453, 454, 569, 800 Pr. 82 to 84, 90 to 94, 96, 455 to 463, 684, 859, 860 Selection of control method and control mode Magnetic flux Pr.80 Motor capacity Pr.89 Speed control gain (magnetic flux vector) Pr.453 Second motor capacity Pr.569 Second motor speed control gain Sensorless Pr.81 Number of motor poles Pr.451 Second motor control method selection Pr.454 Number of second motor poles Pr.800 Control method selection Advanced magnetic flux vector control can be selected by setting the capacity and the number of motors to be used in Pr.80 and Pr.81. When low speed torque and high accuracy and fast response control are necessary, select real sensorless vector control or vector control using Pr.800. What is real sensorless vector control? This function enables vector control with a general-purpose motor without encoder. What is vector control? Speed control, torque control and position control can be performed using a motor with encoder. (Plug-in option FR-A7AP is necessary.) Parameter Number Setting 80 453 to 3600kW*1 9999 (initial value) 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 81 454 12, 14, 16, 18, 20 9999 (initial value) 800 451*3 V/F control Set the number of motor poles. Set 10 + number of motor poles. Vector Pr.83 Motor rated voltage Pr.90 Motor constant (R1) Pr.92 Motor constant (L1) Pr.94 Motor constant (X) Pr.455 Second motor excitation current Pr.457 Rated second motor frequency Pr.459 Second motor constant (R2) Pr.461 Second motor constant (L2) Pr.463 Second motor auto tuning setting/status Pr.859 Torque current Offline auto tuning operation for automatic calculation of motor constants can be executed when using advanced magnetic flux vector control, real sensorless vector control and vector control. Both offline and online tuning are necessary when using real sensorless vector control. You can copy the online tuning data (motor constants) to another inverter using the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU07). Even when motors (other manufacturer's motor, SF-JRC, etc.) other than Mitsubishi standard motor (SF-JR SF-HR 0.4kW or more), Mitsubishi constant-torque motor (SF-JRCA SF-HRCA 200V class four-pole 0.4kW to 55kW) and Mitsubishi vector control dedicated motor (SF-V5RU) are used or the wiring length is long, using the offline auto tuning function runs the motor with the optimum operating characteristics. Offline auto tuning conditions ⋅ A motor should be connected. V/F control ⋅ The motor capacity is equall to or one rank lower than the 1 Torque control 2 MC signal*2-ON:torque MC signal*2-OFF:speed 3 Position control 4 MC signal*2-ON:position MC signal*2-OFF:speed 5 MC signal*2-ON:torque MC signal*2-OFF:position 9 Vector control test operation Test operation of vector control can be performed without connecting a motor. 2) The motor may be run at nearly its rated frequency (Pr. 84 10 Speed control 3) The brake should be open. 11 Torque control 12 MC signal*2-ON:torque MC signal*2-OFF:speed inverter capacity. (note that the capacity is 0.4kW or more) ⋅ The maximum frequency is 120Hz. Vector control (FR-A7AP) ⋅ A high-slip motor, high-speed motor and special motor cannot be tuned. Note the following when "101" (offline auto tuning performed with motor running) is set in Pr.96 (Pr.463) . 1) Torque is not enough during tuning. Real sensorless vector control V/F control (advanced magnetic flux vector control) The setting depends on the inverter capacity. (55K or less/75K or more) Use Pr.178 to Pr.189 to assign the terminals used for the X18 and MC signal. Only "10 to 12, 20, 9999" can be set in Pr.451. The motor speed fluctuation at load fluctuation can be adjusted using Pr.89 (Pr.569) . Control method of the second motor can be selected using the RT signal. The Pr.22 function is changed according to the Pr.800 setting (stall prevention operation level/torque limit level). 55 Pr.82 Motor excitation current Pr.84 Rated motor frequency Pr.91 Motor constant (R2) Pr.93 Motor constant (L2) Pr.96 Auto tuning setting/status Pr.456 Rated second motor voltage Pr.458 Second motor constant (R1) Pr.460 Second motor constant (L1) Pr.462 Second motor constant (X) Pr.684 Tuning data unit switchover Pr.860 Second motor torque current Sensorless Speed control 20 *3 Set the applied motor capacity. X18 signal*2-ON: V/F control Magnetic flux 0 (initial value) *1 *2 Description Range 0.4 to 55kW/0 Offline auto tuning Vector When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions. setting) without any problem. 4) No external force is applied to rotate the motor. Even if "1" (tuning performed without motor running) is set in Pr.96 (Pr.463), the motor may run slightly. Therefore, fix the motor securely with a mechanical brake, or before tuning, make sure that there will be no problem in safety if the motor runs. * This instruction must be followed especially in elevator. Note that if the motor runs slightly, tuning performance is unaffected. Pr. 89 Refer to the section about Pr. 80. Start-time tuning (at start-up) Magnetic flux observer (normal) * Only Pr.95 can be set. ⋅ Perform offline auto tuning before performing start-time tuning of the online auto tuning. Data needs to be calculated. ⋅ For using start-time tuning in elevator, examine the utilization of a brake sequence for the brake opening timing at a start. Though the tuning ends in about a maximum of 500ms after a start, torque is not provided fully during that period. Therefore, note that there may be a possibility of drop due to gravity. ⋅ For the SF-V5RU, SF-JR (with encoder) or SF-HRCA (with encoder), it is not necessary to perform offline auto tuning to select adaptive magnetic flux observer. (However, perform offline auto tuning when the wiring length is long.) Pr. 96 (1) Initial settings and specifications of RS-485 communication (Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.331 to Pr.337, Pr.341) Used to perform required settings for RS-485 communication between the inverter and personal computer. There are two different communications: communication using the PU connector of the inverter and communication using the RS-485 terminals. You can perform parameter setting, monitoring, etc. using the Mitsubishi inverter protocol or Modbus-RTU protocol. To make communication between the personal computer and inverter, initialization of the communication specifications must be made to the inverter. Data communication cannot be made if the initial settings are not made or there is any setting error. Refer to the section about Pr. 82. Pr. Pr. 100 to 109 Number Adjustable 5 points V/F Pr.100 V/F1(first frequency) Pr.102 V/F2(second frequency) Pr.104 V/F3(third frequency) Pr.106 V/F4(fourth frequency) Pr.108 V/F5(fifth frequency) V/F Pr.101 V/F1(first frequency voltage) Pr.103 V/F2(second frequency voltage) Pr.105 V/F3(third frequency voltage) Pr.107 V/F4(fourth frequency voltage) Pr.109 V/F5(fifth frequency voltage) 117 0 to 31 331 (0 to 247)*1 118 332 48, 96, 192, 384 (3, 6, 12, 24)*2 119 333 120 334 121 335 Voltage V/F5 V/F4 0 122 336 Frequency Base frequency V/F Characteristic Pr.3 ⋅ When Pr.19 Base frequency voltage ="8888" or "9999", Pr.71 cannot be set to "2". When setting "2" in Pr.71, set the rated voltage value in Pr.19. Pr. 110, 111 Pr. 112 Pr. 113 1bit 1 (initial value) 2bit 10 1bit 11 2bit 0 Without parity check 1 With odd parity check 2 (initial value) With even parity check Pr. 114, 115 Pr. 116 123 337 124 341 Refer to the section about Pr.0. Refer to the section about Pr.22. *1 *2 Data length 7bit Set the permissible number of retries at occurrence of a data receive error. If the number of consecutive errors exceeds the permissible value, the inverter will come to an alarm stop. 9999 If a communication error occurs, the inverter will not come to an alarm stop. 0 No PU connector communication Communication with RS-485 terminals can be made, but the inverter will come to an alarm stop in the NET operation mode. 0.1 to 999.8s Set the interval of communication check time. If a no-communication state persists for longer than the permissible time, the inverter will come to an alarm stop. 0 to 150ms 9999 (initial value) 0 1 (initial value) 2 Peripheral Devices 8bit 0 to10 9999 (initial value) Refer to the section about Pr.7. Refer to the section about Pr.3. The setting value × 100 equals the communication speed. For example, the communication speed is 19200bps when the setting value is 192. 0 V/F3 V/F1 V/F2 Specify the inverter station number. Set the inverter station numbers when two or more inverters are connected to one personal computer. Stop bit length Set "2" in Pr.71 and voltage and frequency in Pr.100 to Pr.109 . When frequency values at each point are the same, write disable error ( ) appears. Set frequency and voltage within the range of Pr.3 Base frequency and Pr.19 Base frequency voltage . Torque boost Pr.0 Description Set the communication speed. A dedicated V/F pattern can be made by freely setting the V/F characteristic between a startup and the base frequency and base voltage under V/F control (frequency voltage/frequency). The torque pattern that is optimum for the machine's characteristic can be set. Base frequency voltage Pr.19 Setting Range Standard Specifications 1 2* Outline Dimension Drawings Description Online auto tuning is not performed Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation 0 (initial value) Operation Panel Pr.95, Pr.574 Setting Parameter List Select magnetic flux observer when performing vector control. Explanations of Parameters the motor varies with the rise of the motor temperature. Protective Functions by temperature compensation even if the secondary resistance value of Pr.117 PU communication station number Pr.118 PU communication speed Pr.119 PU communication stop bit length Pr.120 PU communication parity check Pr.121 Number of PU communication retries Pr.122 PU communication check time interval Pr.123 PU communication waiting time setting Pr.124 PU communication CR/LF presence/absence selection Pr.331 RS-485 communication station number Pr.332 RS-485 communication speed Pr.333 RS-485 communication stop bit length Pr.334 RS-485 communication parity check selection Pr.335 RS-485 communication retry count Pr.336 RS-485 communication check time interval Pr.337 RS-485 communication waiting time setting Pr.341 RS-485 communication CR/LF selection Pr.342 Communication EEPROM write selection Pr.343 Communication error count Pr.549 Protocol selection Options When online auto tuning is selected, excellent torque accuracy is provided Communication initial setting Instructions Vector Motor Sensorless Pr.574 Second motor online auto tuning Compatibility Magnetic flux Pr.95 Online auto tuning selection No communication check Set the waiting time between data transmission to the inverter and response. Set with communication data. Warranty Online auto tuning Features Pr. 117 to 124, 331 to 337, 341 to 343, 549 Without CR/LF With CR With CR/LF When making communication through Modbus-RTU protocol with the RS-485 terminals, the setting range of Pr.331 within parenthesis is applied. The values in parenthesis are added to the setting range of Pr.332. Inquiry Pr. 95, 574 Refer to the section about Pr.41. When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions. 56 Parameters written via the inverter's PU connector, RS-485 terminals, or from the communication option can be written to the RAM. When performing parameter change frequently, set "1" in Pr.342. (3) Modbus-RTU communication specifications (Pr.343, Pr.549) Pr. Setting Number Range 343 0 (initial 549 value) 1 Description Display the number of communication errors during Modbus-RTU communication. Reading only Mitsubishi inverter (computer link operation) protocol (3) Analog input bias/gain calibration (C2 (Pr.902) to C7 (Pr.905), C16 (Pr. 919) to C19 (Pr. 920), C38 (Pr. 932) to C41 (Pr. 933)) ⋅ The "bias" and "gain" functions are used to adjust the relationship between the input signal entered from outside the inverter to set the output frequency (torque/magnetic flux), e.g. 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V or 4 to 20mADC, and the output frequency (torque/magnetic flux). Initial value Output frequency (Hz) (2) Communication EEPROM write selection (Pr. 342) 60Hz Gain Pr.125 C14(Pr.918) Bias C2(Pr.902) C12(Pr.917) Modbus-RTU protocol * Modbus-RTU protocol is valid only for communication from the FR-485 terminals. Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency Pr.241 Analog input display unit switchover C2(pr.902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency C4(Pr.903) Terminal 2 frequency setting gain C3(Pr.902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias C5(Pr.904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency C7(Pr.905) Terminal 4 frequency setting gain C6(Pr.904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias C12(Pr.917) Terminal 1 bias frequency (speed) C13(Pr.917) Terminal 1 bias (speed) C14(Pr.918) Terminal 1 gain frequency (speed) C15(Pr.918) Terminal 1 gain (speed) C16(Pr.919) Terminal 1 bias command (torque/magnetic flux) C17(Pr.919) Terminal 1 bias (torque/magnetic flux) C18(Pr.920) Terminal 1 gain command (torque/magnetic flux) C19(Pr.920) Terminal 1 gain (torque/magnetic flux) C38(Pr.932) Terminal 4 bias command (torque/magnetic flux) C39(Pr.932) Terminal 4 bias (torque/magnetic flux) C40(Pr.933) Terminal 4 gain command (torque/magnetic flux) C41(Pr.933) Terminal 4 gain (torque/magnetic flux) (1) (2) 57 150 Gain C18(Pr.920) Initial value Bias C16(Pr.919) Calibration example of terminal 1 400 Bias C38 (Pr.932) When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions. 400 100% 0 Torque setting signal 5V 0 0 10V C17(Pr.919) C19(Pr.920) -150 Set a value in Pr.125(Pr.126, C14(Pr.918)) when changing only the frequency setting (gain) of the maximum analog input voltage (current). (Other calibration parameter settings need not be changed.) Set C18(Pr.920), C40(Pr.933) when changing only torque/ magnetic flux command of the maximum analog input voltage (current). (Other calibration parameter settings need not be changed.) Pr.126 100% 20 0 0 4 Frequency setting signal 20mA C6 (Pr.904) C7 (Pr.905) (-5V) (-10V) -100% Change the frequency (speed) at maximum analog input. (Pr.125, Pr.126, C14(Pr.918)) Change the torque/magnetic flux at maximum analog input. (C18 (Pr.920), C40 (Pr.933)) Gain Bias C5 (Pr.904) Torque(%) You can set the magnitude (slope) of the output frequency (speed, torque/magnetic flux) as desired in relation to the frequency setting signal (0 to 5VDC, 0 to 10V or 4 to 20mA). Initial value 60Hz Torque(%) C12 (917) to C19 (920), C38 (932) to C41 (933) Analog input frequency (speed) and torque/ magnetic flux change and adjustment (calibration) 100% 5V 10V C4(Pr.903) C15(Pr.918) Output frequency (Hz) Pr. 125, 126, 241, C2 (902) to C7 (905), 0 0 Frequency setting signal 0 C3(Pr.902) C13(Pr.917) Gain C40 (Pr.933) 150 Initial value 0 20 0 4 C39(Pr.932) Torque setting signal 100% 20mA C41(Pr.933) Calibration example of terminal 4 (4) Analog input display unit changing (Pr.241) ⋅ You can change the analog input display unit (%/V/mA) for analog input bias/gain calibration. Parameter unit display language selection Pr.128 PID action selection Pr.130 PID integral time Pr.132 PID lower limit Pr.134 PID differential time Pr.576 Output interruption detection level The inverter can be used to exercise process control, e.g. flow rate, air volume or pressure. The terminal 2 input signal or parameter setting is used as a set point and the terminal 4 input signal used as a feedback value to constitute a feedback system for PID control. ⋅ Pr.128 = "10, 11"(deviation value signal input) Inverter circuit Set point To outside Manipulated Motor variable IM PID operation Deviation signal Terminal 1 0 to 10VDC (0 to 5V) +- 1 Kp 1+ Ti S +Td S Pr.145 PU display language selection You can switch the display language of the parameter unit (FRPU04/FR-PU07) to another. Pr.145 setting Description 0 (initial value) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Japanese English German French Spanish Italian Swedish Finnish Pr. 148, 149 Peripheral Devices Pr.127 PID control automatic switchover frequency Pr.129 PID proportional band Pr.131 PID upper limit Pr.133 PID action set point Pr.575 Output interruption detection time Pr.577 Output interruption cancel level Standard Specifications PID control Features Pr. 145 Refer to the section about Pr.22. Outline Dimension Drawings Pr. 127 to 134, 575 to 577 Inverter circuit Manipulated Motor variable IM PID operation +- Kp 1+ Ti 1 S +Td S Terminal 4 Feedback signal (measured value) 4 to 20mADC (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V) Kp: Proportionality constant Ti: Integral time S: Operator Td: Differential time Pr.150 Output current detection level Pr.152 Zero current detection level Pr.166 Output current detection signal retention time during inverter operation for longer than the time set in Pr.151, the output current detection signal (Y12) is output from the inverter's open collector or relay output terminal. Pr.150 Output current Without commercial power-supply switchover sequence With commercial power-supply switchover sequence Time Pr.166 Minimum 100ms (initial value) Sink logic type, Pr.185 ="7", Pr.192 ="17", Pr.193 ="18", Pr.194 ="19" Output current detection signal (Y12) MC2 MCCB MC1 U V W R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 Inverter start (forward rotation) Inverter/commercial power-supply switchover Operation interlock External thermal reset Frequency setting signal MC3 External thermal relay IM ⋅ If the output current remains lower than the Pr.152 setting *3 (MC2)OL (MC3)FU *1 *1 *1 from the inverter's open collector or relay output terminal. MC 1 MC3 MC2 MC 2 Output current *2 24VDC Pr.152 0[A] MC 3 Zero current detection time (Y13) Take caution for the capacity of the sequence output terminal. When connecting a DC power, insert a protective diode . The used terminal changes according to the Pr.180 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) settings. Pr. 144 Pr.152 100ms* SE Commercial power-supply switchover sequence connection diagram Pr. 140 to 143 OFF (2) Zero current detection (Y13 signal, Pr.152, Pr.153 ) Start signal *1 *2 *3 ON Pr.153, the zero current detection (Y13) signal is output (MC1)IPF JOG(OH) RES SD 10 2 5 OFF during inverter operation for longer than the time set in R1/L11 S1/L21 STF CS MRS Pr.151 Compatibility 1 9999, Pr.167 = 0 Options Pr.166 Explanations of Parameters excessive torque detection, etc. ⋅ If the output current remains higher than the Pr.150 setting Instructions The complicated sequence circuit for commercial power supply inverter switchover is built in the inverter. Hence, merely inputting the start, stop or automatic switchover selection signal facilitates the interlock operation of the switchover magnetic contactor. Commercial operation can not be performed with the Mitsubishi vector motor (SF-V5RU). Pr135 Setting Description ⋅ The output current detection function can be used for Motor Pr.135 Commercial power-supply switchover sequence output terminal selection Pr.136 MC switchover interlock time Pr.137 Start waiting time Pr.138 Commercial power-supply operation switchover selection at an alarm Pr.139 Automatic switchover frequency between inverter and commercial power-supply operation Pr.159 Automatic switchover ON range between commercial power-supply and inverter operation (1) Output current detection (Y12 signal, Pr.150, Pr.151, Pr.166, Pr.167) Protective Functions output at the output terminal. Switch between the inverter operation and commercial power-supply operation to use Parameter List The output current during inverter running can be detected to Pr. 135 to 139, 159 0 (initial value) Pr.151 Output current detection signal delay time Pr.153 Zero current detection time Pr.167 Output current detection operation selection OFF Time ON OFF ON Pr. 153 Detection time OFF Warranty Set point 0 to 5VDC (0 to 10V, 4 to 20mA) Detection of output current (Y12 signal) detection of zero current (Y13 signal) ON Pr. 153 Detection time * Once turned on, the zero current detection time signal (Y13) is held on for at least 100ms. Inquiry Pr. 133 or terminal 2 Pr. 150 to 153, 166, 167 Operation Panel Kp: Proportionality constant Ti: Integral time S: Operator Td: Differential time ⋅ Pr.128 ="20, 21"(measured value input) Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation Feedback signal (measured value) Refer to the section about Pr.29. Refer to the section about Pr. 37. When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions. Pr. 154 Refer to the section about Pr.22. 58 Pr. 155 Pr. 161 Selection of action conditions of the second function signal (RT) and third function signal (X9) Operation selection of the operation panel Pr.155 RT signal reflection condition selection You can select the second (third) function using RT (X9) signal. You can also set the RT (X9) signal operation condition (reflection time). Pr.155 Setting 0 (initial value) These functions are immediately made valid with on of the RT signal. 10 These functions are valid only during the RT signal is on and constant speed operation. (invalid during acceleration/deceleration) ⋅ Funtions which can be set as second and third function Torque boost Base frequency Acceleration time Deceleration time Electronic thermal O/L relay Stall prevention Applied motor Motor constants Motor control method Analog input filter Gain adjustment Speed detection filter Pr. 156, 157 1 Setting dial potentiometer mode 10 Setting dial frequency setting mode 11 Setting dial potentiometer mode Pr. 162 to 165 Key lock mode invalid Key lock mode valid Refer to the section about Pr.57. Second Function Parameter Third Function Parameter Pr.0 Pr.3 Pr.7 Pr.8 Pr.46 Pr.47 Pr.44 Pr.44, Pr.45 Pr.112 Pr.113 Pr.110 Pr.110, Pr.111 Pr. 170, 171 Refer to the section about Pr.52. Pr. 172 to 174 Refer to the section about Pr.160. Pr. 9 Pr.51 Pr.22 Pr. 71 Pr.80 to Pr.84, Pr.89 Pr.90 to Pr.94, Pr.96 Pr.800 Pr.822, Pr.826 Pr.820, Pr.821, Pr.824, Pr.825 Pr.823 Pr.48, Pr.49 Pr. 450 Pr.453 to Pr.457 Pr.569, Pr.458 to Pr.462, Pr.463 Pr.451 Pr.832, Pr.836 Pr.830, Pr.831, Pr.834, Pr.835 Pr.833 Pr.114, Pr.115 Refer to the section about Pr.22. Pr. 159 Refer to the section about Pr.135. Pr. 160, 172 to 174 User group function Pr.160 User group read selection Pr.173 User group registration Pr.172 User group registered display/batch clear Pr.174 User group clear Parameter which can be read from the operation panel and parameter unit can be restricted. The inverter is set to display all parameters with initial setting. Description All parameters can be displayed. 1 Only the parameters registered in the user group can be displayed. 9999 Only the simple mode parameters can be displayed. User group function (Pr.160, Pr.172 to Pr.174) ⋅ The user group function is designed to display only the parameters necessary for setting. ⋅ From among all parameters, a maximum of 16 parameters can be registered in the user group. When "1" is set in Pr.160 , only parameters registered in the user group can be accessed for reading and writing. (The parameters not registered in the user group can not be read.) ⋅ To set a parameter in the user group, set its parameter number in Pr.173. ⋅ To delete a parameter from the user group, set its parameter number in Pr.174 . To batch-delete the registered parameters, set Pr.172 to "9999". 59 Description Setting dial frequency setting mode First Function Parameter Refer to the section about Pr.52. 0 (initial value) 0 (initial value) Pr. 166, 167 Pr. 168, 169 Pr. 158 Pr.160 Setting You can use the setting dial of the operation panel (FR-DU07) like a potentiometer to perform operation. The key operation of the operation panel can be disabled. Pr.161 Setting Description Function Pr.161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions. Refer to the section about Pr.150. Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set. *1 *2 *3 *4 3 RT 4 5 AU JOG 6 CS 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 42 43 44 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 9999 OH REX X9 X10 X11 X12 X13 X14 BRI X16 X17 X18 X19 X20 X22 LX MRS STOP MC TL X28 X42 X43 X44 STF STR RES PTC X64 X65 X66 X67 NP CLR X70 X71 --- Terminal 4 input selection Jog operation selection Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, flying start External thermal relay input*3 15-speed selection (combination with three speeds RL, RM, RH) Third function RUN SU IPF OL FU FU2 FU3 RBP THP PU RY Y12 Y13 FDN FUP RL Inverter running Up to frequency Instantaneous power failure/undervoltage Overload alarm Output frequency detection Second output frequency detection Third output frequency detection Regenerative brake prealarm Electronic thermal relay function prealarm PU operation mode Inverter operation ready Output current detection Zero current detection PID lower limit PID upper limit PID forward/reverse rotation output MC1 Commercial power-supply switchover MC1 MC2 Commercial power-supply switchover MC2 MC3 Commercial power-supply switchover MC3 Brake opening request Fan fault output Heatsink overheat pre-alarm Orientation in-position * Orientation error * Forward rotation output * Reverse rotation output * Regenerative status output * Operation ready 2 Low speed output Torque detection In-position * Speed detection Second speed detection Third speed detection Inverter running 2 During inverter running and start command is on During deceleration due to instantaneous power failure (retained until release) During PID control activated During retry During PID output suspension Preparation ready signal * DC current feeding Life alarm Alarm output 3 (power-off signal) Energy saving average value updated timing Current average monitor signal Alarm output 2 Maintenance timer signal Remote output Minor fault output 2 Minor fault output Alarm output FR-HC connection, instantaneous power failure detection 18 PU operation external interlock 19 External DC injection brake operation start Torque bias selection 1 *4 20 25 26 27 28 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 41 42 43 44 45 120 125 126 127 128 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 141 142 143 144 145 BOF FAN FIN ORA ORM Y30 Y31 Y32 RY2 LS TU Y36 FB FB2 FB3 RUN2 RUN3 Torque bias selection 2 *4 46 146 Y46 47 64 70 84 85 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 147 164 170 184 185 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 PID Y64 SLEEP RDY Y85 Y90 Y91 Y92 Y93 ALM2 Y95 REM ER LF ALM Inverter operation enable signal (FR-HC/FR-CV connection) PID control valid terminal Brake opening completion signal PU-external operation switchover Load pattern selection forward rotation reverse rotation boost V/F swichover (V/F cntrol is exercised when X18 is on) Load torque high speed frequency S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C switching terminal Orientation command Pre-excitation (zero speed control/servo lock) Output stop Start self-holding selection Control mode swichover Torque limit selection Start time tuning P/PI control switchover Forward rotation command (assigned to STF terminal (Pr.178) only) Reverse rotation command (assigned to STR terminal (Pr.179) only) Inverter reset PTC thermister input (assigned to AU terminal (Pr.184) only) PID forward/reverse action switchover External/NET operation switchover NET/PU operation switchover Command source switchover Conditional position pulse train sign*4 Conditional position droop pulse clear*4 DC feeding operation permission DC feeding cancel No function When Pr.59 Remote function selection= "1 or 2", the functions of the RL, RM and RH signals change as listed above. When Pr.270 = "1 or 3", the functions of the RL and RT signals change as listed above. The OH signal turns on when the relay contact "opens". Available only when used with the FR-A7AP. 17 Pr. 232 to 239 No function Peripheral Devices Refer to the section about Pr. 4. Pr. 240 Refer to the section about Pr.72. Pr. 241 Refer to the section about Pr. 125. Pr. 242, 243 When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions. 9999 * Available only when used with the FR-A7AP. Standard Specifications RH 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 Function Outline Dimension Drawings 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Signal Name Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation RM Negative logic Operation Panel 1 Positive logic Parameter List RL Pr.59 =0 (initial value) Low-speed operation command Pr.59 =1, 2*1 Remote setting (setting clear) Pr.270 =1, 3 *2 Stop-on contact selection 0 Pr.59 =0 (initial value) Middle-speed operation command Pr.59 =1, 2 *1 Remote setting (deceleration) Pr.59 =0 (initial value) High-speed operation command Pr.59 =1, 2 *1 Remote setting (acceleration) Second function selection Pr.270 =1, 3 *2 Stop-on contact selection 1 Pr.190 to Pr.196 Setting Explanations of Parameters 0 Function You can change the functions of the open collector output terminal and relay output terminal. Protective Functions Signal Name Pr.191 SU terminal function selection Pr.193 OL terminal function selection Pr.195 ABC1 terminal function selection Options Pr.178 to Pr.189 Setting Pr.190 RUN terminal function selection Pr.192 IPF terminal function selection Pr.194 FU terminal function selection Pr.196 ABC2 terminal function selection Instructions Use these parameters to select/change the input terminal functions. Terminal assignment of output terminal Motor Pr.179 STR terminal function selection Pr.181 RM terminal function selection Pr.183 RT terminal function selection Pr.185 JOG terminal function selection Pr.187 MRS terminal function selection Pr.189 RES terminal function selection Compatibility Pr.178 STF terminal function selection Pr.180 RL terminal function selection Pr.182 RH terminal function selection Pr.184 AU terminal function selection Pr.186 CS terminal function selection Pr.188 STOP terminal function selection Warranty Function assignment of input terminal Features Pr. 190 to 196 Inquiry Pr. 178 to 189 Refer to the section about Pr.73. 60 Pr. 244 Pr. 251, 872 Increase cooling fan life Input/output phase failure protection selection Pr.244 Cooling fan operation selection You can control the operation of the cooling fan (200V class 1.5K or more, 400V class 2.2K or more) built in the inverter. Pr.244 Setting Description Operates at power on Cooling fan on/off control invalid (the cooling fan is always on in power-on status) 0 1 (initial value) Cooling fan on/off control valid The fan is always on while the inverter is running. During a stop, the inverter status is monitored and the fan switches on-off according to the temperature. Pr.251 Output phase failure protection selection Pr.872 Input phase failure protection selection You can disable the output phase failure protection function that stops the inverter output if one of the inverter output side (load side) three phases (U, V, W) opens. The input phase failure protection selection of the inverter input side (R, S, T) can be made valid. Pr. Number Setting Range 0 251 Pr. 245 to 247 872 Slip compensation V/F 1 (initial value) With output phase failure protection 0 (initial value) Without input phase failure protection 1 Pr. 252, 253 Pr.245 Rated slip Pr.246 Slip compensation time constant Pr.247 Constant-power region slip compensation selection The inverter output current may be used to assume motor slip to keep the motor speed constant. Description Without output phase failure protection With input phase failure protection Refer to the section about Pr.73. Pr. 255 to 259 Display of the life of the inverter parts Pr.255 Life alarm status display Pr.257 Control circuit capacitor life display Pr.259 Main circuit capacitor life measuring Pr. 250 Selection of motor stopping method and start signal Pr.256 Inrush current limit circuit life display Pr.258 Main circuit capacitor life display Degrees of deterioration of main circuit capacitor, control circuit capacitor or inrush current limit circuit and cooling fan can be diagnosed by monitor. Pr.250 Stop selection When any part has approached the end of its life, an alarm can be Used to select the stopping method (deceleration to a stop or coasting) when the start signal turns off. Used to stop the motor with a mechanical brake, etc. together with switching off of the start signal. You can also select the operations of the start signals (STF/STR). Description Pr.250 Setting output by self diagnosis to prevent a fault. (Use the life check of this function as a guideline since the life except the main circuit capacitor is calculated theoretically.) Pr. Number Setting Range 255 (0 to 15) The motor is coasted to a stop when the preset time elapses after the start signal is turned off. The motor is coasted to a stop (Pr. 250 - 1000)s after the start signal is turned off. Display whether the control circuit capacitor, main circuit capacitor, cooling fan, and each parts of the inrush current limit circuit has reached the life alarm output level or not. Reading only 256 (0 to 100%) Display the deterioration degree of the inrush current limit circuit. Reading only 257 (0 to 100%) Display the deterioration degree of the control circuit capacitor. Reading only When the start signal is turned off, the motor decelerates to stop. 258 (0 to 100%) Display the deterioration degree of the main circuit capacitor. Reading only The value measured by Pr.259 is displayed. Start signal (STF/STR) Stop operation 0 to 100s STF signal: Forward rotation start STR signal: Reverse rotation start 1000s to 1100s STF signal: Start signal STR signal: Forward/reverse signal 9999 STF signal: Forward rotation start STR signal: Reverse rotation start 8888 STF signal: Start signal STR signal: Forward/reverse signal When "9999 (initial value) or "8888" is set in Pr.250 Deceleration starts when start signal turns off Output frequency (Hz) Start signal RUN signal Deceleration time (Time set in Pr. 8, etc.) DC brake Time OFF ON ON OFF When a value other than "9999 (initial value) or "8888" is set in Pr.250 Output is shut off when set time elapses after start signal turns off Pr.250 Output frequency (Hz) Start signal RUN signal 61 Motor coasts to stop Time OFF ON ON Description OFF When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions. 259 0, 1 Setting "1" and turning the power supply off starts the measurement of the main circuit capacitor life. When the Pr.259 value is "3" after powering on again, the measuring is completed.Read the deterioration degree in Pr.258 . (1) Power failure stop mode (Pr.261="1" "11") Pr. 261 to 266, 294 Pr.261 = 1 12 262 0 to 20Hz 0 to 120Hz 263 9999 264 265 0 to 3600s/360s * 0 to 3600s/360s * 9999 266 294 0 to 400Hz 0 to 200% * When the setting of Pr.21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments is "0" (initial value), the setting range is "0 to 3600s" and setting increments are "0.1s" and when the setting is "1", the setting range is "0 to 360s" and the setting increments are "0.01s". Power supply Subtracted frequency at deceleration start Pr.262 Pr.265 Power-failure deceleration time 2 Time Pr.261 = 2 When power is restored during deceleration IPF Power supply Output frequency During deceleration at occurrence of power failure Reacceleration Time Y46 Pr.261 = 2, Pr.57 9999 When used with automatic restart after instantaneous power failure During power failure Power supply Output frequency During deceleration at occurrence of power failure Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure Time Y46 Outline Dimension Drawings Standard Specifications automatic restart after instantaneous power failure operation, deceleration can be made at a power failure and acceleration can be made again after power restoration. When power is restored after a stop by deceleration at an instantaneous power failure, automatic restart operation is performed if automatic restart after instantaneous power failure has been selected (Pr.57 ≠ "9999") Reset time + Pr.57 Pr. 267 Refer to the section about Pr. 73. Pr. 268 Refer to the section about Pr.52. Pr. 269 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set. Inquiry Output frequency Power-failure deceleration time switchover frequency Pr.266 Pr.264 Power-failure deceleration time 1 failure, acceleration is made again up to the set frequency. ⋅ When this function is used in combination with the Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation When undervoltage or a power failure occurs, the inverter can be decelerated to a stop. If power is restored With UV during a power failure, avoidance the inverter accelerates again. Normally operation can be performed with the initial value unchanged. But adjust the frequency according to the magnitude of the load specifications (moment of inertia, torque). When output frequency ≥ Pr.263 Decelerate from the speed obtained from output frequency minus Pr.262. When output frequency ≤ Pr.263 Decelerate from output frequency Decelerate from the speed obtained from output frequency minus Pr. 262. Set a deceleration slope down to the frequency set in Pr.266. Set a deceleration slope below the frequency set in Pr.266. Same slope as in Pr.264 Set the frequency at which the deceleration slope is switched from the Pr.264 setting to the Pr.265 setting. Adjust response level at UV avoidance operation. A larger setting will improve responsiveness to the bus voltage change. Since the regeneration amount is large when the inertia is large, decrease the setting value. Without UV avoidance ⋅ When power is restored during deceleration after a power Operation Panel 2 Turn off STF once to make acceleration again (2) Original operation continuation at instantaneous power failure function (Pr.261="2" "12") Parameter List 11 261 Y46 Explanations of Parameters 1 Coasting to stop When undervoltage or power failure occurs, the inverter output is shut off. Without UV When undervoltage or avoidance a power failure occurs, the inverter can be With UV decelerated to a stop. avoidance STF Protective Functions 0(initial value) Time Description Options Setting Range Instructions the set frequency. During stop at occurrence of power failure Motor decelerated to a stop or can be decelerated and re-accelerated to Pr. Number During deceleration at occurrence of power failure Compatibility When a power failure or undervoltage occurs, the inverter can be Peripheral Devices Power supply Warranty Pr.261 Power failure stop selection Pr.262 Subtracted frequency at deceleration start Pr.263 Subtraction starting frequency Pr.264 Power-failure deceleration time 1 Pr.265 Power-failure deceleration time 2 Pr.266 Power failure deceleration time switchover frequency Pr.294 UV avoidance voltage gain deceleration to a stop is continued and the inverter remaines stopped. To restart, turn off the start signal once, then turn it on again. Output frequency Operation at instantaneous power failure Features ⋅ If power is restored during power failure deceleration, When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions. 62 Pr. 270 to 274, 4, 5 Pr. 270, 275, 276, 6 Load torque high speed frequency control Stop-on contact control Pr.270 Stop-on contact/load torque high-speed frequency control selection Pr.271 High-speed setting maximum current Pr.272 Middle-speed setting minimum current Pr.273 Current averaging range Pr.274 Current averaging filter time constant Pr.4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) Pr.5 Multi-speed setting (middle speed) Magnetic flux Sensorless Pr.270 Stop-on contact/load torque high-speed frequency control selection Pr.275 Stop-on contact excitation current low-speed multiplying factor Pr.276 PWM carrier frequency at stop-on contact Pr.6 Multi-speed setting (low speed) To ensure accurate positioning at the upper limit etc. of an elevator, This function is designed to increase speed automatically under stop-on-contact control causes a mechanical brake to be closed light load, for example to minimize the incoming/outgoing time in a while the motor is developing a holding torque to keep the load in multi-story parking lot. contact with a mechanical stopper etc. More specifically, the magnitude of the load is judged according to This function suppresses vibration which is liable to occur when the the average current at a certain time after starting to perform load is stopped upon contact in vertical motion applications, operation at higher than the preset frequency under light load. ensuring steady precise positioning. Pr.270 Setting Description 0 (initial value) Without stop-on contact control and load torque high-speed frequency control Pr.270 Setting 0 (initial value) Description Without stop-on contact control and load torque high-speed frequency control Stop-on contact control 1 Stop-on contact control 2 Load torque high speed frequency control 2 Load torque high speed frequency control 3 Stop-on contact + load torque high speed frequency control 3 Stop-on contact + load torque high speed frequency control Frequency Set "2 or 3" in Pr.270 to set the current value, averaging range, etc when the load torque high speed frequency control is selected. When the X19 signal (load detection high-speed frequency function selection) is turned on to start operation, the inverter automatically varies the maximum frequency between Pr.4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) and Pr.5 settings according to the average current flowing during acceleration from half of the frequency of the Pr.5 Multi-speed setting (middle speed) setting to the frequency set in Pr.5. Select either real sensorless vector control or advanced magnetic flux vector control. When both the RT and RL signals are switched on, the inverter enters the stop-on contact mode, in which operation is performed at the frequency set in Pr.6 Multi-speed setting (low speed) independently of the preceding speed. Pr.4 (120Hz) Pr.5 (60Hz) Pr.271 (50%) Pr.272 (100%) Pr. Number Setting Range 4 0 to 400Hz Set the higher-speed frequency. 5 0 to 400Hz Set the lower-speed frequency. 271 0 to 220% 272 0 to 220% Set the upper and lower limits of the current at high and middle speeds. 0 to 400Hz 273 274 Pr. Number 1 to 4000 Set the time constant of the primary delay filter relative to the output current. (The time constant[ms] is 0.75 × Pr.274 and the factory setting is 12ms.) A larger setting provides higher stability but poorer response. Pr.6 0 Time (a) (b) RH ON RM OFF RL OFF RT OFF (c) ON ON * ON Description 0 to 400Hz Set the output frequency for stop-on-contact control. The frequency should be as low as possible (about 2Hz). If it is set to more than 30Hz, the operating frequency will be 30Hz. When performing stop-on-contact control during encoder feedback control, encoder feedback control is made invalid due to a mode shift to the stop-on-contact control mode. 6 0 to 200% Set the stall prevention operation level for stopon-contact when using under advanced magnetic flux vector control. (Use the Pr.22 setting value under real sensorless vector control.) 0 to 1000% Usually set a value between 130% and 180%. Set the force (holding torque) for stop-oncontact control. Average current during acceleration from (Pr.273 × 1/2)Hz to (Pr.273 )Hz can be achieved. Average current during acceleration from (Pr.5 × 1/2)Hz to (Pr.5)Hz is achieved. Pr.5 Setting Range Description 9999 Normal mode Stop-on contact control mode Pr.4 Goes into stop-on-contact control mode when both RL and RT switch on. *RL and RT may be switched on in any order with any time difference (a):Acceleration time (Pr.7) (b):Deceleration time (Pr.8) (c):Second deceleration time (Pr.44) Average current Value in parenthesis is initial value Frequency relative to the average current Output frequency 1 48 275 9999 276 0 to9/0 to 4 * 9999 No compensation. Set a PWM carrier frequency for stop-oncontact control. For real sensorless vector control, carrier frequency is always 2kHz when a setting value is 0 to 5 and always 6kHz when a setting value is 6 to 9. (Valid at the output frequency of 3Hz or less.) As set in Pr.72 PWM frequency selection. * Differ according to capacities. (55K or less/75K or more) 63 When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions. 0 to 30Hz Set to the rated slip frequency of the motor + about 1.0Hz. This parameter may be only set if Pr.278 ≤ Pr.282. 279 0 to 220% Generally, set this parameter to about 50 to 90%. If the setting is too low, the load is liable to drop due to gravity at start. Suppose that the rated inverter current is 100%. 280 0 to 2s Generally, set this parameter to about 0.1 to 0.3s. 281 0 to 5s Pr.292 = 7: Set the mechanical delay time until the brake is loosened. Pr.292 = 8: Set the mechanical delay time until the brake is loosened+about 0.1 to 0.2s. 282 0 to 30Hz 283 0 to 5s This function prevents the load from dropping with gravity at a start due to the operation timing error of the mechanical brake or an overcurrent alarm from occurring at a stop, ensuring secure operation. 0 (initial value) <Operation example> At start: When the start signal is input to the inverter, the inverter 0 to 30Hz When brake sequence function is made valid under encoder feedback control If (detected frequency) - (output frequency) > Pr.285 the inverter alarm (E.MB1) is provided to shut off the output and turn off the brake opening request signal (BOF). than the value set in Pr.279, the inverter outputs the brake has elapsed. 285 When the time set in Pr.281 elapses after the brake opening 9999 (initial value) completion signal (BRI) was activated, the inverter increases the output frequency to the set speed. At stop: When the speed has decreased to the frequency set in 292 Deceleration is not detected. If deceleration is not normal during deceleration operation, the inverter alarm (E.MB2) is provided to shut off the output and turn off the brake opening request signal (BOF). the value set in Pr.278 and the output current is not less opening request signal (BOF) after the time set in Pr.280 Pr.292 =7: Set the mechanical delay time until the brake is closed + 0.1s. Pr.292 =8: Set the mechanical delay time until the brake is closed + 0.2 to 0.3s. 1 284 starts running. When the internal speed command reaches At this frequency, the brake opening request signal (BOF) is switched off.Generally, set this parameter to the Pr.278 setting + 3 to 4Hz. This parameter may only be set if Pr.282 ≥ Pr.278. 0, 1, 3, 5 to 8, 11 Overspeed is not detected. Brake sequence function is made valid when a setting is "7 or 8". Pr.282 , the brake opening request signal (BOF) is turned off. When the time set in Pr.283 elapses after the brake operation confirmation signal (BRI) was activated, the inverter output is switched off. * If Pr.292 = "8" (mechanical brake opening completion signal not input), this time is the time after the brake opening request signal is output. Target frequency Pr.280 Pr.281 Pr.283 ON Time Pr.279 Output I ON Brake opening request (BOF signal) Brake opening completion (BRI signal) Electromagnetic brake operation Pr.285 Speed deviation excess detection frequency Output frequency Output frequency(Hz) STF Speed deviation excess detection Pr.853 Speed deviation time (Hz) Pr.285 Set frequency Closed Opened Alarm output (across A-C) Features Peripheral Devices Actual speed Time Pr.853 ON Closed Vector If the difference (absolute value) between the speed command value and actual speed exceeds the Pr. 285 Speed deviation excess detection frequency setting for longer than the time set in Pr. 853 Speed deviation time during speed control under vector control, speed deviation excessive occurs and error "E. OSD" appears, resulting in a stop. 1)Pr.292 = "7" (brake opening completion signal input) Pr.282 Pr.278 Pr.13 Pr. 285, 853 Standard Specifications other applications. Outline Dimension Drawings brake opening completion signal timing signal in vertical lift and Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation This function is used to output from the inverter the mechanical Operation Panel Pr.279 Brake opening current Pr.281 Brake operation time at start Pr.283 Brake operation time at stop Pr.285 Overspeed detection frequency Parameter List Vector Explanations of Parameters Pr.278 Brake opening frequency Pr.280 Brake opening current detection time Pr.282 Brake operation frequency Pr.284 Deceleration detection function selection Pr.292 Automatic acceleration/deceleration 278 Description Protective Functions Sensorless Magnetic flux Setting Range Options Brake sequence function Pr. Number OFF ON Instructions Pr. 278 to 285, 292 Speed deviation excessive error activated (E. OSD) Motor 2)Pr.292 = "8" (brake opening completion signal not input) Output frequency(Hz) Target frequency Pr.281 Pr.13 Output I Time ON Opened Closed Inquiry Closed Warranty Pr.279 Brake opening request (BOF signal) Electromagnetic brake operation Pr.283 ON STF Compatibility Pr.280 Pr.282 Pr.278 When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions. 64 Change the frequency at pulse train input.(Pr.385, Pr.386) Droop control Magnetic flux Pr.286 Droop gain Pr.288 Droop function activation selection Sensorless Output frequency (Hz) Pr. 286 to 288 Vector Pr.287 Droop filter time constant This function is designed to balance the load in proportion to the load torque to provide the speed drooping characteristic. This function is effective for balancing the load when using multiple inverters Setting Range Pr. Number 286 287 Droop control is invalid 0.1 to 100% Set the drooping amount at the rated torque as a percentage with respect to the rated motor frequency. 0.00 to 1.00s Set the time constant of the filter applied on the torque amount current. Advanced magnetic flux vector control 0 (initial value), 10 288 1, 11 Droop control is not exercised during acceleration/ deceleration. Droop compensation amount is determined using the rated motor frequency as reference. 0 Pr. 292, 293 Droop control is not exercised during acceleration/deceleration. (When Pr.288 = 10, droop compensation amount is determined using the motor speed as reference.) Droop control is always exercised during operation. (without 0 limit) 2 Droop control This control is valid when a value other than "0" is set in Pr.286 under advanced magnetic flux vector control, real sensorless vector control and vector control. The maximum droop compensation frequency is 120Hz. Rated frequency Refer to the section about Pr.61. Pr. 294 Refer to the section about Pr.261. Pr. 299 Refer to the section about Pr.57. Pr. 331 to 337 Operation command source and speed command source during communication operation Pr.338 Communication operation command source Pr.339 Communication speed command source Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selection Pr.551PU mode operation command source selection When the RS-485 terminals or communication option is used, the external operation command and speed command can be made valid. Operation command source in the PU operation mode can be selected. Pr. Number 338 Droop compensation frequency 339 Droop gain Setting Range 0 (initial value) 1 0 (initial value) 1 2 0 1 100% Torque 0 550* 9999 (initial value) Pr. 291, 384 to 386 1 Pulse train I/O 551* Pr.291 Pulse train I/O selection Pr.385 Frequency for zero input pulse Pr.384 Input pulse division scaling factor Pr.386 Frequency for maximum input pulse The inverter speed can be set by inputting pulse train from terminal JOG. In addition, pulse train can be output as open collector from terminal FM. Synchronous speed operation of inverters can be performed by combining pulse train I/O. Pr.291 Setting Input Output 0 (initial value) 1 10 11 20 21 JOG terminal FM output Pulse train input JOG terminal Pulse train input JOG terminal Pulse train output (50%Duty) 100 * 65 Pulse train input FM output Pulse train output (ON width is always same) Pulse train output (ON width is always same)* The inverter outputs the signal input as pulse train as it is regardless of the Pr.54 setting. When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions. Refer to the section about Pr.117. Pr. 338, 339, 550, 551 Frequency -100% Input pulse(pps) 100 (Maximum pulse) Calculation method of input pulse division scaling factor (Pr.384) Maximum number of input pulses (PPS)=Pr.384 × 400 (maximum permissible pulses=100kpps) When Pr.419 Position command source selection ="2" (conditional pulse train position command), JOG terminal serves as conditional position pulse train input terminal regardless of the Pr.291 Pulse train I/O selection setting. Real sensor less vector / vector control Droop control is always exercised during operation. (with 0 limit) (When Pr.288 = 11, droop compensation amount is determined using the motor speed as reference.) Gain (Pr.386) Bias (Pr.385) Description 0 (initial value) Initial value 60Hz 2 (initial value) 3 * Description Operation command source communication Operation command source external Speed command source communication Speed command source external (Frequency setting from communication is invalid, terminal 2 and 1 setting from external is valid) Speed command source external (Frequency setting from communication is valid, terminal 2 and 1 setting from external is invalid) Communication option is valid RS-485 terminals are valid Automatic recognition of the communication option Normally, the RS-485 terminals are valid. When a communication option is mounted, the communication option is valid. Select the RS-485 terminals as the PU operation mode control source Select the PU connector as the PU operation mode control source Select the USB connector as the PU operation mode control source Pr.550 and Pr.551 are always write-enabled. Pr. 340 Refer to the section about Pr.79. Pr. 341 to 343 Refer to the section about Pr.117. Vector Pr.374 Overspeed detection level Motor speed Orientation speed (set in Pr. 351 ) Creep speed (set in Pr. 352 ) Coast to stop ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF Pr. 359, 367 to 369 Encoder feedback control V/F Pr.359 Encoder rotation direction Pr.368 Feedback gain Magnetic flux Pr.367 Speed feedback range Pr.369 Number of encoder pulses This controls the inverter output frequency so that the motor speed is constant to the load variation by detecting the motor speed with the speed detector (encoder) to feed it back to the inverter. Option FR-A7AP is necessary. Set the rotation direction of the encoder using Pr.359 Encoder rotation direction and Pr.369 Number of encoder pulses. When a value other than "9999" is set in Pr.367 Speed feedback range, encoder feedback control is valid. Using the set point (frequency at which stable speed operation is performed) as reference, set the higher and lower setting range. Normally, set the frequency converted from the slip amount (r/min) of the rated motor speed (rated load). If the setting is too large, response becomes slow. Speed feedback range Driven load Regenerative load Set value (Set command) Set Pr.368 Feedback gain when the rotation is unstable or response is slow. Pr.368 Setting Magnetic flux Vector When the cable of the encoder signal is broken during encoder feedback control, orientation control, or vector control, open cable detection (E.ECT) is activated to stop the inverter output. Pr. 380 to 383 Refer to the section about Pr.29. Pr. 384 to 386 Refer to the section about Pr.291. Description Pr.368 > 1 Although the response becomes faster, overcurrent or unstable rotation is liable to occur. 1 < Pr.368 Although the response becomes slower, the motor rotation becomes stable. When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions. Explanations of Parameters In-position signal (across ORA-SE) V/F Pr.376 Open cable detection enable/disable selection Stop position command Origin signal DC injection brake Encoder signal cable breakage detection Protective Functions DC injection brake start position (set in Pr. 355 ) Pr. 376 Options Current position signal OFF OFF Creep select position (set in Pr. 353 ) Position loop select position (set in Pr. 354 ) E.OS Instructions ON ON ALM Motor OFF Orientation command (across X22-SD) Outline Dimension Drawings Time Compatibility 0 Start signal (across STF/STR-SD) Standard Specifications Pr.374 Warranty Spindle speed (encoder) Vector When the motor speed reaches or exceeds the speed set in Pr.374 during encoder feedback control or vector control, overspeed (E.OS) occurs and stops the inverter output. This function is used with a position detector (encoder) installed to the spindle of a machine tool, etc. to allow a rotation shaft to be stopped at the specified position (oriented). Plug-in option FR-A7AP is necessary. Internal stop position command When "0" is set in Pr.350 Stop position command selection, the inverter operates in the internal stop position command mode. In the internal stop position command mode, the setting value of Pr. 356 Internal stop position command becomes a stop position. External stop position command When 1 is set in Pr.350 Stop position command selection and the option FR-A7AX is mounted, set a stop position using 16-bit data. Action time chart Magnetic flux Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation Pr.351 Orientation speed Pr.353 Creep switchover position Pr.355 DC injection brake start position Pr.357 In-position zone Pr.359 Encoder rotation direction Pr.361 Position shift Pr.363 Completion signal output delay time Pr.365 Orientation limit Pr.369 Number of encoder pulses Pr.396 Orientation speed gain (P term) Pr.398 Orientation speed gain (D term) V/F Inquiry Pr.350 Stop position command selection Pr.352 Creep speed Pr.354 Position loop switchover position Pr.356 Internal stop position command Pr.358 Servo torque selection Pr.360 16 bit data selection Pr.362 Orientation position loop gain Pr.364 Encoder stop check time Pr.366 Recheck time Pr.393 Orientation selection Pr.397 Orientation speed integral time Pr.399 Orientation deceleration ratio Magnetic flux Peripheral Devices Overspeed detection V/F Operation Panel Orientation control Features Pr. 374 Parameter List Pr. 350 to 366, 369, 393, 396 to 399 66 Pr. 419, 464 to 494 Param eter Conditional position feed by contact input Vector Pr.419 Position command source selection Pr.465 First position feed amount lower 4 digits Pr.467 Second position feed amount lower 4 digits Pr.469 Third position feed amount lower 4 digits Pr.471 Fourth position feed amount lower 4 digits Pr.473 Fifth position feed amount lower 4 digits Pr.475 Sixth position feed amount lower 4 digits Pr.477 Seventh position feed amount lower 4 digits Pr.479 Eighth position feed amount lower 4 digits Pr.481 Ninth position feed amount lower 4 digits Pr. 483 Tenth position feed amount lower 4 digits Pr.485 Eleventh position feed amount lower 4 digits Pr.487 Twelfth position feed amount lower 4 digits Pr.489 Thirteenth position feed amount lower 4 digits Pr.491 Fourteenth position feed amount lower 4 digits Pr.493 Fifteenth position feed amount lower 4 digits Pr.464 Digital position control sudden stop deceleration time Pr.466 First position feed amount upper 4 digits Pr.468 Second position feed amount upper 4 digits Pr.470 Third position feed amount upper 4 digits Pr.472 Fourth position feed amount upper 4 digits Pr.474 Fifth position feed amount upper 4 digits Pr.476 Sixth position feed amount upper 4 digits Pr.478 Seventh position feed amount upper 4 digits Pr.480 Eighth position feed amount upper 4 digits Pr.482 Ninth position feed amount upper 4 digits Pr.484 Tenth position feed amount upper 4 digits Pr.486 Eleventh position feed amount upper 4 digits Pr.488 Twelfth position feed amount upper 4 digits Pr.490 Thirteenth position feed amount upper 4 digits Pr.492 Fourteenth position feed amount upper 4 digits Pr. 494 Fifteenth position feed amount upper 4 digits Inputting the number of pulses (positions) in the parameters and setting multi-speed and forward (reverse) commands enable position control during servo operation.This position feed function does not return to the home position. Set position command using any two of Pr. 465 to Pr. 494 (position feed amount). Resolution of encoder × speed × 4 ↓ (When stopping the motor after 100 rotations using the FR-V5RU) 2048 (pulse/rev) × 100 (speed) × 4 = 819200 (feed amount) Setting of the first feed amount 819200 Pr.466 (upper) = "0081" Pr.465 (lower) = "9200" (decimal) <Position feed data setting parameters> Param eter 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 67 Selection Method RE RH RM RL X Name First position feed amount Second position feed amount Third position feed amount Fourth position feed amount Fifth position feed amount Sixth position feed amount Seventh position feed amount Eigth position feed amount Ninth position feed amount Tenth position feed amount Eleventh position feed amount Twelfth position feed amount Thirteenth position feed amount (lower digits) (upper digits) (lower digits) (upper digits) (lower digits) (upper digits) (lower digits) (upper digits) (lower digits) (upper digits) (lower digits) (upper digits) (lower digits) (upper digits) (lower digits) (upper digits) (lower digits) (upper digits) (lower digits) (upper digits) (lower digits) (upper digits) (lower digits) (upper digits) (lower digits) (upper digits) Position Feed Speed OFF ON OFF OFF High speed (Pr.4) OFF OFF ON OFF Middle speed (Pr.5) 491 492 493 494 Selection Method RE RH RM RL X Name (lower digits) (upper digits) (lower digits) (upper digits) Fourteenth position feed amount Fifteenth position feed amount ON ON ON OFF Speed 14 (Pr.238) ON ON ON ON Speed 15 (Pr.239) Shaded part is the travel Feed amount pulses Pr.466×10000+Pr.465 Feed speed Pr.4 Position Feed Speed Sudden stop when STF turns off Speed Pr.8 (Pr.45, Pr.111) Pr.7 (Pr.44, Pr.110) Pr.464 Pr.5 Servo on (LX) RH Position feed is effected by sending run command by contact input. RM STF STR Y36 In-position Pr. 419, 428 to 430 Position control by pulse train input of the inverter Vector Pr.419 Position command source selection Pr.429 Clear signal selection Pr.428 Command pulse selection Pr.430 Pulse monitor selection Conditional position pulse train command can be input by pulse train input and sign signal (NP) from the JOG terminal. When 2 is set in Pr.419, conditional pulse train position command is selected. Select command pulse train using Pr.428. Turning on (short the terminal LX-SD) the servo on signal cancels the base circuit shut-off. When the terminal STF (forward rotation stroke end signal) or terminal STR (reverse rotation stroke end signal) and terminal SD are shorted at this time, the motor starts rotating in accordance with the command pulses. When the forward (reverse) rotation stroke end signal is opened, the motor does not run in the corresponding direction. Forward rotation Actual rotation Reverse rotation OFF OFF OFF ON Low speed (Pr.6) Base signal Servo-on (LX) Forward stroke end (STF) Reverse stroke end (STR) OFF OFF ON ON Speed 4 (Pr.24) Inverter pulse train command Sign signal (NP) In-position (Y36) OFF ON OFF ON Speed 5 (Pr.25) OFF ON ON OFF Speed 6 (Pr.26) Pr. 420, 421, 424 Set the electronic gear for position control Vector OFF ON ON ON Speed 7 (Pr.27) ON OFF OFF OFF Speed 8 (Pr.232) Pr.420 Command pulse scaling factor numerator Pr.421 Command pulse scaling factor denominator Pr.424 Position command acceleration/deceleration time constant Set the ratio of the machine side gear and the motor side gear. ON OFF OFF ON Speed 9 (Pr.233) ON OFF ON OFF Speed 10 (Pr.234) ON OFF ON ON Speed 11 (Pr.235) ON ON OFF OFF Speed 12 (Pr.236) ON ON OFF ON Speed 13 (Pr.237) When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions. Pr. Number Setting Range 420 421 0 to 32767 424 0 to 50s Description Set the electronic gear. Pr. 420 is a numerator and Pr. 421 is a denominator. Used when rotation has become unsmooth at a large electronic gear ratio (about 10 times or more) and low speed. Positioning adjustment parameter Pr.426 In-position width 9999 (initial value) Vector Communication time interval is not checked. Pr.427 Excessive level error When the number of droop pulses has fallen below the value set in Pr.426, the in-position signal (Y36) turns on. When droop pulses exceed the value set in Pr.427, position error large occurs and displays an error (E.OD) to stop the inverter. Pr. 450 Refer to the section about Pr.71. Pr. 451 Refer to the section about Pr.80. Refer to the section about Pr.338. Current average value monitor signal Refer to the section about Pr.82. Pr. 495 to 497 Remote output function (REM signal) Pr.495 Remote output selection Pr.497 Remote output data 2 Refer to the section about Pr.117. Pr. 550, 551 Pr. 555 to 557 Refer to the section about Pr.80. Pr. 455 to 463 Pr. 549 Pr.496 Remote output data 1 You can utilize the on/off of the inverter's output signals instead of the remote output terminal of the programmable logic controller. Pr.555 Current average time Pr.556 Data output mask time Pr.557 Current average value monitor signal output reference current The average value of the output current during constant speed operation and the maintenance timer value are output as a pulse to the current average value monitor signal (Y93). The pulse width output to the I/O module of the PLC or the like can be used as a guideline due to abrasion of machines and elongation of belt and for aged deterioration of devices to know the maintenance time. The current average value monitor signal (Y93) is output as pulse for 20s as 1 cycle and repeatedly output during constant speed operation. From acceleration to constant speed operation Output frequency Pr. 503, 504 Maintenance of parts Pr.503 Maintenance timer 1 cycle (20s) Pr.504 Maintenance timer alarm output set time When the cumulative energization time of the inverter reaches the parameter set time, the maintenance timer output signal (Y95) is output. (MT) is displayed on the operation panel (FRDU07). This can be used as a guideline for the maintenance time of peripheral devices. First power ON 9998 (999800h) Maintenance timer Pr.504 (Pr. 503) Time Y95 signal MT display OFF ON ON The cumulative energization time of the inverter is stored into the EEPROM every hour and indicated in Pr.503 Maintenance timer in 100h increments. Pr.503 is clamped at 9998 (999800h). Pr. 516 to 519 Y93 signal 1) Data output mask time When the speed has changed to constant from acceleration/deceleration, Y93 signal is not output for Pr.556 time. 2) Start pulse Output as Hi pulse shape for 1s (fixed) Time and output current set in Pr.555 are averaged 3) Output current average value pulse The averaged current value is output as low pulse shape for 0.5 to 9s (10 to 180%) during start bit output. output current average value (A) 5s Signal output time= Pr.557 (A) Pr. 563, 564 Set "0" in Pr.503 Refer to the section about Pr.29. When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions. Time Next cycle 5) End pulse output as low pulse shape for 1 to 16.5s 4) Maintenance timer pulse The maintenance timer value (Pr.503) is output as Hi output pulse shape for 2 to 9s (16000h to 72000h). Pr.503 100h 5s Signal output time= 40000h Refer to the section about Pr.52. Pr. 569 Refer to the section about Pr.80. Pr. 571 Refer to the section about Pr.13. Pr. 575 to 577 Refer to the section about Pr.127. Pr. 611 Refer to the section about Pr.57. Pr. 665 Refer to the section about Pr.882. Pr. 684 Refer to the section about Pr.82. Pr. 800 Refer to the section about Pr.80. Pr. 802 Refer to the section about Pr.10. Pr. 803 Refer to the section about Pr.22. Peripheral Devices Standard Specifications Outline Dimension Drawings (E.USB) is displayed. 548 Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation Set the communication check time interval of USB communication. If data is not received within the time set in Pr.548, Operation Panel Set the station number of USB device (inverter) within the range "0 to 31". 1 to 31 Parameter List 0 (initial value) Explanations of Parameters 547 Description Protective Functions Setting Range 0 to 999.8 Pr. 426, 427 Pr. 453, 454 Pr. Number Options Make adjustment of Pr.422 when any of such phenomena as unusual vibration, noise and overcurrent of the motor/machine occurs. Increasing the setting improves trackability for the position command and also improves servo rigidity at a stop, but oppositely makes an overshoot and vibration more liable to occur. Function of Pr.423 is designed to cancel a delay caused by the droop pulses of the deviation counter. Primary delay filter relative to the feed forward command can be input in Pr.425. Inverter setup with setup software (FR-Configurator) can be easily performed by USB communication. When performing parameter setting with setup software, set "3" in Pr.551PU mode operation command source selection. Instructions Pr.423 Position feed forward gain Pr.547 USB communication station number Pr.548 USB communication check time interval Pr.551 PU mode operation command source selection Motor Pr.422 Position loop gain Pr.425 Position feed forward command filter Inverter setup using USB communication Compatibility Vector Warranty Gain adjustment of position control Features Pr. 547, 548, 551 Inquiry Pr. 422, 423, 425 68 Pr. 804 to 806 Pr. 807 to 809 Torque command source selection Sensorless Pr.804 Torque command source selection Pr.806 Torque command value (RAM,EEPROM) Pr.805 Torque command value (RAM) When you selected torque control, you can choose the torque command. Pr. Number Setting Range 0 (initial value) 1 3 804 4 5 6 805 806 600 to 1400% 600 to 1400% Speed limit during torque control Sensorless Vector Description Pr.807 Speed limit selection Pr.809 Reverse rotation speed limit Select the speed limit input method using Pr.807 . Pr.807 Setting Torque command by parameter Pr.805 or Pr.806 setting (-400% to 400%) Torque command by CC-Link communication (FRA7NC) Refer to the instruction manual of the option "FRA7NC (option)" for details. Digital input from the option (FR-A7AX) Refer to the instruction manual of "FR-A7AX (option)" for details. Torque command by CC-Link communication (FRA7NC) Refer to the instruction manual of the option "FRA7NC (option)" for details. 0 (initial value) Torque command by terminal1 analog input The torque command value for the analog input of the terminal 1 varies with C16, C17(Pr.919), C18, C19 (Pr.920) as shown below. Torque command value Pr.808 Forward rotation speed limit When you selected torque control, set the speed limit value to prevent the load torque from becoming less than the torque command value, resulting in motor overspeed. Torque command by terminal 1 analog input Digital setting of the torque command can be made by setting Pr.805 (RAM) or Pr.806 (RAM, EEPROM). (Setting from communication option, etc. can be made.) In this case, set the speed limit value to an appropriate value to prevent overspeed. Vector Description Use the speed command value during speed control as speed limit. 1 According to Pr.808 and Pr.809, set the speed limit in forward and reverse rotation directions individually. When the reverse rotation speed limit is 9999, the setting is the same as that of the torque limit in forward rotation direction. 2 The analog voltage of the terminal 1 input is used to make speed limit. For 0 to 10V input, set the forward rotation speed limit. (The reverse rotation speed limit is Pr.1 Maximum frequency ) For -10 to 0V input, set the reverse rotation speed limit. (The forward rotation speed limit is Pr.1 Maximum frequency .) The maximum frequency of both the forward and reverse rotations is Pr.1 Maximum frequency. Speed Speed limit value Pr. 7 Pr. 8 * * * Speed Time STF (Forward rotation command) Speed limit operation (Speed control) OL Torque control operation Speed limit operation (Speed control) Torque Speed limit control operation operation (Speed control) ON ON ON *When the speed limit activates, torque according to the commanded is not developed. C16 (Pr.920) Pr. 810, 812 to 817 C18 (Pr.919) Analog input (terminal 1) C19 (Pr.919) Torque command by parameter The relationship between the Pr.805 or Pr.806 setting and actual torque command value at this time is shown below. On the assumption that 1000% is 0%, the torque command is indicated by an offset from 1000%. Torque command value 400% Pr.805,Pr.806 settings 1000% -400% Pr. 818, 819 Easy gain tuning selection C17 (Pr.920) 600% Refer to the section about Pr.22. 1400% Torque command value =Pr.805(or Pr.806)-1000% Sensorless Pr.818 Easy gain tuning response level setting Pr.819 Easy gain tuning selection The ratio of the load inertia to the motor inertia (load inertia moment ratio) is estimated in real time from the torque command and speed during motor operation to automatically set gain (Pr.422, Pr.820, Pr.821, Pr.828) for each control from that ratio and response level setting (Pr.818). Manually input the load inertia ratio during real sensorless vector control. Time and effort of making gain adjustment can be reduced. Set the response level for finding each control gain from the load inertia ratio. Pr.818 Setting Range Description 1: Slow response 1 to 15 ↓ 15: Fast response Valid/invalid of easy gain tuning can be selected. Pr.819 Setting Range 69 When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions. Vector Description 0 No tuning 1 With load estimation (only under vector control) 2 With tuning (manual load input) Refer to the section about Pr.74. Speed detection filter function Vector Pr.833 Speed detection filter 2 Set the time constant of the primary delay filter relative to the speed feedback signal. Since this function reduces the speed loop response, use it with the initial value. Set the time constant when speed ripples occur due to harmonic disturbance. Note that a too large value will run the motor unstably. Pr. 824, 834 Current loop proportional gain setting Sensorless Vector Pr.834 Torque control P gain 2 Set the current loop integral compensation time for real sensorless vector control or vector control. A small value enhances the torque response level, but a too small value will cause current fluctuation. Pr. 825, 835 Current control integral time setting Sensorless Vector Pr.835 Torque control integral time 2 Set the proportional gain of the speed loop. Increasing the gain enhances the speed response level and decreases the speed fluctuation relative to disturbance, but a too large gain will produce vibration and/or sound. The setting range of Pr.820 Speed control P gain 1 and Pr.830 Speed control P gain 2 is 0 to 1000% and the initial value is 60%. For general adjustment, set them within the range of 20 to 200%. When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions. 0 (initial value) 1 2 (1) Speed feed forward control ⋅ Calculate required torque in responce to the acceleration/ deceleration command for the inertia ratio set in Pr.880 and generate torque immediately. ⋅ When inertia ratio estimation has been made by easy gain tuning, the inertia ratio estimation result becomes the Pr.880 setting value from which speed feed forward is computed. ⋅ When the speed feed forward gain is 100%, the calculation result of the speed feed forward is reflected as-is. ⋅ If the speed command changes suddenly, large torque is generated due to the speed feed forward calculation. The maximum value of the speed feed forward is limitted using Pr.879. ⋅ Using Pr.878, the speed feed forward result can be dulled by the primary delay filter. (2) Model adaptive speed control ⋅ The motor's model speed is calculated to feed back the model side speed controller. This model speed is also used as the actual speed controller command. ⋅ The inertia ratio in Pr. 880 is used for calculation of the torque current command value given by the model side speed controller. When inertia ratio estimation has been made by easy gain tuning, Pr. 880 is overwritten by the inertia ratio estimation result, and that value is used to calculate the torque current command value. ⋅ The torque current command value of the model side speed controller is added to the output of the actual speed controller, and the result is used as the iq current control input. ⋅ Pr.828 is used for model side speed control (P control), and the first gain in Pr. 820 is used for the actual speed controller. The model adaptive speed control is valid for the first motor only. ⋅ When Pr.877 = 2, switching to the second motor handles the second motor as Pr.877 = 0. Outline Dimension Drawings Standard Specifications Peripheral Devices Features Description Normal speed control is exercised. Speed feed forward control is exercised. Model adaptive speed control is enabled. Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation By making parameter setting, select the speed feed forward control or model adaptive speed control. The speed feed forward control enhances the trackability of the motor in response to a speed command change. The model adaptive speed control enables individual adjustment of speed trackability and motor disturbance torque response. Operation Panel Pr.828 Model speed control gain Pr.877 Speed feed forward control/model adaptive speed control selection Pr.878 Speed feed forward filter Pr.879 Speed feed forward torque limit Pr.880 Load inertia ratio Pr.881 Speed feed forward gain Pr.877 Setting Pr. 823, 833 Pr.825 Torque control integral time 1 Speed feed forward control, model adaptive speed control Sensorless Vector Parameter List Vector Pr.831 Speed control integral time 2 Set the integral compensation time of the speed loop. If speed fluctuation occurs relative to disturbance, decreasing the value shortens the recovery time, but a too small value will cause a speed overshoot. A large value improves stability but increases the recovery time (response time) and may cause an undershoot. Pr.824 Torque control P gain 1 Set the time constant of the primary delay filter relative to the torque feedback signal. Since the current loop response reduces, use it with the initial value. Explanations of Parameters Sensorless Pr.823 Speed detection filter 1 Pr.837 Torque detection filter 2 Protective Functions Speed control integral time setting Pr. 822 Pr.827 Torque detection filter 1 Vector Pr. 828, 877 to 881 Pr. 821, 831 Pr.821 Speed control integral time 1 Sensorless Options Set the proportional gain of the speed loop. Increasing the gain enhances the speed response level and decreases the speed fluctuation relative to disturbance, but a too large gain will produce vibration and/or sound. The setting range of Pr.820 Speed control P gain 1 and Pr.830 Speed control P gain 2 is 0 to 1000% and the initial value is 60%. For general adjustment, set them within the range 20 to 200%. Torque detection filter function Instructions Pr.830 Speed control P gain 2 Pr. 827, 837 Motor Pr.820 Speed control P gain 1 Vector Compatibility Sensorless Warranty Speed loop proportional gain setting Refer to the section about Pr.74. Inquiry Pr. 826 Pr. 820, 830 70 Pr. 830 Refer to the section about Pr.820. Pr. 831 Refer to the section about Pr.821. Pr. 832 Refer to the section about Pr.74. Pr. 833 Refer to the section about Pr.823. Pr. 834 Refer to the section about Pr.824. Pr. 835 Refer to the section about Pr.825. Pr. 836 Refer to the section about Pr.74. Pr. 837 Refer to the section about Pr.827. Pr. 854 Excitation ratio Pr.840 Torque bias selection Pr.842 Torque bias 2 Pr.844 Torque bias filter Pr.846 Torque bias balance compensation Pr.848 Fall-time torque bias terminal 1 gain Excitation ratio [%] 100 (Initial value) Pr.854 setting Vector Pr.841 Torque bias 1 Pr.843 Torque bias 3 Pr.845 Torque bias operation time Pr.847 Fall-time torque bias terminal 1 bias This function accelerates the rise of the torque at a start. Adjust the torque at a motor start using the contact signals or analog signals. Pr.840 Setting Description 0 Set the contact signal (X42, X43) based-torque bias amount using Pr.841 to Pr.843. 1 Set the terminal 1-based torque bias amount as desired in C16 to C19. (forward rotation) 2 Set the terminal 1-based torque bias amount as desired in C16 to C19. (reverse rotation) 3 The terminal 1-based torque bias amount can be set automatically in C16 to C19, Pr.846 according to the load. 9999 (initial value) Vector Decrease the excitation ratio when you want to improve efficiency under light load. (motor magnetic noise decreases) Note that the rise of output torque becomes slow if excitation ratio is decreased. This function is appropriate for applications as machine tools which repeat rapid acceleration/deceleration up to high speed. Pr. 840 to 848 Torque bias function Sensorless Pr.854 Excitation ratio Without torque bias, rated torque 100% Pr.841 Torque bias 1, Pr.842 Torque bias 2, Pr.843 Torque bias 3 On the assumption that the rated torque is 100%, the torque bias setting of 1000% is the center value of torque and the bias value is "0". Pr.844 Torque bias filter You can make a torque rise gentler. At this time, the torque rises according to the time constant of the primary delay filter. Pr.845 Torque bias operation time Set the time for output torque be maintained with the torque bias command value alone. Pr.846 Torque bias balance compensation Set the voltage of the torque bias analog input value input to the terminal 1 to compensate for the balance of the torque bias amount. Pr.847 Fall-time torque bias terminal 1 bias Set the torque bias amount at a fall time (when the motor runs in the reverse rotation direction). Pr.848 Fall-time torque bias terminal 1 gain Set the torque bias amount at a fall time. Pr. 849 Refer to the section about Pr.74. Pr. 850 Refer to the section about Pr.10. Pr. 853 Refer to the section about Pr.285. 0 100 Load[%] Pr. 858, 868 Function assignment of analog input terminal Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment Pr.868 Terminal 1 function assignment Function assignment of terminal 1 and terminal 4 of analog input can be selected and changed by parameter. Terminal 1 function according to control Pr.868 Setting V/F Control Magnetic Flux Vector Control Real Sensorless Vector Control /Vector Control Speed control Torque control Position control* 0 (initial value) Frequency setting auxiliary Speed setting auxiliary Speed limit auxiliary 1 — Magnetic flux command 2 — Magnetic flux command Regenerative torque limit (Pr.810 = 1) 3 — — Torque command (Pr.804 = 0) — 4 Stall prevention operation level input (Pr.810 = 1) Torque limit (Pr.810 = 1) Torque command (Pr.804 = 0) Torque limit (Pr.810 = 1) 5 — — Forward/ reverse rotation speed limit — 6 — — — 9999 — — — — Torque bias input (Pr.840 =1,2,3) — — Magnetic flux command Regenerative torque limit (Pr.810 = 1) * Position control is valid only during vector control Terminal 4 function according to control Pr.858 Setting V/F Control Magnetic Flux Vector Control Real Sensorless Vector Control /vector Control Speed control Torque control Position control* 0 (initial value) Frequency command (AU signal-ON) 1 — Speed command (AU signal-ON) Magnetic flux command 4 9999 Stall prevention operation level input (Pr.810 = 1) — Speed limit (AU signal-ON) — Magnetic flux command Magnetic flux command Torque limit (Pr.810 = 1) — Torque limit (Pr.810 = 1) — — — * Position control is valid only during vector control :No function Pr. 859, 860 71 When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions. Refer to the section about Pr.82. Pr. 875 Pr.875 Fault definition 20 21 22 50 47.6 45.5 31 32 32.3 76.9 71.4 66.7 23 24 43.5 41.7 33 31.3 19 62.5 58.8 55.6 25 26 27 28 29 40 38.5 37 35.7 34.5 34 35 36 37 38 39 30.3 29.4 28.6 27.8 27.0 26.3 25.6 Minor fault output 2 (ER) 52.6 Setting 40 Frequency 25.0 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 24.4 23.8 23.3 22.7 22.2 21.7 21.3 20.8 20.4 Setting 50 Frequency 20.0 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 19.6 19.2 18.9 18.5 18.2 17.9 17.5 17.2 16.9 Operation Description 0 (initial value) Normal operation At occurrence of any alarm, the base circuit is shut off immediately. At this time, the alarm output also turns on. Fault definition At occurrence of external thermal operation (OHT), electronic thermal relay function (THM) or PTC thermister function (PTC) alarm, the motor is decelerated to a stop and the base circuit is shut off. At occurrence of an alarm other than OHT, THM and PTC, the base circuit is shut off immediately. Same operation as when "0" is set is performed under position control. 1 Pr. 877 to 881 Pr.863 Notch filter depth 0 1 2 3 Depth Deep ← → Sharrow Gain -40dB -14dB -8dB -4dB Refer to the section about Pr.828. Pr. 882 to 886, 665 Regeneration avoidance function Pr.882 Regeneration avoidance operation selection Pr.883 Regeneration avoidance operation level Pr.884 Regeneration avoidance at deceleration detection sensitivity Pr.885 Regeneration avoidance compensation frequency limit value Pr.886 Regeneration avoidance voltage gain Pr.665 Regeneration avoidance frequency gain Pr. 864 Magnetic flux Sensorless This function detects a regeneration status and increases the frequency to avoid the regeneration status. Vector Pr.864 Torque detection The signal turns on when the output torque rises to or above the detection torque value set in Pr.864. It turns off when the torque falls below the detection torque value. Output torque (%) This function outputs a signal if the motor torque rises to or above the Pr.864 setting. The signal is used as operation and open signal for an electromagnetic brake. Pr. Number Setting Range Description 0 (initial value) 882 ON Regeneration avoidance function is always valid 2 Regeneraiton avoidance funcion is valid only during a constant speed operation 300 to 800V OFF Set the bus voltage level at which regeneration avoidance operates. When the bus voltage level is set to low, overvoltage error will be less apt to occur. However, the actual deceleration time increases. The set value must be higher than the "power supply voltage × Pr. 865 Refer to the section about Pr.41. Pr. 866 Refer to the section about Pr.55. Pr. 867 Refer to the section about Pr.52. Pr. 868 Refer to the section about Pr.858. Pr. 872 Refer to the section about Pr.251. Pr. 873 Speed limit during speed control 883 Regeneration avoidance function invalid 1 Pr.864 Time TU Possible to avoid regeneration by automatically increasing the frequency and continue operation if the fan happens to rotate faster than the set speed due to the effect of another fan in the same duct. Vector Pr.873 Speed limit Frequency is limited at the set frequency + Pr.873 during vector control. Refer to the section about Pr.22. When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions. 0 (initial value) 1 to 5 885 2 ". Regeneration avoidance by bus voltage change ratio is invalid Set sensitivity to detect the bus voltage change ratio. Setting 1 5 Detection sensitivity low high 884 0 to 10Hz 9999 Set the limit value of frequency which rises at activation of regeneration avoidance function. Frequency limit invalid 886 0 to 200% 665 0 to 200% Adjust responsiveness at activation of regeneration avoidance. A larger setting will improve responsiveness to the bus voltage change. However, the output frequency could become unstable. When the load inertia of the motor is large, decrease the Pr. 886 setting.When vibration is not suppressed by decreasing the Pr.886 setting, set a smaller value in Pr.665. Regeneration avoidance operation example for deceleration Output Bus voltage frequency(Hz) (VDC) Torque detection Pr. 874 E.OHT display Pr.875 Setting Setting 60 Frequency 16.7 Setting ON OHT occurrence Peripheral Devices 18 ON Standard Specifications Setting Frequency 83.3 17 Alarm output (ALM, ALM2) shut off. Outline Dimension Drawings 90.9 16 and the base circuit is Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation 15 9 111.1 Operation Panel 14 8 125 Parameter List 13 7 Explanations of Parameters 12 6 166.7 142.9 decelerates to a stop Protective Functions 5 200 Output speed activated, the motor Options 4 250 When Pr.875 = "1" thermal function is Instructions 3 333.3 Setting 10 Frequency 100 Setting 30 Frequency 33.3 11 2 500 When the electronic Motor You can reduce the response level of speed control in the resonance frequency band of the mechanical system to avoid mechanical resonance. Pr.862 Notch filter time constant Setting 0 1 Frequency Invalid 1000 Features Fault definition Vector Pr.863 Notch filter depth Compatibility Sensorless Pr.862 Notch filter time constant Warranty Notch filter Pr.883 Time During regeneration avoidance function operation Inquiry Pr. 862, 863 Time 72 ⋅ The following shows the items which can be monitored by the cumulative saving power monitor (Pr.52 = "51"). Pr. 888, 889 (The cumulative power monitor data digit can be shifted to the right by the Free parameter number set inPr. 891 Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times.) Pr.888 Free parameter 1 Pr.889 Free parameter 2 Parameters you can use for your own purposes. You can input any number within the setting range 0 to 9999. For example, the number can be used: ⋅ As a unit number when multiple units are used. ⋅ As a pattern number for each operation application when multiple units are used. ⋅ As the year and month of introduction or inspection. Pr. 891 Refer to the section about Pr.52. Energy saving monitor Pr.892 Load factor Pr.893 Energy saving monitor reference (motor capacity) Pr.894 Control selection during commercial power-supply operation Pr.895 Power saving rate reference value Pr.896 Power unit cost Pr.897 Power saving monitor average time Pr.898 Power saving cumulative monitor clear Pr.899 Operation time rate (estimated value) From the power consumption estimated value during commercial power supply operation, the energy saving effect by use of the inverter can be monitored/output. ⋅ The following provides the items that can be monitored by the power saving monitor (Pr.52, Pr.54, Pr.158 ="50") (Only power saving and power saving average value can be output to Pr.54 (terminal FM) and Pr.158 (terminal AM)) Description and Formula Difference between the estimated value of power necessary for commercial power supply operation and Power savings the input power calculated by the inverter Power during commercial power supply operation input power monitor Ratio of power saving on the assumption that power during commercial power supply operation is 100% Power saving rate Power savings Power during commercial power supply ×100 Ratio of power saving on the assumption that Pr.893 is 100% Power savings Pr.893 Power savings average value Increments 0.01kW /0.1kW* 0.01kWh/ Power saving amount Pr.899 × 24 × 365 × Operation time during 100 0.1kWh* 0.01/0.1* * The increments differ according to the inverter capacity. (55K or less/75K or more) Pr. C0(900), C1(901) Adjustment of terminal FM and AM output (calibration) C0 (Pr.900) FM terminal calibration C1 (Pr.901) AM terminal calibration By using the operation panel or parameter unit, you can calibrate terminal FM and terminal AM to full scale deflection. (1) FM terminal calibration (C0 (Pr.900)) ⋅ The terminal FM is preset to output pulses. By setting the calibration parameter C0 (Pr.900), the meter connected to the inverter can be calibrated by parameter setting without use of a calibration resistor. ⋅ Using the pulse train output of the terminal FM, a digital display can be provided by a digital counter. The monitor value is 1440 pulses/s output at the full-scale value of Pr.54 FM terminal function selection. Indicator 1mA full-scale analog meter (Digital indicator) 1mA FM (+) Calibration resistor*1 T1 (-) FM 1440 pulses/s(+) (-) 8VDC SD Pulse width T1: Adjust using calibration parameter C0 Pulse cycle T2: Set with Pr. 55 (frequency monitor) Set with Pr.56 (current monitor) 0.01kWh /0.1kWh* Pr.897 Power saving charge average value 0.01/0.1* T2 Σ (Power saving × ∆t ) ×100 Not needed when the operation panel (FR-DU07) or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FRPU07) is used for calibration. Used when calibration must be made near the frequency meter for such a reason as a remote frequency meter. However, the frequency meter needle may not deflect to full-scale if the calibration resistor is connected. In this case, use this resistor and operation panel or parameter unit together. using Pr.291 Pulse train I/O selection , pulse train output can not be calibrated using Pr.900 . (2)AM terminal calibration (C1 (Pr.901)) ×100 Power saving average value represented in terms of charge Power saving average value × Pr.896 *1 ⋅ When the FM terminal is set to the open collector output 0.1% Ratio of power saving average value on the assumption that Pr.893 is 100% Energy saving average Pr.893 0.1kWh* Estimated value of annual power saving amount SD Average value of power saving amount per hour during predetermined time (Pr.897) Pr.897 0.01kWh/ Annual power Annual power saving amount represented in terms saving of charge amount Annual power saving amount × Pr.896 charge ×100 Σ (Power saving rate × ∆t ) Increments Power saving Power saving average value represented in terms of charge amount charge Power saving amount × Pr.896 0.1% Ratio of power saving average value on the assumption that the value during commercial power supply operation is 100% Power saving rate average value Description and Formula Power saving Power saving is added up per hour amount Σ(Power saving × ∆t) Annual power saving amount Pr. 892 to 899 Energy Saving Monitor Item Energy Saving Monitor Item ⋅ The AM terminal is factory-set to output 10VDC in the full0.01/0.1* scale state of each monitor item. By setting the AM terminal calibration C1(Pr.901) , the ratio (gain) of the output voltage can be adjusted to the meter scale. Note that the maximum output voltage is 10VDC. Pr. C2(902) to C7(905), C12(917) to C19(920), C38(932) to C41(933) Refer to the section about Pr.125. 73 When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions. Parameter clear, parameter copy Buzzer control of the operation panel Pr.990 PU buzzer control Pr.989 setting 55K or less 75K or more 10 100 Pr.990 Setting 1 (initial value) Description Without buzzer With buzzer PU contrast adjustment Pr.991 PU contrast adjustment Contrast adjustment of the LCD of the parameter unit (FR-PU04/ FR-PU07) can be performed. Decreasing the setting value makes contrast light. Description 0 to 63 0 Cancel 1 Copy the source parameters to the operation panel. 2 Write the parameters copied to the operation panel to the destination inverter. 3 Verify parameters in the inverter and operation panel. Description 0: Light ↓ 63: Dark Inquiry Warranty Compatibility Motor Instructions Options Protective Functions Explanations of Parameters * Parameters are not cleared when "1" is set in Pr.77 Parameter write selection. Outline Dimension Drawings Pr. 991 Pr.991 Setting PCPY Setting Standard Specifications 0 Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation Set "1" in Pr.CL Parameter clear to initialize all parameters. (Calibration parameters are not cleared.)* Set "1" in ALLC All parameter clear to initialize all parameters.* Set "1" in Er.CL Alarm history clear to clear alarm history.* Parameter settings can be copied to multiple inverters by using PCPY. When parameters are copied to the 75K or more inverter from the 55K or less inverter or vice versa, an alarm appears on the operation panel. For the parameters whose setting range differ, set Pr.989 as below after reset. You can make the buzzer "beep" when you press key of the operation panel (FR-DU07) and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FRPU07) Operation Panel ALLC All parameter clear PCPY Parameter copy Parameter List Pr.989 Parameter copy alarm release Pr.CL Parameter clear Er.CL Alarm history clear Features Pr. 990 Peripheral Devices Pr. 989, CL, ALLC, Er.CL, PCPY When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (applied) and understand instructions. 74 Protective Functions When an alarm occurs in the inverter, the protective function is activated bringing the inverter to an alarm stop and the PU display automatically changes to any of the following error (alarm) indications. Operation panel lock Appears when operation was tried during operation panel lock. Parameter write error Appears when an error occurred during parameter writing. Copy operation error Appears when an error occurred during parameter copying. Error Appears when the RES signal is on or the PU and inverter can not make normal communication. Stall prevention (overcurrent) Stall prevention (overvoltage) *3 Regenerative brake prealarm Warnings Description Appears during overcurrent stall prevention. Appears during overvoltage stall prevention. Appears while the regeneration avoidance function is activated. Appears if the regenerative brake duty reaches or exceeds 85% of the Pr.70 Special regenerative brake duty value. If the regenerative brake duty reaches 100%, a regenerative overvoltage (E. OV_) occurs. Electronic thermal relay function prealarm Appears when the electronic thermal O/L relay has reached 85% of the specified value. PU stop Appears when Maintenance signal output Appears when the cumulative energization time has exceeded the maintenance output timer set value. Parameter copy Appears when parameters are copied between models with capacities of 55K or less and 75K or more. on the operation panel was pressed during external operation. *4 Major failures *5 Minor failure Speed limit display Display if the speed limit level is exceeded during torque control. (output during speed limit) Fan fault Overcurrent shutoff during acceleration Overcurrent shutoff during constant speed Overcurrent shut-off during deceleration or stop Regenerative overvoltage shut-off during acceleration Regenerative overvoltage shut-off during constant speed Regenerative overvoltage shutoff during deceleration or stop Inverter overload shut-off (Electronic thermal relay function) *1 Motor overload shut-off (Electronic thermal relay function) *1 Appears when the cooling fan remains stopped when operation is required or when the speed has decreased. Appears when an overcurrent occurred during acceleration. Appears when an overcurrent occurred during constant speed operation. Appears when an overcurrent occurred during deceleration and at a stop. Appears when an overvoltage occurred during acceleration. Appears when an overvoltage occurred during constant speed operation. Appears when an overvoltage occurred during deceleration and at a stop. Appears when the electronic thermal relay function for inverter element protection was activated. Appears when the electronic thermal relay function for motor protection was activated. Fin overheat Appears when the heatsink overheated. Instantaneous power failure protection Appears when an instantaneous power failure occurred at an input power supply. Undervoltage protection Appears when the main circuit DC voltage became low. Input phase failure Appears if one of the three phases on the inverter input side opened. Stall prevention Brake transistor alarm detection Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent protection Output phase failure protection External thermal relay operation *6 PTC thermistor operation 75 Display to *2 Error Message Function Name Appears when the output frequency drops to 0.5Hz as a result of deceleration due to the excess motor load. This function stops the inverter output if an alarm occurs in the brake circuit, e.g. damaged brake transistors. In this case, the inverter must be powered off immediately. Appears when an earth (ground) fault occurred on the Inverter’s output side. Appears if one of the three phases on the inverter output side opened. Appears when the external thermal relay connected to the terminal OH is activated. Appears when the motor overheat status is detected for 10s or more by the external PTC thermistor input connected to the terminal AU. to Retry count excess Appears when the operation was not restarted within the set number of retries. Parameter storage device alarm Appears when operation of the element where parameters stored became abnormal. (main circuit board) CPU error Appears during the CPU and peripheral circuit errors occurred. Features Appears when terminals PC-SD were shorted. Indicates that the motor speed has exceeded the overspeed setting level (Pr.374). Speed deviation excess detection *7 Stops the inverter output if the motor speed is increased or decreased under the influence of the load etc. during vector control and cannot be controlled in accordance with the speed command value. Open cable detection *7 Stops the inverter output if the encoder signal is shut off. Position error large *7 Indicates that the difference between the position command and position feedback exceeded the reference. Brake sequence error The inverter output is stopped when a sequence error occurs during use of the brake sequence function (Pr.278 to Pr.285). Encoder phase error *7 When the rotation command of the inverter differs from the actual motor rotation direction detected from the encoder, the inverter output is stopped. (detected only during tuning is performed in the "rotation mode" of offline auto tuning) Internal circuit error Appears when an internal circuit error occurred. USB error Appears when USB communication error occurred. Opposite rotation deceleration alarm The speed may not decelerate during low speed operation if the rotation direction of the speed command and the estimated speed differ when the rotation is changing from forward to reverse or from reverse to forward under real sensorless vector control. At this time, the inverter output is stopped if the rotation direction will not change, causing overload. *1. Resetting the inverter initializes the internal thermal integrated data of the electronic thermal relay function. *2. *3. The error message shows an operational error. The inverter output is not shut off. Warnings are messages given before major failures occur. The inverter output is not shut off. *4. *5. Minor failure warns the operator of failures with output signals. The inverter output is not shut off. When major failures occur, the protective functions are activated to shut off the inverter output and output the alarms. *6. *7. The external thermal operates only when the OH signal is set in Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection). Appears when the FR-A7AP (option) is fitted. Explanations of Parameters Overspeed occurrence *7 Protective Functions Appears when a communication error occurred during the RS-485 communication with the RS485 terminals. Appears when 30mA or more is input or a voltage (7.5V or more) is input with the terminal 2/4 set to current input. to Options Communication alarm (inverter) Instructions Appears when the resistor of the inrush current limit circuit overheated. Parameter List Appears when output current exceeded the output current detection level set by the parameter. Inrush resistor overheat Analog input error Operation Panel Appears when the RS-485 terminal power supply or operation panel power supply was shorted. Motor Operation panel power supply short circuit RS-485 terminals power supply short circuit 24VDC power output short circuit Output current detection value excess / / Compatibility *5 PU disconnection to Warranty Parameter storage device alarm Appears if a contact fault or the like of the connector between the inverter and communication option occurs or if a communication option is fitted to the connector 1 or 2. (1 to 3 indicate connector numbers for connection of the plug-in option . Appears when operation of the element where parameters stored became abnormal. (control board) Appears when a communication error between the PU and inverter occurred, the communication interval exceeded the permissible time during the RS-485 communication with the PU connecter, or communication errors exceeded the number of retries during the RS-485 communication. Peripheral Devices Appears when a communication line error occurs in the communication option. Standard Specifications Communication option alarm Outline Dimension Drawings Appears when torque command by the plug-in option is selected using Pr. 804 when no plug-in option is mounted or an AC power supply is connected to the R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 when the high power factor converter and power regeneration common converter connection setting (Pr.30 =2) is selected. Display Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation Option alarm Option alarm Major failures Description Inquiry Function Name 76 Option and Peripheral Devices Option List By fitting the following options to the inverter, the inverter is provided with more functions. Three plug-in options can be fitted at a time. (more than two same options and communication options can not be fitted) Name Type Vector control Orientation/encoder Plug-in Type 16-bit digital input Applications, Specifications, etc. FR-A7AP FR-A7AX The main spindle can be stopped at a fixed position (orientation) in combination with a pulse encoder.The motor speed is sent back and the speed is maintained constant. ⋅ This input interface sets the high frequency accuracy of the inverter using an external BCD or binary digital signal. ⋅ BCD code 3 digits (maximum 999) ⋅ BCD code 4 digits (maximum 9999) ⋅ Binary 12 bits (maximum FFFH) ⋅ Binary 16 bits (maximum FFFFH) ⋅ Output signals provided with the inverter as standard are selected to output from the open collector. Digital output Extension analog output Applicable Inverter Vector control with encoder can be performed. FR-A7AY Shared among all models ⋅ This option adds 2 different signals that can be monitored at the terminals AM0 and AM1, such as the output frequency, output voltage and output current. ⋅ 20mADC or 10VDC meter can be connected. Relay output FR-A7NC LONWORKS communication FR-A7NL DeviceNet communication FR-A7ND ⋅ This option allows the inverter to be operated or monitored or the parameter setting to be changed from a computer or PLC. PROFIBUS-DP communication FR-A7NP *For the FR-A7NC (CC-Link), the above operations can be done from the PLC only. Parameter unit (8 languages) FR-PU07 FR-PU04 Interactive parameter unit with LCD display Parameter unit connection cable FR-CB20 Communication Stand-alone Shared ⋅ Output any three output signals available with the inverter as standard from the relay contact terminals. CC-Link communication Operation panel connection connector Cable for encoder Cable for connection of operation panel or parameter unit indicates a cable length. (1m, 3m, 5m) Shared among all models FR-ADP Connector to connect the operation panel (FR-DU07) and connection cable Mitsubishi vector control dedicated motor (SF-V5RU) FR-V7CBL Connection cable for the inverter and encoder for Mitsubishi vector control dedicated motor (SF-V5RU). indicates a cable length. (1m, 3m, 5m) Heatsink protrusion attachment FR-A7CN01 to 11 The inverter heatsink section can be protruded outside of the rear of the enclosure. For a panel cut dimension drawing, refer to page 19. FR-A720-1.5K to 90K FR-A740-0.4K to 132K According to capacities FR-AAT24 Attachment for replacing with the A700 series using the installation holes of the FR-A500 series. FR-A740-11K, 15K FR-A5AT Attachment for replacing with the FR-A700 series using the installation holes of the FR-A100<Excellent> and FR-A200<Excellent> According to capacities AC reactor FR-HAL For harmonic suppression measures and improvement of inverter input power factor (total power factor approx. 88%) According to capacities DC reactor FR-HEL For harmonic suppression measures and improvement of inverter input power factor (total power factor approx. 93%) Compatible with the 55K or less Line noise filter FR-BSF01 FR- BLF For line noise reduction Shared among all models High-duty brake resistor FR-ABR For improvement of braking capability of the built-in brake of the inverter Compatible with the 22K or less BU type brake unit BU For increasing the braking capability of the inverter (for high-inertia load or negative load) Compatible with the 55K or less Intercompatibility attachment Brake unit Resistor unit 77 FR-A7AR FR-BU FR-BR MT-BU5 MT-BR5 For increasing the braking capability of the inverter (for high-inertia load or negative load) Brake unit and resistor unit are used in combination Compatible with the 55K or less Compatible with the 75K or more Energy saving type high performance brake unit which can regenerate the braking energy generated by the motor to the power supply. Compatible with the 75K or more Filter for suppressing surge voltage on motor Compatible with the 400V class 55K or less Reactor MT- BSL (-HC) Capacitor MT- BSC Reduce the motor noise during inverter driving Use in combination with a reactor and a capacitor Compatible with the 75K or more FR-AL For synchronous operation (1.5VA) by external signal (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V DC) * Three speed selector FR-AT For three speed switching, among high, middle and low speed operation (1.5VA) * Motorized speed setter FR-FK For remote operation. Allows operation to be controlled from several places (5VA) * Ratio setter FR-FH For ratio operation. Allows ratios to be set to five inverters. (3VA)* Speed detector FR-FP For tracking operation by a pilot generator (PG) signal (3VA) * Master controller FR-FG Master controller (5VA) for parallel operation of multiple (maximum 35) inverters. * Soft starter FR-FC For soft start and stop. Enables acceleration/ deceleration in parallel operation (3VA) * Deviation detector FR-FD For continuous speed control operation. Used in combination with a deviation sensor or synchro (5VA) * Preamplifier FR-FA Used as an A/V converter or arithmetic amplifier (3VA) * Pilot generator QVAH-10 For tracking operation. 70V/35VAC 500Hz (at 2500r/ min) Deviation sensor YVGC-500W-NS For continuous speed control operation (mechanical deviation detection) Output 90VAC/90° Frequency setting potentiometer WA2W 1kΩ For frequency setting. Wire-wound 2W 1kΩ type B characteristic Frequency meter YM206NRI 1mA Dedicated frequency meter (graduated to 120Hz). Moving-coil type DC ammeter Calibration resistor RV24YN 10kΩ For frequency meter calibration. Carbon film type B characteristic Inverter setup software (FR Configurator) FR-SW2-SETUP-WE Supports an inverter startup to maintenance. Operation Panel DC tach. follower Parameter List For independent operation. With frequency meter, frequency potentiometer and start switch. Shared among all models Rated power consumption. The power supply specifications of the FR series manual controllers and speed controllers are 200VAC 50Hz, 220V/220VAC 60Hz, and 115VAC 60Hz. Explanations of Parameters FR-AX Protective Functions Manual controller Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation FR-ASF Options FR Series Manual Controller/Speed Controller Compatible with the 75K or more Instructions MT-HC Compatible with the 55K or less Motor High power factor converter The high power factor converter switches the converter section on/off to reshape an input current waveform into a sine wave, greatly suppressing harmonics. (Used in combination with the standard accessory.) Compatibility FR-HC Features MT- RC Peripheral Devices Power regeneration converter Standard Specifications Compatible with the 55K or less Outline Dimension Drawings Unit which can return motor-generated braking energy back to the power supply in common converter system Sine wave filter Others Applicable Inverter FR-CV FR-CVL Surge voltage suppression filter * Applications, Specifications, etc. Warranty Type Inquiry Stand-alone Shared Name Power regeneration common converter Stand-alone reactor dedicated for the FR-CV 78 Stand-alone Option Name (type) Specifications, Structure, etc. With this attachment the heatsink which is the exothermic section of the inverter can be placed on the rear of the enclosure. Since the heat generated in the inverter can be radiated to the rear of the enclosure, the enclosure can be downsized. The use of this attachment requires more installation area. For installation, refer to the drawing after attachment installation (page 19). For a panel cutting drawing, refer to page 19. FR-A740-0.4K to 3.7K FR-A740-5.5K, 7.5K FR-A740-11K, 15K FR-A740-18.5K, 22K — FR-A740-30K FR-A740-37K to 55K FR-A740-75K FR-A740-90K FR-A740-110K, 132K — Inverter Heatsink Cooling wind FR-A500 series intercompatibility attachment The FR-A700 series inverter can be installed using installation holes of the conventional FRA500 series with this attachment. This attachment is useful for replacing the conventional model with the FR-A700 series. *The depth increases after installation of the inverter when the attachment is used. Type FR-AAT24 Intercompatibility attachment FR-AAT24 Mountable Models A720 A740 Type A5AT03 A5AT04 A5AT05 Inverter FR-A5AT Inverter FR-A740-11K, 15K FR-A5AT A5AT02 FR-AAT Applicable Inverter FR-A200E/A100E series intercompatibility attachment The FR-A700 series inverter can be installed using installation holes of the conventional FR-A200E/A100E series with this attachment. This attachment is useful for replacing the conventional model with the FR-A700 series. *The depth increases after installation of the inverter when the attachment is used. A5AT01 Cooling fan 12 FR-A7CN FR-A720-1.5K to 3.7K FR-A720-5.5K, 7.5K FR-A720-11K FR-A720-15K to 22K FR-A720-30K — FR-A720-37K, 45K — — FR-A720-75K, 90K FR-A720-55K 12 FR-A7CN01 FR-A7CN02 FR-A7CN03 FR-A7CN04 FR-A7CN05 FR-A7CN06 FR-A7CN07 FR-A7CN08 FR-A7CN09 FR-A7CN10 FR-A7CN11 attachment FR-A7CN (Option) Applied Inverter 200V Class 400V Class Type Heatsink protrusion Enclosure Inside the enclosure Compatible Former Models A240E A120E A220E A140E 0.4K, 0.75K — 0.4K, 0.75K — 0.75K — 0.4K, 0.75K, 1.5K, 0.4K, 0.75K, 1.5K, 0.4K, 0.75K, 1.5K, 0.75K, 1.5K, 2.2K, 1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K 1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K 2.2K, 3.7K 2.2K, 3.7K 2.2K, 3.7K 3.7K 1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K, 0.4K, 0.75K, 1.5K, 5.5K, 7.5K, 11K 5.5K, 7.5K 5.5K, 7.5K, 11K 5.5K, 7.5K, 11K 5.5K, 7.5K 2.2K, 3.7K, 5.5K, 7.5K 11K, 15K, 18.5K, 22K 11K, 15K, 18.5K, 22K 18.5K, 22K 18.5K, 22K 22K 22K 37K, 45K 37K, 45K, 55K — 55K — 55K Outline dimension (Unit: mm) (for power coordination) FR-HAL-(H) 79 K 0.4K 0.75K 1.5K 2.2K 3.7K 5.5K 7.5K 11K 15K 18.5K 22K 30K 37K 45K 55K 75K 110K W D H Mass (kg) 104 104 104 115 115 115 130 160 160 160 185 185 210 210 210 240 330 72 74 77 77 83 83 100 111 126 175 158 168 174 191 201 213 258 99 99 99 115 115 115 135 164 167 128 150 150 175 175 175 210 325 0.6 0.8 1.1 1.5 2.2 2.3 4.2 5.2 7.0 7.1 9.0 9.7 12.9 16.4 17.4 23 40 Model 400V AC reactor 200V Model H0.4K H0.75K H1.5K H2.2K H3.7K H5.5K H7.5K H11K H15K H18.5K H22K H30K H37K H45K H55K H75K H110K H185K H280K H355K H560K W D H Mass (kg) 135 135 135 135 135 160 160 160 220 220 220 220 220 280 280 205 240 330 330 330 450 59.6 59.6 59.6 59.6 70.6 72 91 91 105 170 170 170 170 165 170 208 220 270 320 340 635 115 115 115 115 115 142 142 146 195 215 215 215 214 245 245 170 225 325 325 325 540 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 3.5 5.0 6.0 9.0 9.0 9.5 11 12.5 15 18 20 28 55 80 80 190 Less than D H W (Note)1. Make selection according to the applied motor capacity. (When the inverter capacity is larger than the motor capacity, make selection according to the motor capacity) 2. Power factor improving reactor (FRBAL) can be used. Power factor improving effect FR-BAL approx.90% FR-HAL approx.88% Name (type) Specifications, Structure, etc. Outline dimension H Peripheral Devices Less than D W Standard Specifications 0.6 0.8 1 1.3 2.3 3 3.5 4.5 5 5 6 6.5 8.5 10 11.5 (Note) 1. Be sure to remove the jumper across the inverter terminals P/+-P1. (A failure to do so will produce no power factor improving effect)) 2. The wiring length between the reactor and inverter should be within 5m. 3. The size of the cables used should be equal to or larger than that of the power supply cables (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3). 4. Make selection according to the motor capacity. (When the inverter capacity is larger than the motor capacity, make selection according to the motor capacity) 5. Power factor improving reactor (FR-BEL) can be used. Power factor improving effect FR-BEL approx.95% FR-HEL approx.93% 6. A DC reactor for the 75K or more is supplied with the inverter. FR-BLF MCCB 22.5 φ7 130 Line noise filter (Note) 1. Each phase should be wound at least 3 times (4T, 4 turns) in the same direction. (The greater the unmber of turns, the more effective result is obtained.) 2. When the thickness of the wire prevents winding, use at least 4 in series and ensure that the current passes through each phase in the same direction. 3. Can be used on the output side in the same way as the input side. 4. Please use FR-BSF01 for inverters with small capacities of 3.7K or less. Thick wires (38mm2 or more) can not be used. In such cases, use the FR-BLF. 80 FR-BSF01...for small 35 Line noise filter 65 33 160 180 4.5 65 2.3 capacities FR- BLF R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 7 2- φ5 Inverter Power supply 31.5 110 95 Parameter List Outline dimension FR-BSF01 Outline dimension (Unit: mm) 200V Brake Resistor Type High-duty brake resistor FR-ABR-(H) W1 D H ResisApprox tance Mass Value (kg) (Ω) FR-ABR-0.4K FR-ABR-0.75K 10% 10% 140 500 215 500 40 40 21 21 200 100 0.2 0.4 FR-ABR-2.2K*1 10% 240 500 50 26 60 0.5 FR-ABR-3.7K FR-ABR-5.5K FR-ABR-7.5K FR-ABR-11K 10% 10% 10% 6% 215 335 400 400 500 61 500 61 500 80 700 100 33 33 40 50 FR-ABR-15K*2 6% 300 700 100 50 FR-ABR-22K*3 6% 400 700 100 50 40 25 20 13 18 (×1/2) 13 (×1/2) 0.8 1.3 2.2 3.5 2.4 (×2) 3.3 (×2) Outline Dimension Brake Resistor Type 400V Outline Dimension Permissible Brake W Duty Permissible Brake W Duty W1 D H FR-ABR-H0.4K FR-ABR-H0.75K FR-ABR-H1.5K FR-ABR-H2.2K FR-ABR-H3.7K FR-ABR-H5.5K FR-ABR-H7.5K FR-ABR-H11K 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 6% 115 140 215 240 215 335 400 400 500 40 500 40 500 40 500 50 500 61 500 61 500 80 700 100 21 21 21 26 33 33 40 50 FR-ABR-H15K*4 6% 300 700 100 50 FR-ABR-H22K*5 6% 400 700 100 50 ResisApprox tance Mass Value (kg) (Ω) 1200 700 350 250 150 110 75 52 18 (×2) 52 (×1/2) 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.5 0.8 1.3 2.2 3.2 2.4 (×2) 3.3 (×2) *1. *2. *3. *4. For the 1.5K and 2.2K inverter. For the 15K brake resistor, configure so that two 18Ω resistors are connected in parallel. For the 22K brake resistor, configure so that two 13Ω resistors are connected in parallel. For the H15K brake resistor, configure so that two 18Ω resistors are connected in series. FR-ABR-15K is indicated on the resistor. (same resistor as the 200V class 15K) *5. For the H22K brake resistor, configure so that two 52Ω resistors are connected in parallel. D W1+10 0 W H Outline Dimension Drawings K 78 100 100 110 120 128 128 137 152 162 178 178 187 187 206 Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation FR-HEL-(H) 60 70 80 80 95 100 105 110 125 120 120 120 155 170 170 Operation Panel (for power coordination) 90 66 66 76 86 96 96 105 105 114 133 133 133 133 152 (Note) 1. When using the FR-ABR type brake resistor, remove the jumper across terminal PR-PX. Failure to remove will cause the brake resistor to overheat. 2.The regenerative brake duty setting should be less than permissible brake duty in the table above. 3.The temperature of the brake resistor becomes 300°C or more depending on the operation frequency, care must be taken for installation and heat dissipation. 4. MYS type resistor can be also used. Note the permissible brake duty. Explanations of Parameters DC reactor H0.4K H0.75K H1.5K H2.2K H3.7K H5.5K H7.5K H11K H15K H18.5K H22K H30K H37K H45K H55K Protective Functions 0.4 0.5 0.8 0.9 1.5 1.9 2.5 3.3 4.1 4.7 5.6 7.8 10 11 12.6 Mass (kg) Options 71 81 81 81 92 92 113 133 133 93 93 100 117 117 132 H Instructions 61 61 70 70 82 92 98 112 115 165 175 200 195 205 209 D Motor 70 85 85 85 77 77 86 105 105 105 105 114 133 133 153 W Compatibility 200V 0.4K 0.75K 1.5K 2.2K 3.7K 5.5K 7.5K 11K 15K 18.5K 22K 30K 37K 45K 55K Model Warranty Mass (kg) Inquiry H 400V D Features (Unit: mm) W Model 80 Name (type) Specifications, Structure, etc. A brake unit is an option that fully enhances the regenerative braking capability of the inverter, and should be used with an electricaldischarge resistor. Brake units should be selected according to the required braking torque. Brake unit selection table Voltage 200V output 400V output Motor(kW) 0.4 0.75 Braking torque 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 50% 30s BU-1500 BU-3700 BU-7.5K BU-15K 100% 30s BU-1500 BU-3700 BU-7.5K BU-15K 2×BU-15K 50% 30s * 100% 30s * BU-H7.5K BU-H7.5K BU-H15K 18.5 22 30 37 2×BU-15K 45 55 4× BU-15K 3× BU-15K 4× 5× 6× 7× BU-15K BU-15K BU-15K BU-15K 3×BU-15K BU-H15K BU-H30K 2×BU-H30K BU-H30K 2×BU-H30K 4× BUH30K 3×BU-H30K * The inverter of 1.5K or less with 400V output can not be used in combination with a brake unit. To use in combination with a brake unit, use the inverter of 2.2K or more. Combination of brake unit and electrical discharge resistor BU-(H) Electrical-discharge resistor GZG type Resistor Type Used Cable (P, N) BU-1500 GZG300W-50Ω (one) 2mm2 BU-3700 GRZG200-10Ω (three in series) 2mm2 BU-7.5K GRZG300-5Ω (four in series) 3.5mm2 BU-15K GRZG400-2Ω (six in series) 3.5mm2 Brake unit Voltage Brake Unit Resistor Type Used Cable (P, N) BU-H7.5K GRZG200-10Ω (six in series) 2mm2 BU-H15K GRZG300-5Ω (eight in series) 3.5mm2 BU-H30K GRZG400-10Ω (twelve in series) 3.5mm2 Electrical-discharge resistor H H GRZG type Brake Unit 400V output Brake unit 200V output Voltage W W D (Unit: mm) (Unit: mm) Type D W D H BU-1500,3700,7.5K,15K 100 128 240 BU-H7.5K,H15K,H30K 160 145 240 Type W D H GZG300W 335 40 78 GRZG200 306 26 55 GRZG300 334 40 79 GRZG400 411 40 79 (Note) 1.Connect so that the terminal symbols of the inverter and brake unit match with each other. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. 2.Minimize the cable length between the inverter and brake unit and the electrical-discharge resistor and brake unit. Use a twisted cable when the wiring length exceeds 2m. (If twisted cables are used, the wiring length should be within 5m.) Handling precautions 1. The thermal relay in the brake unit will trip if the rated torque is continuously output. After a trip, reset the inverter and increase its deceleration time setting. 2. The maximum temperature rise of the electrical-discharge resistor is 100°C. Use heat-resistant wires and wire to avoid contact with resistors. 81 Specifications, Structure, etc. A brake unit and resistor unit are options that will fully exhibit the regenerative braking capability of the inverter and are always used as a set. There are six different brake units as in the following table, from which make selection according to the necessary braking torque and deceleration time. The brake unit is equipped with a seven-segment LED that displays the duty (%ED) and alarm. Brake unit selection table Features Name (type) %ED at short-time rating when braking torque is 100% 11K 15K 18.5K 22K 30K 37K 45KK 55K 7.5K 11K 15K 18.5K 22K 30K 37K 45KK 55K 80 40 15 10 ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ 65 30 25 15 10 ------ ------ -----10 FR-BU-55K ------ ------ ------ ------ 90 60 30 20 15 FR-BU-H15K 80 40 15 10 ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ 65 30 25 15 10 ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ 90 60 30 20 15 10 FR-BU-H55K 11K 15K 18.5K 22K 30K 37K 45KK 55K 7.5K 11K 15K 18.5K 22K 30K 37K 45KK 55K 280 200 120 100 80 70 ------ ------ ------ FR-BU-30K ------ ------ ------ 260 180 160 130 100 80 70 FR-BU-55K ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ 300 250 180 150 120 100 FR-BU-H15K FR-BU-H30K 280 200 120 100 80 70 ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ 260 180 160 130 100 80 70 FR-BU-H55K ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ 300 250 180 150 120 100 Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation 7.5K 5.5K Braking Torque (%) FR-BU-15K 5.5K 400V Braking Torque (%) 200V 400V Brake unit Inverter 5.5kW 7.5kW 11kW 15kW 18.5kW 22kW 30kW 37kW 45kW 55kW 200V Operation Panel Motor Capacity Outline Dimension Drawings Braking torque (%) at short-time rating when 10%ED is 15s Outline dimension Brake unit FR-BU-(H) K 400V 200V Brake Unit Resistor Unit Resistor unit Type W H D Type W H D FR-BU-15K 100 240 128 FR-BR-15K 170 450 220 FR-BU-30K 160 240 128 FR-BR-30K 340 600 220 FR-BU-55K 265 240 128 FR-BR-55K 480 700 450 FR-BU-H15K 160 240 128 FR-BR-H15K 170 450 220 FR-BU-H30K 160 240 128 FR-BR-H30K 340 600 220 FR-BU-H55K 265 240 128 FR-BR-H55K 480 700 450 D Brake unit H Resistor unit H K W W D Brake unit and resistor unit combinations and used wires 200V Brake Unit Type Resistor Unit Type FR-BU-15K FR-BU-30K FR-BU-55K Wire (P/+-P/+, N-N/-, (Note) 1.The maximum temperature rise of the resistor unit is 100°C. Therefore, use heat-resistant wires (such as P/+-P, PR-PR) glass wires). 3.5mm2 5.5mm2 14mm2 FR-BR-15K FR-BR-30K FR-BR-55K 3.5mm2 3.5mm2 5.5mm2 Use the wires of the above recommended size or larger. FR-BR-H15K FR-BR-H30K FR-BR-H55K Instructions FR-BU-H15K FR-BU-H30K FR-BU-H55K Connection example ON OFF MC *4 Inverter FR-BU FR-BR P/+ P/+ P N/- N/- PR P Motor 400V FR-BR-(H) PR MC Within 5m FR-BR MCCB MC Three-phase AC power supply R/L1 U Motor S/L2 V IM T/L3 W P *2 N/− FR-BU FR-BU PR P/+ *1 Within 5m Inverter Twist TH2 PR PX TH1 PR Inverter Parameter List %ED Explanations of Parameters FR-BU-H30K Protective Functions %ED Options FR-BU-30K FR-BR Twist P/+ P/+ N/- N/- PR P P PR HA P/+ HB N/− HC *3 5m or less *1. Connect the inverter terminals (P, N) and brake unit (FR-BU (H)) terminals so that their terminal signals match with each other. (Incorrect connection will damage the inverter.) *2. When the power supply is 400V class, install a step-down transformer. *3. Be sure to remove a jumper across terminal PR-PX when using the FR-BU with the inverter of 7.5K or less. Within 10m Compatibility FR-BU-15K Peripheral Devices 7.5K 5.5K Standard Specifications 5.5K 400V Within 10m Minimize the cable length between the inverter and brake unit and the resistor unit and brake unit. Use a twisted cable when the wiring length exceeds 5m. (If twisted wires are used, the distance should be within 10m.) Use the wires of the above recommended size or larger. Warranty 200V 400V Brake unit Inverter 5.5kW 7.5kW 11kW 15kW 18.5kW 22kW 30kW 37kW 45kW 55kW 200V Inquiry Motor Capacity 82 Name (type) Specifications, Structure, etc. The brake unit and resistor unit are options that will fully exhibit the regenerative braking capability of the inverter. Use them as a set. There are six different brake units as in the following table, from which make selection according to the deceleration time. When the brake unit duty (%ED) excess and an alarm occur, errors appear in the inverter. Brake unit and resistor unit combinations and cables Brake unit selection table Brake unit Brake unit %ED at short-time rating when braking torque is 100% 75 90 110 132 160 185 220 280 375 Motor Capacity kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW 200V 75K 90K 110K ------------------------------Inverter 400V 75K 90K 110K 132K 160K 185K 220K 280K 375K 2 MT-BU5-55K 0 0 V MT-BU5-110K 5 ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ Brake Unit Type 200V ------ 15 10 ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ MT-BU5-55K MT-BR5-55K 14mm2 2×MT-BR5-55K 2×14mm2 MT-BU5-H75K MT-BR5-H75K 14mm2 2×MT-BR5-H75K 2×14mm2 3×MT-BR5-H75K 3×14mm2 4×MT-BR5-H75K 4×14mm2 5×MT-BR5-H75K 5×14mm2 MT-BU5H150K MT-BU5H220K MT-BU5H280K MT-BU5H375K ----------10 15 20 ----------5 10 15 ---------------5 10 220 kW -----220K 280 kW -----280K 375 kW -----375K 400V MT-BU5-H75K 10 5 --------------------4 MT-BU5-H150K 40 25 20 10 5 5 0 MT-BU5-H220K %ED 80 60 40 25 15 10 0 -----80 65 40 30 20 V MT-BU5-H280K MT-BU5-H375K ---------------- 80 50 40 Braking torque (%) at short-time rating when 100% ED is 15s 75 90 110 132 160 185 Motor Capacity kW kW kW kW kW kW 200V 75K 90K 110K ------ ------ -----Inverter 400V 75K 90K 110K 132K 160K 185K 2 MT-BU5-55K 0 0 V MT-BU5-110K braking torque (%) 70 60 50 ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ 150 120 100 ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ MT-BU5-H75K 100 80 70 55 45 40 35 25 20 4 MT-BU5-H150K braking 150 150 135 110 90 80 70 50 40 0 MT-BU5-H220K torque 150 150 150 150 135 115 100 80 55 0 150 150 150 150 150 150 125 100 70 V MT-BU5-H280K (%) MT-BU5-H375K 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 130 100 * To obtain a large braking torque, the motor has to have a torque characteristic that meets the braking torque. Check the torque characteristic of the motor. Cable MT-BU5-110K %ED 20 Resistor Unit Type (Caution 1) Be sure to select the well-ventilated place for installation of the resistor unit. Ventilation is necessary when installing the resistor in a place, e.g. enclosure, where heat is not well diffused. (Caution 2) The temperature rise of the discharging resistor is 300deg. Therefore, wire the cable so as not to touch the resistor. In addition, separate the parts with low heat resistance and the resistor by at least 40 to 50cm. (Caution 3) The temperature of the resistor unit abnormally increases if the brake unit is operated exceeding the specified duty. Since the resistor unit may result in overheat if the temperature of the brake unit is left unchanged, switch off the inverter. * The resistor unit is provided with a thermostat (a contact) as overheat protection. If this protective device is activated under normal operation, it is assumed that the deceleration time is too short. In such a case, increase the deceleration time setting of the inverter. Outline dimension drawings 85 A AA P, PR terminal 2 M6 screw N AB NP 800 K K B BA TH2 P PR TH1 E 85 40 M6 M4 30 Brake unit MT-BU5-(H) Resistor unit MT-BR5-(H) 193 189 37 60 10 21 480 510 75 4 7 Mounting hole LC 4 15 Mounting hole LN LP C 7.5 300 75 450 N Brake Unit Type 200V class 400V class MT-BU5-55K MT-BU5-110K MT-BU5-H75K MT-BU5-H150K MT-BU5-H220K MT-BU5-H280K MT-BU5-H375K A 118 188 118 188 258 328 398 AA AB 102 172 102 172 242 312 382 90 160 90 160 230 300 370 X-Y P CN8 B BA C Lc LP LN N 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 256.5 256.5 256.5 256.5 256.5 256.5 256.5 550 550 550 550 550 550 550 1740 2000 1740 2000 2000 2330 2330 1740 2000 1740 2000 2000 2330 2330 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 Approx. mass 1.5 3.0 1.5 3.0 4.5 6.0 7.5 X Y Z 14 22 14 22 38 60 60 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 8 8 8 8 8 10 10 Resistor Unit Type 200V class MT-BR5-55K 400V MT-BR5class H75K Resistance Mass Value 2.0Ω 50kg 6.5Ω 70kg External connection diagram T *1 MCCB Three-phase AC power supply ON MC U Motor S/L2 V IM T/L3 W R/L1 CR1 MC P PR CR2 MC 5m or *2 less Inverter P/+ N/ OFF P TH1 CR1 PR TH2 CN8 P PR P TH1 CR2 PR TH2 Brake unit MT-BU5 *1 *2 83 (Caution 1) For wiring of the brake unit and inverter, use an accessory cable supplied with the brake unit. Connect the main circuit cable to the terminals P/+ and N/- and connect the control circuit cable to the connector (CN8) inside by making cuts in the rubber bush at the top of the inverter. (Caution 2) The brake unit which uses multiple resistor units has terminals equal to the number of resistor units. Connect one resistor unit to one pair of terminals (P, PR). Brake unit Resistor unit MT-BR5 When the power supply is 400V class, install a step-down transformer. The wiring length between the resistor unit and brake resistor should be 10m maximum when wires are twisted and 5m maximum when wires are not twisted. Inverter Name (type) Specifications, Structure, etc. Enables 100%-torque continuous regeneration to support continuous regenerative operation for line control, etc. Features Eliminates the need to use a brake unit with each inverter, reducing total space and total cost. Saves energy since regeneration energy is used for the other inverters and excess energy is returned to the power supply. FR-CV-(H) (Unit mm) 90 303 103 300 15K 120 305 105 300 22K/30K 150 322 122 380 37K/55K 400 250 135 620 D D1 H 7.5K/11K/ 15K 120 305 105 300 22K/30K 150 305 105 380 37K/55K 400 250 135 620 FR-CV-(H)-AT FR-CV-(H)-AT D D1 H 110 315 115 330 15K 130 320 120 330 22K/30K 160 350 150 410 W D D1 H D1 W D 7.5K/11K/ 15K 130 320 120 330 22K/30K 160 350 150 410 D1 W D Outline Dimension Drawings 7.5K/11K Voltage/ Capacity W 400V 200V H (Unit mm) Voltage/ Capacity Power regeneration H Standard Specifications 7.5K/11K W Connection example common converter Dedicated stand-alone reactor (FR-CVL) MCCB R/L11 S/L21 T/L31 Three-phase AC power supply R2/L12 S2/L22 T2/L32 R2/L1 S2/L2 T2/L3 R/L11 S/L21 *4 T/MC1 IM V W R1/L11 S1/L21 FR-CV type Power regeneration common converter MC1 U *1 Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 K Inverter P/L+ N/L− P/+ N/− P24 SD RDYA PC SD RDYB RSO SE X10 *3 RES Operation Panel FR-CV-(H) *2 *1. Remove the jumpers across terminals R/L1-R1/L11 and S/L2-S1/L21 of the inverter, and connect the control circuit power supply across terminals R1/L11S1/L21. Always keep the power input terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 open. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. Opposite polarity of terminals N/-, P/+ will damage the inverter. *2. Do not insert an MCCB between the terminals P/+-N/- (between P/L+-P/+, between N/L--N/-). *3. Assign the terminal for X10 signal using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection). *4. Always connect the power supply and terminals R/L11, S/L21, T/MC1. If the inverter is operated without connection, the power regeneration common converter will be damaged. Has the power regeneration function as standard. Connects multiple inverters to enable common converter system operation. Protective Functions Substantially suppresses power harmonics to realize the equivalent capacity conversion coefficient K5=0 in the Japanese "Harmonic suppression guideline for consumers who receive high voltage or special high voltage". Specifications 200V Type FR-HC Applicable inverter capacity *1 15K 30K 55K H7.5K H15K H30K H55K 3.7K to 7.5K 7.5K to 15K 15K to 30K 30K to 55K 3.7K to 7.5K 7.5K to 15K 15K to 30K 30K to 55K Three-phase 200V to 220V 50Hz 200V to 230V 60Hz Rated input current (A) 33 61 Rated output voltage (V) *2 High power factor 400V 7.5K Rated input voltage/frequency Parameter List H Explanations of Parameters D1 Options D Three-phase 380V to 460V 50/60Hz 115 215 17 31 293V to 335VDC 57 110 558V to 670VDC *1. The applicable capacity to the high power factor converter is the total capacity of the inverters. *2. The output voltage varies with the input voltage value. Instructions W Peripheral Devices FR-CV-(H) Voltage/ Capacity 400V 200V Voltage/ Capacity converter Motor Outline dimension (Unit: mm) H D W H D W H D 220 300 190 160 155 100 240 230 160 15K 250 400 190 190 205 130 260 270 170 30K 340 550 195 220 230 170 340 320 180 55K 480 700 250 210 260 225 430 470 360 H7.5K 220 300 190 160 150 100 240 220 160 H15K 250 400 190 190 195 130 260 260 170 H30K 340 550 195 220 215 140 340 310 180 H55K 480 700 250 280 255 190 400 380 285 W H D 190 320 165 270 450 203 190 320 165 270 450 203 Outside box High power factor converter Compatibility W 7.5K Outside box FR-HCB W D W D Reactor 1, Reactor 2 Warranty 400V Reactor 2 FRHCL02 W D Inquiry 200V Reactor 1 FRHCL01 H High power factor converter Voltage Capacity FR-HC H K H FR-HC-(H) 84 Name (type) Specifications, Structure, etc. Application of the sine wave filter For the FR-A700 series (75K or more) inverter, the motor voltage and current can be made to nearly sine wave shaped by providing a sine wave filter on the output side. 1) Low noise 2) Surgeless 3) Motor loss reduction (use of standard motor) Application condition The following conditions have to be satisfied to install the sine wave filter. 1) Change the Pr. 72 setting to "25". (The initial value is "2".) The carrier frequency changes to 2.5KHz. (The sine wave filter is designed on condition that the carrier frequency is 2.5KHz. Be sure to change the setting properly.) If the inverter is operated with Pr.72 set to other than "25", the inverter and sine wave filter may be damaged. 2) The sine wave filter can be used only for 60 Hz or less inverter frequency. Note that the filter can not be used for the higher frequency operation than this. (Otherwise the filter loss will increase. ) 3) Use the inverter with capacity one rank higher. *2 4) Install an external thermal relay of the motor. 5) This function is valid for V/F control only. (When 25 is set in Pr.72, V/F control is automatically selected. 6) Use the MT-BSL-HC when using a sine wave filter with the MT-HC. Circuit configuration and connection Sine wave filter U V W Inverter (Carrier 2.5kHz) X Y Z Motor Capacity (kW) IM 200V class Motor Reactor + 0 - (Capacitor) current * Install the filter near the inverter. For a capacitor cable, use a cable with size larger than indicated in the table below "recommended cable size ". Inverter output voltage wave form Sine wave filter MT-BSL-(H) K MT-BSC-(H) K *1 *2 Reactor for sine wave filter 1×MT-BSC-75K MT-BSL-90K 1×MT-BSC-90K 75 MT-BSL-H75K(-HC) 1×MT-BSC-H75K MT-BSL-H110K(-HC) 1×MT-BSC-H110K FR-A740-110K 110 MT-BSL-H110K(-HC) 1×MT-BSC-H110K FR-A740-132K 132 MT-BSL-H150K(-HC) 2×MT-BSC-H75K FR-A740-160K MT-BSL-H220K(-HC) 2×MT-BSC-H110K FR-A740-185K MT-BSL-H220K(-HC) 2×MT-BSC-H110K FR-A740-220K 220 MT-BSL-H220K(-HC) 2×MT-BSC-H110K FR-A740-250K 250 MT-BSL-H280K(-HC) 3×MT-BSC-H110K FR-A740-280K 280 MT-BSL-H280K(-HC) 3×MT-BSC-H110K FR-A740-315K For the 2 ×, connect capacitors in parallel as in the connection diagram. If the rated motor current × (1.05 to 1.1) is less than 90% of the inverter rated current, an inverter with same kW with a motor can be used. Capacitor for sine wave filter G Terminal H Terminals I G W Z D Y C V X — FR-A740-90K C U FR-A720-90K MT-BSL-75K Rating plate * Applied Inverter (*2) 90 400V 160 class 185 Wave form at a motor terminal Capacitor for filter 75 90 voltage Capacitor InverterType Reactor for filter B D A E 4-G F installation hole * Remove the eye nut after installation of the product. Inverter type 200V class 400V class 85 MT-BSL-75K MT-BSL-90K MT-BSL-H75K MT-BSL-H110K MT-BSL-H150K MT-BSL-H220K MT-BSL-H280K MT-BSL-H75K-HC MT-BSL-H110K-HC MT-BSL-H150K-HC MT-BSL-H220K-HC MT-BSL-H280K-HC B A A B C D E F G H Mass (kg) 330 390 330 390 455 495 575 385 420 450 510 570 150 150 150 150 200 200 200 150 170 300 350 400 285 320 285 340 397 405 470 345 400 455 540 590 185 180 185 195 200 250 310 185 195 390 430 475 216 220 216 235 240 300 370 216 235 430 485 535 328 330 318 368 380 420 485 315 370 500 555 620 M10 M12 M10 M12 M12 M12 M12 M10 M12 M12 M12 M12 M12 M12 M10 M12 M12 M12 M12 M10 M12 M12 M12 M12 80 120 80 140 190 240 340 110 180 250 310 480 Inverter type * F E 4-H Installation hole I Mass (kg) φ7 M8 3.9 φ7 M12 5.5 φ7 M6 3.0 φ7 M6 4.0 A B C D E F G H 200V MT-BSC-75K class MT-BSC-90K 207 191 285 233 72 41 45 282 266 270 183 92 56 85 400V MT-BSC-H75K class MT-BSC-H110K 207 191 220 173 72 41 55 207 191 280 233 72 41 55 Leave more than 25mm space between capacitors. Recommended cable size The cable sizes between the Inverter and MT-BSL and between the MTBSL and IM depend on U, V, W of "Peripheral devices list" (page 87) The cable size to the MT-BSC is as table below. MT-BSC-75K MT-BSC-90K MT-BSC-H75K MT-BSC-H110K 38mm2 38mm2 22mm2 22mm2 Name (type) Features Dedicated cable option Specifications, Structure, etc. For dedicated motor Encoder side connector MS3106B20-29S 0.2mm Standard Specifications 60mm L B PB1 C PB2 D PZ1 F PZ2 G A M T K B C N L S P D R J H Outline Dimension Drawings A PA2 G E Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation PA1 F MS3106B20-29S (As viewed from wiring side) PG S SD R Type Length L (m) FR-V7CBL5 5 FR-V7CBL15 15 FR-V7CBL30 30 2mm2 (Note) When a cable of 30m length or more is required, consult our sales office. Cable selection specifications Wiring Distance Optional Encoder Dedicated Cable 5m or less 10m or less 15m or less 20m or less 30m or less 50m or less 100m or less FR-V7CBL5 Cable Specification Using larger gauge cable Wiring 0.2mm2 cables 2 parallels or more 2 parallels or more 4 parallels or more 4 parallels or more 6 parallels or more FR-V7CBL15 FR-V7CBL30 *Available on request, please consult us. ⋅ If connection cables are not available, 0.4mm2 or more make cables according to the left table. ⋅ 2 0.75mm or more 1.25mm2 6 parallels or more Cables to terminals PG and SD should be connected in parallel or be larger in size. or more Encoder connector (Manufactured by Japan Aviation Electronics Industries) for reference φ37.3 φ23 φ37.3 Positioning keyway 33.7 9.5 9.5 Effective screw length 55.6 Options 1-1/4-18UNEF-2B 18.3 1-3/16-18UNEF-2A Instructions 18.3 1-3/16-18 UNEF-2A Effective screw length 60.7 77 φ23 Compatibility (Note) This angle type connector is not optional. Please obtain it separately. Cable Clamp MS3057-12A 23.8 10.3 1-3/16-18UNEF-2B 1.6 Warranty 34.9 37.3 φ10 φ19 4 maximum allowable cable diameter Inquiry 1-1/4-18UNEF-2B (Unit: mm) Angle Plug MS3108B20-29S Motor Straight Plug MS3106B20-29S Operation Panel Cable for encoder FR-V7CBL Positioning keyway Encoder Parameter List Inverter (FR-A7AP) Explanations of Parameters F-DPEVSB 12P 11mm Earth (Ground) wire Peripheral Devices MS3057-12A Protective Functions Inverter side 86 Peripheral devices/cable size list Voltage 200V class 400V class Motor Output (kW) *1 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 Applicable Inverter Type FR-A720-0.4K FR-A720-0.75K FR-A720-1.5K FR-A720-2.2K FR-A720-3.7K FR-A720-5.5K FR-A720-7.5K FR-A720-11K FR-A720-15K FR-A720-18.5K FR-A720-22K FR-A720-30K FR-A720-37K FR-A720-45K FR-A720-55K Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)*2 or Earth Leakage Current Breaker (ELB) Reactor connection Without With Input Side Magnetic Contactor*3 Reactor connection Without With 75 FR-A720-75K 90 FR-A720-90K 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 150 160 185 220 250 280 315 355 400 FR-A740-0.4K FR-A740-400K 30AF 5A 30AF 10A 30AF 15A 30AF 20A 30AF 30A 50AF 50A 100AF 60A 100AF 75A 225AF 125A 225AF 150A 225AF 175A 225AF 225A 400AF 250A 400AF 300A 400AF 400A — — 30AF 5A 30AF 5A 30AF 10A 30AF 10A 30AF 20A 30AF 30A 30AF 30A 50AF 50A 100AF 60A 100AF 75A 100AF 100A 225AF 125A 225AF 150A 225AF 175A 225AF 200A — — — — — — — — — — — — — 450 FR-A740-450K — 1000AF 1000A — 500 FR-A740-500K — 1200AF 1200A — FR-A740-0.75K FR-A740-1.5K FR-A740-2.2K FR-A740-3.7K FR-A740-5.5K FR-A740-7.5K FR-A740-11K FR-A740-15K FR-A740-18.5K FR-A740-22K FR-A740-30K FR-A740-37K FR-A740-45K FR-A740-55K FR-A740-75K FR-A740-90K FR-A740-110K FR-A740-132K FR-A740-160K FR-A740-160K FR-A740-185K FR-A740-220K FR-A740-250K FR-A740-280K FR-A740-315K FR-A740-355K 30AF 5A 30AF 10A 30AF 15A 30AF 15A 30AF 30A 50AF 40A 50AF 50A 100AF 75A 100AF 100A 225AF 125A 225AF 150A 225AF 175A 225AF 225A 400AF 300A 400AF 350A NV400AF400A NV400AF400A 30AF 5A 30AF 5A 30AF 10A 30AF 10A 30AF 15A 30AF 20A 30AF 30A 50AF 40A 50AF 50A 100AF 60A 100AF 75A 100AF 100A 225AF 125A 225AF 150A 225AF 175A 225AF 225A 225AF 225A 225AF 225A 400AF 400A 400AF 400A 400AF 400A 400AF 400A 600AF 500A 600AF 600A 600AF 600A 800AF 700A 800AF 800A 1000AF 900A S-N10 S-N10 S-N10 S-N10 S-N20, N21 S-N25 S-N25 S-N35 S-N50 S-N65 S-N80 S-N95 S-N150 S-N180 S-N220 — — S-N10 S-N10 S-N10 S-N10 S-N10 S-N20 S-N20 S-N20 S-N25 S-N25 S-N35 S-N50 S-N65 S-N80 S-N80 — — — — — — — — — — — — — S-N10 S-N10 S-N10 S-N10 S-N10 S-N20, N21 S-N25 S-N35 S-N50 S-N50 S-N65 S-N80 S-N125 S-N150 S-N180 S-N300 S-N300 S-N10 S-N10 S-N10 S-N10 S-N10 S-N11, N12 S-N20 S-N20 S-N20 S-N25 S-N25 S-N50 S-N50 S-N65 S-N80 S-N95 S-N150 S-N180 S-N220 S-N300 S-N300 S-N300 S-N400 S-N600 S-N600 S-N600 S-N600 S-N800 1000A rated product 1000A rated product *1. Selections for use of the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor with power supply voltage 200VAC (200V class)/400VAC (400V class) 50Hz. *2. Install one MCCB per inverter. For installations in the United States or Canada, use the fuse certified by the UL and cUL. MCCB INV For details, refer to the Instruction Manual (basic) MCCB INV Recommended Cable Size (mm2)*4 R, S, T U, V, W 2 2 2 2 3.5 5.5 14 14 22 38 38 60 80 100 100 125 150 2 2 2 2 2 2 3.5 5.5 8 14 14 22 22 38 60 60 60 80 100 125 125 150 2 × 100 2 × 100 2 × 125 2 × 150 2 × 200 2 × 200 2 2 2 2 3.5 5.5 8 14 22 38 38 60 80 100 100 125 150 2 2 2 2 2 2 3.5 5.5 8 8 14 22 22 38 60 60 60 80 125 125 125 150 2 × 100 2 × 100 2 × 125 2 × 150 2 × 200 2 × 200 2 × 250 2 × 250 2 × 250 2 × 250 IM IM *3. Magnetic contactor is selected based on the AC-1 class. The electrical durability of magnetic contactor is 500,000 times. When the magnetic contactor is used for emergency stop during motor driving, the electrical durability is 25 times. When using the MC for emergency stop during motor driving or using on the motor side during commercial-power supply operation, select the class AC-3 rated current for the motor rated current. *4. Cable For the 55K or less, the cable size is that of the cable (HIV cable (600V class 2 vinyl-insulated cable) etc.) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75°C. Assumes that the ambient temperature is 50°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less. For the 75K or more, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (e.g. LMFC (heat resistant flexible cross-linked polyethylene insulated cable)) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C. Assumes that the ambient temperature is 50°C or less and wiring is performed in an enclosure. 87 60 40 20 0 2 3.5 8 142238 80150 5.5 30 60 100 Power supply size (mm ) 2 1. 0 0. 7 0. 5 0. 3 0. 2 0. 1 1. 5 3. 7 7. 5 15223755 2. 2 5.5 1118. 53045 Motor capacity (kW) Example 5.5mm2 × 5m ELB 5.5mm2 × 50m Noise filter Inverter Ig1 Ign Ig2 Igm Outline Dimension Drawings 6.15 30 100 Inverter leakage currents (with and without EMC filter) Input power conditions (200V class: 220V/60Hz, 400V class: 440V/60Hz, power supply unbalance within 3%) Earth (Ground) 3φ IM 200V 2.2kW 3.00 Phase grounding EMC Filter Voltage (V) ON (mA) OFF (mA) 200 22 (1)* 1 400 30 1 400 1 1 Igi Note:1. Install the earth leakage current breaker (ELB) on the input side of the inverter. 2. In the connection earthed-neutral system, the sensitivity current is purified against an earth (ground) fault in the inverter output side. Earthing (Grounding) must conform to the requirements of national and local safety regulations and electrical codes. (JIS, NEC section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards) Earthed-neutral system * For the 200V class 0.4K and 0.75K, the EMC filter is always valid. The leakage current is 1mA. Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation 80 2. 0 Operation Panel 100 0.18 Parameter List 120 Motor leakage current Igm (mA) Total leakage current (mA) Rated sensitivity current (mA) (≥ Ig × 10) Explanations of Parameters Leakage currents (mA) Leakage currents (mA) (200V 60Hz) 1 (without EMC filter) Refer to the following table for the leakage current of the inverter 50m =1.65 33 × 1,000m Protective Functions (200V 60Hz) Leakage current Ig2(mA) 0 (without noise filter) Options Leakage current example of three-phase induction motor during the commercial power supply operation =0.17 Instructions Example of leakage current of cable path per 1km during the commercial power supply operation when the CV cable is routed in metal conduit Leakage current Ign(mA) Leakage current Igi(mA) 5m 1,000m 33 × Motor Rated sensitivity currentI∆n≥10 × {(Ig1+Ign+Igi+3 × (Ig2+Igm)} Ig1, Ig2 : Leakage currents in wire path during commercial power supply operation Ign : Leakage current of inverter input side noise filter Igm : Leakage current of motor during commercial power supply operation Igi : Inverter unit leakage current Leakage current Ig1 (mA) Compatibility Rated sensitivity currentI∆n≥10 × (Ig1+Ign+lgi+Ig2+Igm) ⋅ Standard breaker Standard Breaker Warranty ⋅ Breaker designed for harmonic and surge suppression Peripheral Devices Breaker Designed For Harmonic and Surge Suppression Standard Specifications Selection example (in the case of the left figure) Inquiry When using the earth leakage current breaker with the inverter circuit, select its rated sensitivity current as follows, independently of the PWM carrier frequency. Features Selection of rated sensitivity current of earth (ground) leakage current breaker 88 Precautions for Operation/Selection Precautions for use of the inverter Safety Precautions To operate the inverter correctly and safely, be sure to read the "instruction manual" before starting operation. This product has not been designed or manufactured for use with any equipment or system operated under life-threatening conditions. Please contact our sales office when you are considering using this product in special applications such as passenger mobile, medical, aerospace, nuclear, power or undersea relay equipment or system. Although this product is manufactured under strict quality control, safety devices should be installed when a serious accident or loss is expected by a failure of this product. The load used should be a three-phase induction motor only. Operation A magnetic contactor (MC) provided on the input side should not be used to make frequent starts and stops. It could cause the inverter to fail. However, at this time, the motor cannot be brought to a sudden stop. Hence, provide a mechanical stopping/holding mechanism for the machine/equipment which requires an emergency stop. It will take time for the capacitor to discharge after shutoff of the inverter power supply. When accessing the inverter for inspection, wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched off, and check to make sure that there are no residual voltage using a tester or the like. Wiring Application of power to the output terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter will damage the inverter. Therefore, fully check the wiring and sequence to ensure that wiring is correct, etc. before powering on. The terminals P/+, P1, N/- are provided for connection of a dedicated option. Connect only a dedicated option. Do not short the frequency setting power supply terminal 10 and common terminal 5 or the terminal PC and terminal SD. Power supply Power supply system capacity transformer (1000kVA or more transformer) or when a power capacitor is to be switched over, an excessive peak current may flow in the power input circuit, damaging the inverter. To prevent this, always install an optional AC reactor (FR-HEL). (kVA) 5300 5000 Capacities requiring 4000 installation of power coordination 3000 reactor Do not install the inverter on wood or other combustible material as it will be hot locally. Install the inverter in the vertical orientation. Setting The inverter can be operated as fast as a maximum of 400Hz by parameter setting. Therefore, incorrect setting can cause a danger. Set the upper limit using the maximum frequency limit setting function. A setting higher than the initial value of DC injection brake operation voltage or operation time can cause motor overheat (electronic thermal relay trip). Real sensorless vector control Make sure to perform offline auto tuning before performing real sensorless vector control. The carrier frequencies are selectable from among 2k, 6k, 10k, 14kHz for real sensorless vector control. Torque control can not be performed in the low speed region and at a low speed with light load. Choose vector control. Performing pre-excitation (LX signal and X13 signal) under torque control may start the motor running at a low speed even when the start command (STF or STR) is not input. The motor may run also at a low speed when the speed limit value=0 with a start command input. Perform pre-excitation after making sure that there will be no problem in safety if the motor runs. Do not switch between the STF (forward rotation command) and STR (reverse rotation command) during operation under torque control. Overcurrent shut-off error (E.OC ) or opposite rotation deceleration error (E.11) occurs. 20Hz or less and torque may become insufficient in the low speed region under 1Hz during continuous operation under real sensorless vector control. In such case, stop operation once and reaccelerate to improve the problems. When the inverter is likely to start during motor coasting under real sensorless vector control, set to make frequency search of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure valid (Pr. 57 ≠ "9999", Pr. 162 = "10"). The 22K does not comply with the 2nd environment of the EMC Directive. 2000 1000 550 kVA If a surge voltage occurs in the power supply system, this surge energy may flow into the inverter, causing the inverter to display overvoltage protection (E.OV ) and come to an alarm stop. To prevent this, always install an optional AC reactor (FR-HAL). 89 Avoid hostile environment where oil mist, fluff, dust particles, etc. are suspended in the air, and install the inverter in a clean place or put it in an ingress-protected "enclosed" enclosure. When placing the inverter in an enclosure, determine the cooling system and enclosure dimensions so that the ambient temperature of the inverter is within the permissble value. (refer to page 10 for the specified value) For the 0.4K to 3.7K, the speed deviation may become large at When the inverter is connected under a large-capacity power 110165 247 330 420 Inverter capacity Installation Power transfer mechanism (reduction gear, belt, chain, etc.) When an oil-lubricated gear box, speed change/reduction gear or similar device is used in the power transfer system, note that continuous operation at low speed only may deteriorate oil lubrication, causing seizure. When performing fast operation at higher than 60Hz, fully note that such operation will cause strength shortage due to the noise, life or centrifugal force of the power transfer mechanism. Instructions for overload operation When performing operation of frequent start/stop of the inverter, rise/fall in the temperature of the transistor element of the inverter will repeat due to a repeated flow of large current, shortening the life from thermal fatigue. Since thermal fatigue is related to the amount of current, the life can be increased by reducing current at locked condition, starting current, etc. Decreasing current may increase the life. However, decreasing current will result in insufficient torque and the inverter may not start. Therefore, choose the inverter which has enough allowance for current. Peripheral Devices Standard Specifications Outline Dimension Drawings Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation Operation Panel Parameter List To decrease the acceleration/deceleration time, increase the torque boost value (setting of a too large value may activate the stall prevention function at a start, resulting in longer acceleration time), use the advanced magnetic flux vector control or real sensorless vector control, or increase the inverter and motor capacities. To decrease the deceleration time, it is necessary to add the brake unit (FR-BU, MTBU5), power regeneration common converter (FR-CV), power regeneration unit (MT-RC) or a similar device to absorb braking energy. Explanations of Parameters When the torque limit function or stall prevention function is activated during acceleration/deceleration, increase the acceleration/deceleration time as the actual time may become longer. Protective Functions (GD2). Options The acceleration/deceleration time of the motor depends on the motor-generated torque, load torque and load inertia moment Instructions Acceleration/deceleration times Motor The start and acceleration characteristics of the motor driven by the inverter are restricted by the overload current rating of that inverter. Generally the torque characteristic is less than when the motor is started by a commercial power supply. When torque boost adjustment, advanced magnetic flux vector, real sensorless vector or vector control cannot provide enough starting torque, select the inverter of one rank higher capacity or increase the capacities of both the motor and inverter. Compatibility Starting torque of the motor Warranty When operating a special motor or more than one motor in parallel with a single inverter, select the inverter capacity so that 1.1 times the total rated motor current is less than the rated output current of the inverter. Inquiry Inverter capacity selection Features Precautions for selection 90 Precautions for Peripheral Device Selection Installation and selection of moulded case circuit breaker Install a moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB) on the power receiving side to protect the wiring of the inverter input side. For MCCB selection, refer to page 87 since it depends on the inverter power supply side power factor (which changes depending on the power supply voltage, output frequency and load). Especially for a completely electromagnetic MCCB, one of a slightly large capacity must be selected since its operation characteristic varies with harmonic currents. (Check it in the data of the corresponding breaker.) As an earth leakage current breaker, use the Mitsubishi earth leakage current breaker designed for harmonics and surge sppression. (Refer to page 88.) When installing a moulded case circuit breaker on the output side of the inverter, contact each manufacturer for selection of the moulded case circuit breaker. Handling of primary side magnetic contactor For operation via external terminal (terminal STF or STR used), provide an input side MC to prevent an accident caused by a natural restart at power recovery after a power failure, such as an instantaneous power failure, and to ensure safety for maintenance work. Do not use this magnetic contactor to make frequent starts and stops. (The switching life of the inverter input circuit is about 1,000,000 times. ) For parameter unit operation, an automatic restart after power failure is not made and the MC cannot be used to make a start. Note that the primary side MC may be used to make a stop but the regenerative brake specific to the inverter does not operate and the motor is coasted to a stop. Wire thickness and wiring distance When the wiring length between the inverter and motor is long, use thick wires so that the voltage drop of the main circuit cable is 2% or less especially at low frequency output. (A selection example for the wiring distance of 20m is shown on page 87) Especially at a long wiring distance, the maximum wiring length should be within the length in the table below since the overcurrent protection function may be misactivated by the influence of a charging current due to the stray capacitances of the wiring. (The overall wiring length for connection of multiple motors should be within the value in the table below.) Pr.72 PWM frequency selection setting (carrier frequency) 0.4K 0.75K 1.5K or more 2 or less 300m 500m 500m 3 to 15 200m 300m 500m Use the recommended connection cable when installing the operation panel away from the inverter unit or when connecting the parameter unit. For remote operation via analog signal, wire the control cable between the operation box or operation signal and inverter within 30m and away from the power circuits (main circuit and relay sequence circuit) to prevent induction from other devices. When using the external potentiometer instead of the parameter unit to set the frequency, use a shielded or twisted cable, and do not earth (ground) the shield, but connect it to terminal 5 as shown below. (3) 10 (10E) (2) 2 2 (1) (1) Handling of the secondary side magnetic contactor Switch the magnetic contactor between the inverter and motor only when both the inverter and motor are at a stop. When the magnetic contactor is turned on while the inverter is operating, overcurrent protection of the inverter and such will activate. When an MC is provided to switch to a commercial power supply, for example, it is recommended to use commercial power supply-inverter switchover operation Pr.135 to Pr.139. Thermal relay installation The inverter has an electronic thermal relay function to protect the motor from overheating. However, when running multiple motors with one inverter or operating a multi-pole motor, provide a thermal relay (OCR) between the inverter and motor. In this case, set the electronic thermal relay function of the inverter to 0A. And for the setting of the thermal relay, add the line-to line leakage current (refer to page 92) to the current value on the motor rating plate. For low-speed operation where the cooling capability of the motor reduces, it is recommended to use a thermal protector or thermistor-incorporated motor. 5 Frequency setting potentiometer Disuse of power factor improving capacitor (power capacitor) The power factor improving capacitor and surge suppressor on the inverter output side may be overheated or damaged by the harmonic components of the inverter output. Also, since an excessive current flows in the inverter to activate overcurrent protection, do not install a capacitor or surge suppressor. For power factor improvement, use a power factor improving DC reactor (see page 80). 91 Twisted cable 5 Frequency setting potentiometer Earth (Ground) When the inverter is run in the low acoustic noise mode, more leakage currents occur than in the non-low acoustic noise mode due to high-speed switching operation. Be sure to use the inverter and motor after grounding (earthing) them. In addition, always use the earth (ground) terminal of the inverter to earth (ground) the inverter. (Do not use the case and chassis) Noise When performing low-noise operation at higher carrier frequency, electromagnetic noise tends to increase. Therefore, refer to the following measure example and consider taking the measures. Depending on the installation condition, the inverter may be affected by noise in a non-low noise (initial) status. The noise level can be reduced by decreasing the carrier frequency (Pr.72). As measures against AM radio broadcasting noise and sensor malfunction, turning on the built-in EMC filter produces an effect. (For the switching method, refer to the instruction manual.) As measures against induction noise from the power cable of the inverter, providing a distance of 30cm (at least 10cm) or more and using a twisted pair shielded cable as a signal cable produces an effect. Do not earth (ground) shield but connect it to signal common cable. Measuring instrument on the output side When the inverter-to-motor wiring length is large, especially in the 400V class, small-capacity models, the meters and CTs may generate heat due to line-to-line leakage current. Therefore, choose the equipment which has enough allowance for the current rating. To measure and display the output voltage and output current of the inverter, it is recommended to use the terminal AM-5 output function of the inverter. Shielded cable (3) 10 (10E) (2) Example of noise reduction techniques Enclosure Inverter power supply Decrease carrier frequency EMC filter Inverter IM Motor Use 4-core cable for motor power cable and use one cable as earth (ground) cable. Separate inverter and power line by more than 30cm (at least 10cm) from sensor circuit. Control power supply Do not earth (ground) enclosure directly. FRBLF Install filter (FR-BLF, FR-BSF01) on inverter output side. Power supply for sensor Do not earth (ground) control cable. Use a twisted pair shielded cable Sensor Do not earth (ground) shield but connect it to signal common cable. Three-phase 200V To-earth (ground) leakage currents Type Influence and Measures Influence and measures ⋅ Leakage currents may flow not only into the inverter's own line but also into the other lines through the earth (ground) cable, etc.These leakage currents may operate earth (ground) leakage circuit breakers and earth leakage relays unnecessarily. Countermeasures ⋅ If the carrier frequency setting is high, decrease the Pr.72 PWM frequency selection setting. Note that motor noise increases. Select Pr.240 Soft-PWM operation selection to make the sound inoffensive. ⋅ By using earth leakage circuit breakers designed for harmonic and surge suppression in the inverter's own line and other line, operation can be performed with the carrier frequency kept high (with low noise). Motor Target Capacity C Leakage breaker C NV2 Motor Three-phase 200V C Leakage breaker 3.7kW or less Measures Connect the AC reactor or DC reactor recommended in a catalog or an instruction manual. Reference materials ⋅ “Harmonic suppression guideline of the generalpurpose inverter (input current of 20A or less)” JEM-TR226 (enacted in Dec. 2003):Japan Line leakage current Thermal relay Inverter Motor IM Line-to-line static capacitances Line-to-line leakage currents path Harmonic suppression guideline in Japan Harmonic currents flow from the inverter to a power receiving point via a power transformer. The harmonic suppression guideline was established to protect other consumers from these outgoing harmonic currents. The three-phase 200V input specifications 3.7kW or less are previously covered by "Harmonic suppression guideline for household appliances and general-purpose products" and other models are covered by "Harmonic suppression guideline for consumers who receive high voltage or special high voltage". However, the generalpurpose inverter has been excluded from the target products covered by "Harmonic suppression guideline for household appliances and general-purpose products" in January 2004. Later, this guideline was repealed on September 6, 2004. All capacities of all models are now target products of "Harmonic suppression guideline for consumers who receive high voltage or special high voltage". ⋅ "Harmonic suppression guideline for consumers who receive high voltage or special high voltage" This guideline sets forth the maximum values of harmonic currents outgoing from a high-voltage or especially high-voltage consumer who will install, add or renew harmonic generating equipment. If any of the maximum values is exceeded, this guideline requires that consumer to take certain suppression measures. Users who use models other than the target models are not covered by the guideline. However, we ask to connect an AC reactor or a DC reactor as before to the users who are not covered by the guideline. Explanations of Parameters during 30 minutes ⋅ Harmonic content: found in Table. Reactor 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th Not used Used (AC side) Used (DC side) Used (AC, DC sides) 65 38 30 28 41 14.5 13 9.1 8.5 7.4 8.4 7.2 7.7 3.4 5.0 4.1 4.3 3.2 4.7 3.2 3.1 1.9 3.2 2.4 2.6 1.7 3.0 1.6 1.8 1.3 2.2 1.4 Table 2:Rated capacities and outgoing harmonic currents of inverter-driven motors Applicable Motor( kW) 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 220 250 280 315 355 400 450 500 Rated Current [A] 200V 400V 1.61 0.81 2.74 1.37 5.50 2.75 7.93 3.96 13.0 6.50 19.1 9.55 25.6 12.8 36.9 18.5 49.8 24.9 61.4 30.7 73.1 36.6 98.0 49.0 121 60.4 147 73.5 180 89.9 245 123 293 147 357 179 — 216 — 258 — 355 — 403 — 450 — 506 — 571 — 643 — 723 — 804 Fundamental Rated Wave Current Converted Capacity from 6.6kV (kVA) (mA) 49 83 167 240 394 579 776 1121 1509 1860 2220 2970 3660 4450 5450 7455 8909 10848 13091 15636 21515 24424 27273 30667 34606 38970 43818 48727 0.57 0.97 1.95 2.81 4.61 6.77 9.07 13.1 17.6 21.8 25.9 34.7 42.8 52.1 63.7 87.2 104 127 153 183 252 286 319 359 405 456 512 570 Outgoing Harmonic Current Converted from 6.6kV(mA) (No reactor, 100% operation ratio) 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th 31.85 20.09 4.165 3.773 2.107 1.519 1.274 0.882 53.95 34.03 7.055 6.391 3.569 2.573 2.158 1.494 108.6 68.47 14.20 12.86 7.181 5.177 4.342 3.006 156.0 98.40 20.40 18.48 10.32 7.440 6.240 4.320 257.1 161.5 33.49 30.34 16.94 12.21 10.24 7.092 376.1 237.4 49.22 44.58 24.90 17.95 15.05 10.42 504.4 318.2 65.96 59.75 33.37 24.06 20.18 13.97 728.7 459.6 95.29 86.32 48.20 34.75 29.15 20.18 980.9 618.7 128.3 116.2 64.89 46.78 39.24 27.16 1209 762.6 158.1 143.2 79.98 57.66 48.36 33.48 1443 910.2 188.7 170.9 95.46 68.82 57.72 39.96 1931 1218 252.5 228.7 127.7 92.07 77.22 53.46 2379 1501 311.1 281.8 157.4 113.5 95.16 65.88 2893 1825 378.3 342.7 191.4 138.0 115.7 80.10 3543 2235 463.3 419.7 234.4 169.0 141.7 98.10 2237 969 626 373 350 239 224 164 2673 1158 748 445 419 285 267 196 3254 1410 911 542 510 347 325 239 3927 1702 1100 655 615 419 393 288 4691 2033 1313 782 735 500 469 344 6455 2797 1807 1076 1011 688 645 473 7327 3175 2052 1221 1148 782 733 537 8182 3545 2291 1364 1282 873 818 600 9200 3987 2576 1533 1441 981 920 675 10382 4499 2907 1730 1627 1107 1038 761 11691 5066 3274 1949 1832 1247 1169 857 13146 5696 3681 2191 2060 1402 1315 964 14618 6335 4093 2436 2290 1559 1462 1072 Protective Functions Table 1:Harmonic content (values of the fundamental current is 100%) Options Undesirable current path MC ⋅ Operation ratio:Operation ratio = actual load factor ×operation time ratio Instructions MCCB Power supply Outgoing harmonic current = fundamental wave current (value converted from received power voltage) × operation ratio × harmonic content Motor Influence and measures Calculation of outgoing harmonic current Compatibility Influence and Measures ⋅ This leakage current flows via a static capacitance between the inverter output cables. ⋅ The external thermal relay may be operated unnecessarily by the harmonics of the leakage current. When the wiring length is long (50m or more) for the 400V class smallcapacity model (7.5kW or less), the external thermal relay is likely to operate unnecessarily because the ratio of the leakage current to the rated motor current increases. Countermeasures ⋅ Use Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay. ⋅ If the carrier frequency setting is high, decrease the Pr.72 PWM frequency selection setting. Note that motor noise increases. Select Pr.240 Soft-PWM operation selection to make the sound inoffensive. To ensure that the motor is protected against line-to-line leakage currents, it is recommended to use a temperature sensor to directly detect motor temperature. Warranty Type Parameter List Electrical Manufacturer’s Association Inquiry Undesirable current path For compliance to “Harmonic suppression guideline of the transistorized inverter (input current of 20A or less) for consumers other than specific consumers” published by JEMA. Input Power Supply Inverter NV1 Power supply Three-phase 400V Peripheral Devices All capacities Make a judgment based on “Harmonic suppression guideline for consumers who receive high voltage or special high voltage” issued by the Japanese Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry (formerly Ministry of International Trade and Industry) in September 1994 and take measures if necessary. For calculation method of power supply harmonics, refer to materials below. Reference materials ⋅ “Harmonic suppression measures of the inverter” Jan. 2004 JEMA :Japan Electrical Manufacturer’s Association ⋅ “Calculation method of harmonic current of the general-purpose inverter used by specific consumers” JEM-TR201 (revised in Dec. 2003): Japan Electrical Manufacturer’s Association Standard Specifications Measures Outline Dimension Drawings Target Capacity Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation Input Power Supply Operation Panel Capacitances exist between the inverter I/O cables, other cables and earth and in the motor, through which a leakage current flows. Since its value depends on the static capacitances, carrier frequency, etc., low acoustic noise operation at the increased carrier frequency of the inverter will increase the leakage current. Therefore, take the following measures. Select the earth leakage current breaker according to its rated sensitivy current, independently of the carrier frequency setting. Features For compliance to the "Harmonic suppression guideline for consumers who receive high voltage or special high voltage" Leakage currents 92 Application to Motor Application to standard motors Motor loss and temperature rise Vibration The motor operated by the inverter has a limit on the continuous operating torque since it is slightly higher in temperature rise than the one operated by a commercial power supply. At a low speed, reduce the output torque of the motor since the cooling effect decreases. When 100% torque is needed continuously at low speed, consider using a constanttorque motor. Torque characteristic The motor operated by the inverter may be less in motor torque (especially starting torque) than the one driven by the commercial power supply. It is necessary to fully check the load torque characteristic of the machine. The machine-installed motor operated by the inverter may be slightly greater in vibration than the one driven by the commercial power supply. The possible causes of vibration are as follows. 1. Vibration due to imbalance of the rotator itself including the machine 2. Resonance due to the natural oscillation of the mechanical system. Caution is required especially when the machine used at constant speed is operated at variable speed. The frequency jump function allows resonance points to be avoided during operation. (During acceleration/deceleration, the frequency within the setting range is passed through.) An effect is also produced if Pr.72 PWM frequency selection is changed. When a two-pole motor is operated at higher than 60Hz, caution should be taken since such operation may cause abnormal vibration. Motor torque When the Mitsubishi standard squirrel-cage motor (SF-JR, 4-pole) and inverter of the same capacity are used, the torque characteristics are as shown below. Maximum torque for short time 60Hz Torque Reference 50Hz Torque Reference 200V 150 100 70 (%) 63 0 * (5.5K to 55K) 130 100 (%) 53 0.3 20 *4 *3 60 0 120 Output frequency (Hz) 0.3 20 *4 *3 *2 *1 50 *2 120 Output frequency (Hz) *1 150 140 110 100 80 70 63 (%) 30 10 0 200V Output torque 220V Output torque V/F Control Maximum torque for short time(0.4 to 3.7K) 170 220V * (5.5K to 55K) Output torque Output torque Real Sensorless Vector Control Maximum torque for short time (0.4 to 3.7K) 200 130 120 95 80 67 53 (%) 25 9 1 3 6 60 20 1 3 6 120 Output frequency (Hz) ⋅ 200% torque (60Hz torque reference) is output at 0.3Hz operation under real sensorless vector control. (0.4 to 3.7K) (* 0.3Hz 150% torque for the 5.5K to 55K) ⋅ A 60Hz torque reference indicates that the rated torque of the motor running at 60Hz is 100%, and a 50Hz torque reference indicates that the rated torque of the motor running at 50Hz is 100% 20 50 120 Output frequency (Hz) *1. Torque boost minimum (0%) *2. Torque boost standard (initial value) *3. Torque boost large (0.4K, 0.75K... 10%, 1.5K to 3.7K... 7%, 5.5K, 7.5K... 6%, 11K or more... 4%) *4. Torque boost adjustment (3.7kW or less) Continuous torque (real sensorless vector control) 60Hz Torque Reference 50Hz Torque Reference 0.4K to 3.7K 5.5K 7.5K to 30K 0.4 to 3.7K 5.5K 7.5K to 30K 220V 70 65 200V Output torque Output torque 100 95 90 85 80 37K to 55K 50 45 V/F control (0.2K to 55K) (%) 30 85 80 75 70 65 60 55 37K to 55K 45 38 V/F control (0.2K to 55K) (%) 25 0 36 20 30 40 60 Output frequency (Hz) 120 0 36 20 30 40 50 Output frequency (Hz) 120 A general-purpose, squirrel-cage motor must be used at lower continuous operating torque in rated operation as shown in the chart since the cooling capability of the fan installed on the rotor reduces at a lower speed. (Instantaneous torque occurs) 200/220V 60Hz or 200V 50Hz in the chart indicates a motor torque reference (base frequency set in Pr.3 of the inverter) and is not the frequency of the power supply. You can also set 60Hz in a 50Hz power supply area. As shown in the chart, the 60Hz torque reference setting allows you to use the motor more efficiently as it can bring out the 100% torque of the motor continuously. 93 Standard specifications (indoor type) Installation size is the same as that of the standard motor Note that operation characteristic in the chart below can not be obtained if V/F control is employed. Standard frequency 60Hz Rotation direction (CCW) is 3 to 120Hz counterclockwise when viewed from the motor end Lead wire 4 3.7kW or less.....3 pcs. 5.5kW or more...6 or 12 pcs. Ambient temperature: 40 °C 3 to 100Hz maximum Protective structure is JP44 3 to 65Hz Continuous rated range of use (real sensorless vector control) 60Hz Torque Reference (when inverter is 0.4kW to 37kW) 60Hz Torque Reference (when inverter is 45kW to 55kW) Parameter List Maximum torque for short time (0.4kW to 3.7kW) 200 Maximum torque for short time (5.5kW to 37kW) 220V 200V 100 70 (60) 63 (50) 50 (45) 45 (40) 0 Continuous operation torque 220V 100 200V 80 70 63 Protective Functions Continuous operation torque Output torque Output torque (%) Maximum torque for short time 150 150 (%) 50 45 0.3 3 20 60 0 120 Peripheral Devices Common Specifications Standard Specifications motor running at 60Hz or more is that output torque is constant.) 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 Frequency Range Outline Dimension Drawings torque) continuous operation is possible within the range of speed ratio 1/20 (3 to 60Hz). (The characteristic of Number of Poles Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation For the 37kW or less, load torque is not need to be reduced even at a low speed and constant torque (100% Output (kW) Operation Panel speed of 3Hz is possible. (when using real sensorless vector control) Explanations of Parameters Continuous operation with 100% torque even at low 0.3 3 10 60 20 120 Output frequency (Hz) Output frequency (Hz) Values in parenthesis apply to the 0.4kW to 0.75kW Options SF-HRCA type Features Application to constant-torque motors When the vector control dedicated motor (SF-V5RU) and inverter are used, the torque characteristics are as shown below. Constant power 75 Maximum torque for short time Continuous operation torque Constant power Reduced output (%) 63 60 40 (%) 50 0 100 94 Compatibility Continuous operation torque 150 1500 Speed (r/min) 3000 0 1500 2400 Speed (r/min) 3000 Warranty 100 Maximum torque for short time Inquiry 150 When inverter is 30kW to 55kW Output torque Output torque When inverter is 1.5kW to 22kW Motor Application to vector control dedicated motors (SF-V5RU) (55kW or less) Motor torque Instructions Please contact us separately for the motor constants during real sensorless vector control. 94 Motor type S F- V 5RU Symbol Structure Symbol Structure None F Horizontal type Flange type None H 200V class 400V class F H 5K B Symbol Output (kW) Symbol Output (kW) 1K 2K 3K 5K 7K 11K 15K 18K 22K 30K 37K 45K 55K 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 1 T Symbol Electromagnetic brake None B 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 Symbol Protective device Without With Symbol None 1 3 4 None T Rated speed (r/min) 1500 1000 1000 500 With thermal protector With thermister Maximum speed (r/min) 3000 2000 3000 2000 Dedicated motor model lineup Rated speed: 1500r/min (4 pole) Model Standard horizontal type Flange type Standard Rated output (kW) Flame number type SF-V5RU(H) 1.5 90L 2.2 100L 3.7 112M 5.5 132S 7.5 132M 11 160M 15 160L 18.5 180M 22 180M 30 200L 37 200L 45 200L 55 225S — — — — — — 18.5 180L 22 200L 30 200L 37 225S SF-V5RUF(H) Standard horizontal type with brake SF-V5RU(H) B Flange type with brake SF-V5RUF(H) B Rated speed: 1000r/min (4 pole), Maximum speed: 2000r/min, speed ratio 1:2 Model Standard horizontal type Standard Rated output (kW) Flame number type SF-V5RU(H) 1 Flange type SF-V5RUF(H) 1 Standard horizontal type with brake SF-V5RU(H) B1 Flange type with brake SF-V5RUF(H) B1 1.5 100L 2.2 112M 3.7 132S 5.5 132M 7.5 160M 11 160L 15 180M — — — — — 11 180M 15 180L 18.5 200L 22 200L 30 225S — — — — — 11 225S 15 225S — — — — — Rated speed: 1000r/min (4 pole), Maximum speed: 3000r/min, speed ratio 1:3 Model Standard horizontal type Standard Rated output (kW) Flame number type SF-V5RU(H) 3 Flange type SF-V5RUF(H) 3 Standard horizontal type with brake SF-V5RU(H) B3 Flange type with brake SF-V5RUF(H) B3 1.5 112M 2.2 132S 3.7 132M 5.5 160M 7.5 160L Rated speed: 500r/min (4 pole), Maximum speed: 2000r/min, speed ratio 1:4 Model Standard horizontal type Standard Rated output (kW) Flame number type SF-V5RU(H) 4 Flange type SF-V5RUF(H) 4 Standard horizontal type with brake SF-V5RU(H) B4 Flange type with brake SF-V5RUF(H) B4 1.5 132M 2.2 160M 3.7 160L 5.5 180L — 7.5 200L — : Available models —: Not available *: Since motors with frame No. 250 or more, 400V class, speed ratio 1:4 specifications are available as special products, consult our sales office. Combination with the SF-V5RU1,3,4 , SF-THY and inverter SF-V5RU 1 (1:2) Voltage Rated speed Base frequency Maximum speed SF-V5RU 3 (1:3) 200V class 1000r/min 33.33Hz 3000r/min 1000r/min 33.33Hz 2000r/min SF-V5RU 4 (1:4) 500r/min 16.6Hz 2000r/min Motor capacity Motor frame number Motor type Inverter type Motor frame number Motor type Inverter type Motor frame number Motor type Inverter type 1.5kW 2.2kW 3.7kW 5.5kW 7.5kW 11kW 15kW 18.5kW 22kW 30kW 37kW 45kW 55kW 100L 112M 132S 132M 160M 160L 180M 180L 200L 200L 225S 250MD 250MD SF-V5RU1K1 SF-V5RU2K1 SF-V5RU3K1 SF-V5RU5K1 SF-V5RU7K1 SF-V5RU11K1 SF-V5RU15K1 SF-V5RU18K1 SF-V5RU22K1 SF-V5RU30K1 SF-V5RU37K1 SF-THY SF-THY FR-A720-2.2K FR-A720-3.7K FR-A720-5.5K FR-A720-7.5K FR-A720-11K FR-A720-15K FR-A720-18.5K FR-A720-22K FR-A720-30K FR-A720-37K FR-A720-45K FR-A720-55K FR-A720-75K 112M 132S 132M 160M 160L 180M 180L 200L*2 200L*2 225S*1 250MD*1 250MD*1 280MD*1 SF-V5RU1K3 SF-V5RU2K3 SF-V5RU3K3 SF-V5RU5K3 SF-V5RU7K3 SF-V5RU11K3 SF-V5RU15K3 SF-V5RU18K3 SF-V5RU22K3 SF-V5RU30K3 SF-THY SF-THY SF-THY FR-A720-2.2K FR-A720-3.7K FR-A720-5.5K FR-A720-7.5K FR-A720-11K FR-A720-15K FR-A720-18.5K FR-A720-22K FR-A720-30K FR-A720-37K FR-A720-45K FR-A720-55K FR-A720-75K 132M 160M 160L 180L 200L*2 225S*2 225S*2 250MD*2 280MD*2 280MD*2 280MD*2 280MD*2 280L*2 SF-V5RU1K4 SF-V5RU2K4 SF-V5RU3K4 SF-V5RU5K4 SF-V5RU7K4 SF-V5RU11K4 SF-V5RU15K4 SF-THY SF-THY SF-THY SF-THY SF-THY SF-THY FR-A720-2.2K FR-A720-3.7K FR-A720-7.5K FR-A720-7.5K FR-A720-11K FR-A720-15K FR-A720-22K FR-A720-22K FR-A720-30K FR-A720-37K FR-A720-45K FR-A720-55K FR-A720-75K Models in the shaded parts and 400V class are developed upon receipt of order. *1 The maximum speed is 2400r/min. *2 95 80% output in the high-speed range. (The output is reduced when the speed is 2400r/min or more. Contact us separately for details.) Motor specification Rated torque (N·m) 1 2 3 5 7 11 15 2.2 3.7 5.5 1.5 2.2 3.7 9.55 14.1 14.3 21.1 18 22 30 37 45 55 7.5 11 15 5.5 7.5 11 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 23.6 35.0 47.7 55 70.0 95.5 118 140 191 235 286 350 35.4 52.4 71.6 105 143 176 211 287 353 429 525 180M 180M 200L 200L 200L 2400 225S 1725 1875 3250 3625 3625 6850 Peripheral Devices Motor type SF-V5RU K Applicable inverter type FR-A720K Rated output (kW) Features z200V class (Mitsubishi dedicated motor [SF-V5RU (1500r/min series)]) 105 175 275 400 Noise *4 875 75dB or less Single-phase 200V/50Hz Single-phase 200V to 230V/60Hz 36/55W 22/28W (0.26/0.32A) (0.11/0.13A) Voltage Input *2 Three-phase 200V/50Hz Three-phase 200 to 230V/60Hz 55/71W 100/156W (0.39/0.39A) (0.47/0.53A) 85/130W (0.46/0.52A) -10 to +40°C (non-freezing), 90%RH or less (non-condensing) Totally enclosed forced draft system (Motor: IP44, cooling fan: IP23S) *3 24 33 Operation Panel Ambient temperature, humidity Structure (Protective structure) Detector Equipment Heat resistance class Vibration rank Approx. mass (kg) 85dB or less 80dB or less Encoder 2048P/R, A phase, B phase, Z phase +12VDC power supply Encoder, thermal protector, fan F V10 52 62 99 113 138 160 238 41 255 255 Parameter List Cooling fan (with thermal protector) 750 320 z400V class (Mitsubishi dedicated motor [SF-V5RUH (1500r/min series)]) Motor type SF-V5RUH K Applicable inverter type FR-A720K Rated output (kW) Rated torque (N·m) 1 2 3 5 7 11 15 2.2 2.2 3.7 1.5 2.2 3.7 7.5 11 15 5.5 7.5 11 9.55 14.1 23.6 35.0 47.7 14.3 21.1 18 22 30 37 45 55 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 70.0 95.5 118 140 191 235 286 350 35.4 52.4 71.6 105 143 176 211 287 353 429 525 180M 180M 200L 200L 200L 2400 225S 1725 1875 3250 3625 3625 6850 Maximum torque 150% 60s (×10-4kg·m2) 90L 100L 112M 132S 132M 67.5 105 175 275 400 Noise *4 Cooling fan (with thermal protector) *4 750 875 80dB or less 85dB or less Three-phase 380 to 400V/50Hz Three-phase 400 to 460V/60Hz 55/71W 100/156W (0.19/0.19A) (0.27/0.30A) 85/130W (0.23/0.26A) 75dB or less Single-phase 200V/50Hz Single-phase 200V to 230V/60Hz 36/55W 22/28W (0.26/0.32A) (0.11/0.13A) Voltage Input *2 Ambient temperature, humidity Structure (Protective structure) Detector Equipment Heat resistance class Vibration rank Approx. mass (kg) *1 *2 *3 1500 3000 *1 160M 160L Motor Rated speed (r/min) Maximum speed (r/min) Frame No. Inertia moment J -10 to +40°C (non-freezing), 90%RH or less (non-condensing) Totally enclosed forced draft system (Motor: IP44, cooling fan: IP23S) *3 24 33 41 Encoder 2048P/R, A phase, B phase, Z phase +12VDC power supply Encoder, thermal protector, fan F V10 52 62 99 113 138 160 238 Compatibility (N·m) Outline Dimension Drawings 67.5 Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation 132M Explanations of Parameters 132S Protective Functions 112M Options 100L Instructions (×10-4kg·m2) 90L 1500 3000 *1 160M 160L 255 255 320 A dedicated motor of 3.7kW or less can be run at the maximum speed of 3600 r/min. Consult our sales office when using the motor at the maximum speed. Power (current) at 50Hz/60Hz. Since a motor with brake has a window for gap check, the protective structure of both the cooling fan section and brake section is IP20. S of IP23S is an additional code indicating the condition that a cooling fan is not operated. The value when high carrier frequency is set (Pr.72 = 6, Pr.240 = 0). Warranty Rated speed (r/min) Maximum speed (r/min) Frame No. Inertia moment J Inquiry 60s (N·m) Standard Specifications Maximum torque 150% 96 Dedicated motor outline dimension drawings (1500r/min series) (standard horizontal type) SF-V5RU(H) 1K SF-V5RU(H) 2K , 3K , 5K , 7K Connector (for encoder) MS3102A20-29P Connector (for encoder) MS3102A20-29P L L R KA Exhaust R KL 50 40 B A B A D Q Suction KL QK KA Exhaust D Suction A N E M Earth (ground) terminal (M5) W Sliding distance E I C E M W For cooling fan (A, B) For motor (U, V, W) Thermal protector (G1, G2) 9 T U 40 XB F N Sliding distance ML 4 15 S F Mark for earthing (grounding) Earth (ground) terminal (M5) φ27 Frame leg viewed from above 12 Mark for earthing (grounding) E U F Direction of cooling fan wind T F XB 6.5 A φ27 Direction of cooling fan wind KG 4 KG A C H H KP A S Section AA Frame leg viewed from above Section AA A U B V W G1 G2 Earthing (grounding) terminal SF-V5RU(H) 11K , 15K , 18K , 22K SF-V5RU(H) 30K , 37K , 45K , 55K Connector (for encoder) MS3102A20-29P Connector (for encoder) MS3102A20-29P L L A D 140 110 B KA Suction D Exhaust A KG I With guard wires C H 8 φ56 A C Direction of cooling fan wind Mark for earthing (grounding) KG A KP Suction A With guard wires H KA Exhaust R KL 110 90 B φ90 R A F 11 50 XB E F 70 Direction of cooling fan wind Mark for earthing (grounding) M N Earth (ground) terminal (M8) E F XB F E N Sliding distance 4 S 4 T Frame leg viewed from above Section AA Sliding distance W U 14.5 T U Earth (ground) terminal (M12) Earthing (grounding) terminal 18.5 W E M For motor (U, V, W) S Frame leg viewed from above Section AA For cooling fan (A, B, C) Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the frame installation foot as well as the earth terminal in the terminal box. For thermal protector (G1, G2) Dimensions table (Unit: mm) SF-V5RU SF-V5RU1 SF-V5RU3 SF-V5RU4 Frame Mass Output Output Output Output No. (kg) (kW) (kW) (kW) (kW) A B C D E F H I KA KG KL(KP) L M ML N XB Q QK T U W U,V,W A,B,(C) G1,G2 1.5 — — — 90L 24 256.5 114 90 183.6 70 62.5 198 — 53 65 220(210) 425 175 — 150 56 — — 168.5 24j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 2.2 1.5 — — 100L 33 284 128 100 207 80 70 203.5 230 65 78 231 477 200 212 180 63 60 45 193 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 3.7 2.2 1.5 — 112M 41 278 135 112 228 95 70 226 253 69 93 242 478 230 242 180 70 60 45 200 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 5.5 3.7 2.2 — 132S 52 303 152 132 266 108 70 265 288 75 117 256 542 256 268 180 89 80 63 239 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4 7.5 5.5 3.7 1.5 132M 62 322 171 132 266 108 89 265 288 94 117 256 580 256 268 218 89 80 63 258 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4 11 7.5 5.5 2.2 160M 99 412 198 160 318 127 105 316 367 105 115 330 735 310 — 254 108 — — 323 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 15 11 7.5 3.7 160L 113 434 220 160 318 127 127 316 367 127 115 330 779 310 — 298 108 — — 345 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 18.5 — — — 438.5 225.5 180 363 139.5 120.5 359 410 127 139 352 790 335 — 285 121 — — 351.5 48k6 9 5.5 14 M8 M4 M4 457.5 242.5 180 363 139.5 139.5 359 410 146 139 352 828 335 — 323 121 — — 370.5 55m6 10 6 16 M8 M4 M4 483.5 267.5 200 406 159 152.5 401 — 145 487 (546) 909 390 — 361 133 — — 425.5 60m6 — — — M10 M4 M4 500 225 446 178 143 446 — 145 533 (592) 932 428 — 342 149 — — 432 — — — M10 M4 M4 22 15 11 — — 18.5 15 5.5 30 — — — 30, 45 22, 30 18.5 7.5 55 37 22, 30 11, 15 180M 180L 200L 225S 138 160 200 238 255 320 277 Note) 1. Install the motor on the floor and use it with the shaft horizontal. 2. Leave an enough clearance between the fan suction port and wall to ensure adequate cooling. Also, check that the ventilation direction of a fan is from the opposite load side to the load side. 97 Terminal Screw Size Motor R S 65m6 3 The size difference of top and bottom of the shaft center height is 4 The 400V class motor has -H at the end of its type name. 0 -0.5 SF-V5RU(H) 1KB SF-V5RU(H) 2KB , 3KB , 5KB , 7KB Connector (for encoder) MS3102A20-29P L Suction 1 M Main terminal box Earth (ground) terminal (M5) Z T B1 B2 U W G1 G2 V D φ22 E E N U F φ22 G C XB F E N Sliding distance Z T Frame leg viewed from above W Terminal box for cooling fan For motor (U, V, W) Main terminal box S S Frame leg viewed from above Section AA V B1 B2 Sliding distance X For cooling fan (A, B, C) Main terminal box U E M Earth (ground) terminal (M12) X Section AA J Mark for earthing (grounding) Direction of cooling fan wind M Earthing (grounding) terminal W A B Protective Functions XB C Options F indicates an inserting position of a bolt with hex head holes for manual opening. Earthing (grounding) terminal Instructions H KP G C A J F Earth (ground) terminal (M8) W 2 G C Mark for earthing (grounding) 1 A 1, 2 T G1 G2 Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the frame installation foot as well as the earth terminal in the terminal box. For thermal protector (G1, G2) For brake (B1, B2) Dimensions table (Unit: mm) G H I J KA KD KG KL KP — — — 90L 29 296.5 114 183.6 70 62.5 4 — — — 53 27 65 220 245 465 175 2.2 1.5 — — 100L 46 333.5 128 100 207 80 70 6.5 — — 40 65 27 78 231 265 526.5 200 212 180 3.7 2.2 1.5 — 112M 53 355 135 112 228 95 70 6.5 — — 40 69 27 5.5 3.7 2.2 — 132S 70 416 152 132 266 108 70 6.5 — — 40 75 7.5 5.5 3.7 1.5 132M 80 435 171 132 266 108 89 6.5 — — 40 94 11 7.5 5.5 2.2 160M 140 522.5 198 160 318 127 105 8 — — 15 11 7.5 3.7 160L 155 544.5 220 160 318 127 127 8 — 18.5 — — — 568.5 225.5 180 363 139.5 120.5 8 22 15 11 — — 18.5 15 5.5 30 — — — 30, 45 22, 30 18.5 7.5 55 37 22, 30 11, 15 180L 200L 225S 185 215 — 305 330 395 X XB Z Q QK T U W U,V,W A,B,(C) G1,G2 B1,B2 150 15 56 9 50 40 168.5 24j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4 4 63 12 60 45 193 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4 93 242 290 555 230 242 180 4 70 12 60 45 200 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4 27 117 256 329 655 256 268 180 4 89 12 80 63 239 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4 M4 27 117 256 329 693 256 268 218 4 89 12 80 63 258 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4 M4 50 105 56 115 330 391 845.5 310 — 254 4 108 14.5 110 90 323 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 M4 — 50 127 56 115 330 391 889.5 310 — 298 4 108 14.5 110 90 345 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 M4 — — 50 127 56 139 352 428 920 335 — 285 4 121 14.5 110 90 9 5.5 14 M8 M4 M4 M4 — — — — — — — — — — — 644.5 267.5 200 406 159 152.5 11 — — 70 145 90 487 — 546 1070 390 — 361 4 133 18.5 140 110 425.5 60m6 11 7 18 M10 M4 M4 M4 659 277 225 446 178 143 11 — — 70 145 90 533 — 592 1091 428 — 342 4 149 18.5 140 110 432 65m6 11 7 18 M10 M4 M4 M4 — B — C 90 — D — E — — Note) 1. Install the motor on the floor and use it with the shaft horizontal. 2. Leave an enough clearance between the fan suction port and wall to ensure adequate cooling. Also, check that the ventilation direction of a fan is from the opposite load side to the load side. 3 The size difference of top and bottom of the shaft center height is 4 The 400V class motor has -H at the end of its type name. — — — — — L — M — ML — N — — — — R S Terminal Screw Size 351.5 48k6 — — — — 5. Since a brake power device is a stand-alone, install it inside the enclosure. (This device should be arranged at the customer side.) * Consult our sales office. — Motor F 1.5 180M A Shaft End Compatibility Motor * Warranty SF-V5RUB SF-V5RUB1 SF-V5RUB3 SF-V5RUB4 Frame Mass Output Output Output Output No. (kg) (kW) (kW) (kW) (kW) Inquiry Direction of cooling fan wind φ56 KG A 2 D terminal box Exhaust Suction A 1, 2 Parameter List KL 1 H R 110 B Main 90 Exhaust terminal box Earthing (grounding) terminal Connector (for encoder) Terminal box for cooling fan MS3102A20-29P L A R 140 B KA 110 φ22 Main L KA Frame leg viewed from above SF-V5RU(H) 30KB , 37KB , 45KB , 55KB Terminal box for cooling fan Suction S Section AA Explanations of Parameters SF-V5RU(H) 11KB , 15KB , 18KB , 22KB A X A B C Earthing (grounding) terminal Connector (for encoder) MS3102A20-29P Sliding distance Z Section AA W For cooling fan (A, B) Frame leg viewed from above S E M ML Terminal box for cooling fan For brake (B1, B2) For motor (U, V, W) For thermal protector (G1, G2) X E Z Sliding distance XB φ90 Earth (ground) terminal (M5) F N Outline Dimension Drawings N U H E J F Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation E φ27 Operation Panel 2 KG KP XB F A 2 Direction of cooling fan wind Mark for earthing (grounding) KG F φ27 U Direction of Mark for earthing cooling fan wind (grounding) G KG A 2 2 A 1 A D 1 U 1 KL KP Exhaust Main 40 terminal box Suction D φ22 50 T B KA R B Q KA Exhaust Main QK terminal box KL Standard Specifications A R C A Peripheral Devices Terminal box for cooling fan L KP Connector (for encoder) MS3102A20-29P Terminal box for cooling fan W Features Dedicated motor outline dimension drawings (1500r/min series) (standard horizontal type with brake) 0 -0.5 98 Dedicated motor outline dimension drawings (1500r/min series) (flange type) SF-V5RUF(H) 1K SF-V5RUF(H) 2K , 3K , 5K , 7K Connector (for encoder) MS3102A20-29P LL Connector (for encoder) MS3102A20-29P LL LR KB KL Q QK LE LR LN LZ LG Section AA Q LE Suction D LB LC Suction LA B A D A KD LB B Direction of cooling fan wind B W A KD U W U T Direction of cooling fan wind S Earth (ground) terminal (M5) For cooling fan (A, B) Mark for earthing (grounding) For motor (U, V, W) For thermal protector (G1, G2) Section BB T Earth (ground) terminal (M5) Mark for earthing (grounding) LN LZ Section AA LA A B KL QK Exhaust IE LG LC KB Exhaust S Section BB A B U V W G1 G2 Earthing (grounding) terminal SF-V5RUF(H) 11K , 15K , 18K , 22K Connector (for encoder) MS3102A20-29P LL LL LG LR KB LR Q LE Exhaust Section AA LN LZ KL QK Exhaust LG Section AA Q QK LE KL LN LZ Suction B D D LB LC B LA A IE Suction A IE KB LB LC Connector (for encoder) MS3102A20-29P SF-V5RUF(H) 30K , 37K , 45K LA B B Earth (ground) terminal (M12) Mark for earthing (grounding) T A W With guard wires U Earth (ground) terminal (M8) Mark for earthing (grounding) With guard wires KD Direction of cooling fan wind U A W T KD Direction of cooling fan wind For motor (U, V, W) S S Section BB Section BB Earthing (grounding) terminal For cooling fan (A, B, C) For thermal protector (G1, G2) Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the flange section as well as the earth terminal in the terminal box. Dimensions table (Unit: mm) SF-V5RUF SF-V5RUF1 SF-V5RUF3 SF-V5RUF4 Flange Frame Output Output Output Output Number No. (kW) (kW) (kW) (kW) Mass (kg) Motor Terminal Screw Size D IE KB KD KL LA LB LC LE LG LL LN LZ LR Q QK S T U W 1.5 — — — FF165 90L 26.5 183.6 — 198.5 27 220 165 130j6 200 3.5 12 402 4 12 50 50 40 24j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 2.2 1.5 — — FF215 100L 37 207 130 213 27 231 215 180j6 250 4 16 432 4 14.5 60 60 45 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 3.7 2.2 1.5 — FF215 112M 46 228 141 239 27 242 215 180j6 250 4 16 448 4 14.5 60 60 45 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 5.5 3.7 2.2 — FF265 132S 65 266 156 256 27 256 265 230j6 300 4 20 484 4 14.5 80 80 63 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4 7.5 5.5 3.7 1.5 FF265 132M 70 266 156 294 27 256 265 230j6 300 4 20 522 4 14.5 80 80 63 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4 11 7.5 5.5 2.2 FF300 160M 110 318 207 318 56 330 300 250j6 350 5 20 625 4 18.5 110 110 90 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 15 11 7.5 3.7 FF300 160L 125 318 207 362 56 330 300 250j6 350 5 20 669 4 18.5 110 110 90 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 18.5 — — — FF350 180M 363 230 378.5 56 352 350 300j6 400 5 20 690 4 18.5 110 110 90 48k6 9 5.5 14 M8 M4 M4 FF350 180L — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — FF400 200L 406 255 485 90 346 400 350j6 450 5 22 823.5 8 18.5 140 140 110 60m6 11 7 18 M10 M4 M4 22 15 11 — — 18.5 15 5.5 30 — — — 37, 45 22, 30 18.5 7.5 160 185 — 270 290 Note) 1. Install the motor on the floor and use it with the shaft horizontal. For use under the shaft, the protection structure of the cooling fan is IP20. 2. Leave an enough clearance between the fan suction port and wall to ensure adequate cooling. Also, check that the ventilation direction of a fan is from the opposite load side to the load side. 3 The size difference of top and bottom of the shaft center height is 4 The 400V class motor has -H at the end of its type name. 99 Shaft End 0 -0.5 * Consult our sales office. U,V,W A,B,(C) G1,G2 * SF-V5RUF(H) 1KB SF-V5RUF(H) 2KB , 3KB , 5KB , 7KB Connector (for encoder) MS3102A20-29P Terminal box for cooling fan B Direction of cooling fan wind 2 U W Main terminal box U T T Earth (ground) terminal (M5) Mark for earthing (grounding) S Outline Dimension Drawings KD W Section BB A 2 A LZ 2 LA LB LC D B LA KD LN Terminal box for cooling fan For brake (B1, B2) For motor (U, V, W) For thermal protector (G1, G2) S Section BB Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation 2 1 A 1 A B KL QK For cooling fan (A, B) U V G1 G2 W A B C Earthing (grounding) terminal Earthing (grounding) terminal Operation Panel B1 B2 Standard Specifications KP LN LZ Q LE KP Suction LB LC D B Exhaust LG Main terminal box Section AA φ22 KL Q QK 1 Direction of cooling fan wind Earth (ground) terminal (M5) Mark for earthing (grounding) LR KB LE φ22 LG Exhaust Main terminal box Section AA 1 LL LR KB Peripheral Devices Connector (for encoder) Terminal box for cooling fan MS3102A20-29P LL Suction Features Dedicated motor outline dimension drawings (1500r/min series) (flange type with brake) Parameter List SF-V5RUF(H) 11KB , 15KB Connector (for encoder) MS3102A20-29P Terminal box for cooling fan LL LR LN Suction 1, 2 A 2 D LB LC B LZ KP 1 LA Q QK Explanations of Parameters KL LE φ22 KB Main LG terminal box Exhaust Section AA KD Protective Functions B A W T U Direction of cooling fan wind Earth (ground) terminal (M8) Mark for earthing (grounding) S Terminal box for cooling fan Section BB Options For motor (U, V, W) For cooling fan (A, B, C) U V B1 B2 Earthing (grounding) terminal W A B C indicates an inserting position of a bolt with hex head holes for manual opening. Earthing (grounding) terminal G1 G2 Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the flange section as well as the earth terminal in the terminal box. For thermal protector (G1, G2) For brake (B1, B2) Dimensions table Instructions Main terminal box KP LA LB LC LE LG LL LN LZ LR Q QK S T U W 220 155 165 130j6 200 3.5 12 442 4 12 50 50 40 24j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4 50 207 213 27 231 165 215 180j6 250 4 16 481.5 4 14.5 60 60 45 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4 112M 58 228 239 27 242 178 215 180j6 250 4 16 525 4 14.5 60 60 45 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4 FF265 132S 83 266 256 27 256 197 265 230j6 300 4 20 597 4 14.5 80 80 63 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4 M4 1.5 FF265 132M 88 266 294 27 256 197 265 230j6 300 4 20 635 4 14.5 80 80 63 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4 M4 5.5 2.2 FF300 160M 151 318 318 56 330 231 300 250j6 350 5 20 735.5 4 18.5 110 110 90 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 M4 7.5 3.7 FF300 160L 167 318 362 56 330 231 300 250j6 350 5 20 779.5 4 18.5 110 110 90 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 M4 — FF165 90L 31.5 2.2 1.5 — — FF215 100L 3.7 2.2 1.5 — FF215 5.5 3.7 2.2 — 7.5 5.5 3.7 11 7.5 15 11 Note) 1. Install the motor on the floor and use it with the shaft horizontal. For use under the shaft, the protection structure of the cooling fan is IP20. 2. Leave an enough clearance between the fan suction port and wall to ensure adequate cooling. Also, check that the ventilation direction of a fan is from the opposite load side to the load side. 0 3 The size difference of top and bottom of the shaft center height is -0.5 4 The 400V class motor has -H at the end of its type name. 5. Since a brake power device is a stand-alone, install it inside the enclosure. (This device should be arranged at the customer side.) U,V,W A,B,(C) B1,B2 G1,G2 Compatibility KL 27 — Warranty KD — KB Terminal Screw Size 183.6 198.5 1.5 D Shaft End Inquiry Motor Motor (Unit: mm) SF-V5RUFB SF-V5RUFB1 SF-V5RUFB3 SF-V5RUFB4 Flange Frame Mass Output Output Output Output Number No. (kg) (kW) (kW) (kW) (kW) 100 Application to vector dedicated motor (SF-THY) (frame No. 250 or more) Motor torque When the vector dedicated motor (SF-THY) and inverter of the same capacity are used and rated voltage is input, the torque characteristics are as shown below. <75[kW]> <90 to 250[kW]> Maximum torque 100 94 150 Output torque Output torque 150 Rated torque 63 125 100 Maximum torque Rated torque 83 (%) (%) 0 1.5 1500 0 1.5 2400 1500 1800 Speed (r/min) Speed (r/min) Dedicated motor model lineup Rated speed: 1500r/min (4 poles) Model Standard Type Standard horizontal type SF-THY 75 90 Rated Output (kW) 110 132 160 200 250 75 90 110 200 250 132 160 Note) Both 200V and 400V are the same type. Since motors with the speed ratio of 1:2, 1:3, and 1:4 are available as special products, consult our sales office. Motor specifications SF-THY Motor type 90 75 48.7 Applicable Inverter FR-A720- K Rated output(kW) 200V class Rated torque (kgf·m) (N·m) 477 73.0 Maximum torque (kgf·m) 150%60s (N·m) 715 1500 2400 250MD 1.1 90dB Three-phase, 200V/50Hz, 200V/60Hz, 220V/60Hz Rated speed (r/min) Maximum speed (r/min) Frame No. Inertia moment J (kg·m2) Noise Cooling fan Voltage (400V class cooling fan is available upon order) 750 Input (W) SF-THY Motor type Applicable Inverter FR-A740- K Rated output (kW) 400V class Rated torque (kgf·m) (N·m) Maximum torque (kgf·m) 150%60s (N·m) 90 75 48.7 110 90 58.4 132 110 71.4 160 132 85.7 185 160 103.9 220 200 129.9 280 250 162.3 477 73.0 572 87.6 700 107.1 840 128.5 1018 155.8 1273 194.8 1591 243.4 715 858 1050 1260 1500 1527 1909 2386 Rated speed (r/min) 2400 250MD 1.1 Maximum speed (r/min) Frame No. Inertia moment J (kg·m2) Noise Voltage Cooling fan Input (W) 101 50Hz 60Hz 400 750 1800 250MD 280MD 280MD 280MD 280L 1.7 2.3 2.3 4.0 3.8 90dB 95dB Three-phase, 200V/50Hz, 200V/60Hz, 220V/60Hz 400 750 (400V class cooling fan is available upon order) 400 400 400 750 750 750 750 1500 315H 5.0 750 1500 Features Dedicated motor outline dimension drawings (1500r/min series) 75kW to 160kW Peripheral Devices L R A PF4 Class B screw B Q KA Terminal box for cooling fan Standard Specifications Connector (for encoder) MS3102A20-29P QK Suction Direction of cooling fan wind Outline Dimension Drawings G C KG H Exhaust W F This hole is not used. J E K F Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation K1 4-φZ hole T K2 U K2 E M XB N Operation Panel S 200kW, 250kW Parameter List L A R PF4 Class B screw B Q KA Explanations of Parameters Connector (for encoder) MS3102A20-29P Terminal box for cooling fan QK Suction Protective Functions KG Direction of cooling fan wind G 0 C-1.0 H Exhaust W E XB F N 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 250MD 250MD 280MD 280MD 280MD 280L 315H 610 660 870 890 920 1170 1630 (Unit: mm) A 988.5 988.5 1049.5 1049.5 1049.5 1210.5 1343 B 340.5 340.5 397.5 397.5 397.5 416.5 565 C 250 250 280 280 280 280 315 D 557 557 607 607 607 652 717 E 203 203 228.5 228.5 228.5 228.5 254 F 174.5 174.5 209.5 209.5 209.5 228.5 355 G 30 30 30 30 30 30 35 H 775 775 845 845 845 885 965 Note) The tolerance of the top and bottom of the center shaft height *C is frame and 0 -1.0 for the 280 frame or more. J 100 100 110 110 110 110 130 0 -0.5 Motor K K1 130 168 130 168 130 181 130 181 130 181 160 160 175 428 for the 250 K2 50 50 40 40 40 75 80 L 1471 1471 1619 1619 1619 1799 2084 M 486 486 560 560 560 560 636 N 449 449 449 449 499 607 870 R 482.5 482.5 569.5 569.5 569.5 588.5 741 Z 24 24 24 24 24 24 28 XB 168 168 190 190 190 190 216 KA 157.5 157.5 210.5 210.5 210.5 214.5 306 KG 635 635 705 705 705 745 825 Q 140 140 170 170 170 170 170 Shaft End Size QK S W 110 φ75m6 20 110 φ75m6 20 140 φ85m6 22 140 φ85m6 22 140 φ85m6 22 140 φ85m6 22 140 φ95m6 25 T 12 12 14 14 14 14 14 U 7.5 7.5 9 9 9 9 9 Motor Mass (kg) Compatibility Frame No. Instructions S Dimensions table Outpur E M Warranty F This hole is not used. J K Options K1 Inquiry 4-φZ hole U K2 T K2 102 Inverter-driven 400V class motor When driving a 400V class motor by the inverter, surge voltages attributable to the wiring constants may occur at the motor terminals, deteriorating the insulation of the motor. In such a case, consider taking the following measures. (1) Rectifying the motor insulation 1. Use a "400V class inverter driven insulation-enhanced motor". Note: The four poles of the Mitsubishi standard motor (SF-JR, SB-JR) have the 400V class inverter driving insulationenhanced feature. 2. For the dedicated motor such as the constant-torque motor and low-vibration motor, use the "inverter-driven, dedicated motor". (2) Suppressing the surge voltage on the inverter side Connect a filter on the secondary side of the inverter to suppress a surge voltage so that the terminal voltage of the motor is 850V or less. When driving by the Mitsubishi inverter, connect an optional surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H) for the 55K or less and an optional sine wave filter (MT-BSL, BSC) for the 75K or more on the inverter output side. Application to special motors Motor with brake Geared motor Use the motor with brake having independent power supply for The continuous operating rotation range of this motor changes the brake, connect the brake power supply to the inverter depending on the lubrication system and maker. Especially in primary side power and make the inverter output off using the the case of oil lubrication, continuous operation in the low- output stop terminal (MRS) when the brake is applied (motor speed range only can cause gear seizure. For fast operation stop). Rattle may be heard according to the type of the brake in at higher than 60Hz, please consult the motor maker. the low speed region but it is not a fault. Synchronous motor Pole changing motor This motor is not suitable for applications of large load As this motor differs in rated current from the standard motor, variation or impact, where out-of-sync is likely to occur. Please confirm the maximum current of the motor and select the contact us when using this motor because its starting current inverter. Be sure to change the number of poles after the motor and rated current are greater than those of the standard motor has stopped. If the number of poles is changed during rotation, and will not rotate stably at low speed. the regenerative overvoltage protecion circuit may be activated to cause an inverter alarm, coasting the motor to a stop. Submersible motor The single phase motor is not suitable for variable operation by the inverter. Since the motor rated current is larger than that of the standard For the capacitor starting system, the capacitor may be motor, make selection of the inverter capacity carefully. In damaged due to harmonic current flowing to the capacitor. addition, the wiring distance between the motor and inverter For the deviation phase starting system and repulsion starting may become longer, refer to page 87 to perform wiring with a system, not only output torque is not generated at low speed cable thick enough. Leakage current may flow more than the but it will result in starting coil burnout due to failure of land motor, take care when selecting the earth leakage current centrifugal force switch inside. Replace with a three-phase breaker. motor for use. Explosion-proof motor To drive an explosion-proof type motor, an explosion-proof test of the motor and inverter together is necessary. The test is also necessary when driving an existing explosion-proof motor. The inverter is an non-explosion proof structure, install it in a safety location. 103 Single phase motor Main Differences and Compatibilities with the FR-A500(L) Series Item FR-A500(L) FR-A700 V/F control Advanced magnetic flux vector control Advanced magnetic flux vector control Real sensorless vector control Vector control (used with a plug-in option FR-A7AP) Substitutable with the copy function of the operation panel (FR-DU07) Changed/cleared functions Long wiring mode Setting is not necessary (Pr. 240 setting 10, 11) (Pr. 240 settings "10" and "11" were cleared) Parameter number change Intelligent mode selection (Pr. 60 Energy saving control selection) (Pr. 60) (Pr. 292 Automatic acceleration/deceleration) Program operation Function was cleared (Pr. 200 to Pr. 231) Terminal block Removable terminal block Removable terminal block Upward compatibility (A500 terminal block mountable) FR-PU07 FR-DU07 PU FR-PU04 (Some functions, such as parameter copy, are FR-PU04, DU04 unavailable.) Standard Specifications User initial value setting (Pr. 199) was cleared User initial value setting (Pr. 199) Outline Dimension Drawings (Pr. 160, Pr. 172 to Pr. 173) Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation Setting methods were partially changed (Pr. 160, Pr. 173 to Pr. 175) Peripheral Devices User group (16) only User group 1 (16), user group 2 (16) Operation Panel Control method Features V/F control Built into the inverter FR-A5NR (RS-485 terminals, relay output 2 points) · FR-A720-0.4K to 90K, FR-A740-0.4K to 7.5K, 18.5K to 55K, 110K, 160K are compatible in mounting dimensions For the FR-A740-11K, 15K, an optional intercompatibility attachment (FR-AAT) is necessary. · Heatsink protrusion attachment is not compatible. Also, the panel cut dimension of 3.7K or less, 200V class 30K, 55K or more, 400V class 11K, 15K, 75K or more is Compatibility Motor Instructions Options Protective Functions not compatible. Warranty Installation size Explanations of Parameters Computer link, relay output option Inquiry Plug-in Options Parameter List FR-DU04 unavailable Dedicated plug-in option (incompatible) 104 Warranty 1. Gratis warranty period and coverage [Gratis warranty period] Note that an installation period of less than one year after installation in your company or your customer's premises or a period of less than18 months (counted from the date of production) after shipment from our company, whichever is shorter, is selected. [Coverage] (1) Diagnosis of failure As a general rule, diagnosis of failure is done on site by the customer. However, Mitsubishi or Mitsubishi service network can perform this service for an agreed upon fee upon the customer's request. There will be no charges if the cause of the breakdown is found to be the fault of Mitsubishi. (2) Breakdown repairs There will be a charge for breakdown repairs, exchange replacements and on site visits for the following four conditions, otherwise there will be a charge. 1) Breakdowns due to improper storage, handling, careless accident, software or hardware design by your company and your customers. 2) Breakdowns due to modifications of the product without the consent of the manufacturer. 3) Breakdowns resulting from using the product outside the specified specifications of the product. 4) Breakdowns that are outside the terms of warranty. Since the above services are limited to Japan, diagnosis of failures, etc. are not performed abroad. If you desire the after service abroad, please register with Mitsubishi. For details, consult us in advance. 2. Exclusion of opportunity loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term, compensation to opportunity loss incurred to your company or your customers by failures of Mitsubishi products and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products and other services are not covered under warranty. 3. Repair period after production is discontinued Mitsubishi shall accept product repairs for seven years after production of the product is discontinued. 4. Terms of delivery In regard to the standard product, Mitsubishi shall deliver the standard product without application settings or adjustments to the customer and Mitsubishi is not liable for on site adjustment or test run of the product. 105 FA Center in Europe FA Center in Beijing FA Center in Korea FA Center in North America FA Center in Tianjin FA Center in Shanghai FA Center in Taiwan Outline Dimension Drawings FA Center in Hong Kong Standard Specifications FA Center in England Peripheral devices Features International FA center Parameter List Operation Panel Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Specification Explanation FA Center in ASEAN • FA Center in Beijing Mitsubishi Electric Automation (Shanghai) Ltd. Beijing Office Unit 917-918,9/F Office Tower1,Henderson Center,18 Jianguomennei Dajie,Dongcheng District,Beijing 100005 TEL. +86-10-6518-8830 FAX. +86-10-6518-8030 • FA Center in Tianjin Mitsubishi Electric Automation (Shanghai) Ltd.Tianjin Office Room No. 909,Great Ocean Building ,No.200 Shi Zilin Avenue,Hebei District,Tianjin 300143 TEL +86-22-2635-9090 FAX. +86-22-2635-9050 • FA Center in Hong Kong Mitsubishi Electric Automation (Hong Kong) Ltd. FA Division 10/F., Manulife Tower, 169 Electric Road,North Point,Hong Kong TEL.+852-2887-8870 FAX. +852-2887-7984 • FA Center in Europe Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. German Branch Gothaer Strasse 8, D-40880Ratingen, Germany TEL. +49-2102-486-0 FAX. +49-2102-486-7170 • FA Center in England Mitsubishi Electric Europe, B.V.UK Branch (Customer Technology Centre) Travellers Lane, Hatfield, Herts. AL10 8XB, UK TEL. +44-1707-276100 FAX. +44-1707-278992 Explanations of Parameters Protective Functions Options Mitsubishi Electric Automation Korea Co.,Ltd DongSeo Game Channel BLD. 2F 660-11, DeungChon- Dong, Kangseo-ku, Seoul, 157-030 Korea TEL. +82-2-3660-9607 FAX. +82-2-3663-0475 Mitsubishi Electric Asia Pte, Ltd.(Factory Automation Center ) 307 Alexandra road #05-01/02 Mitsubishi Electric Building Singapore 159943 TEL. +65-6473-2308 FAX. +65-6476-7439 Instructions • FA Center in Korea • FA Center in ASEAN Motor Setsuyo Enterprise Co., Ltd. 6F. No.105 Wu-Kung 3rd, RD, Wu-Ku Hsiang , Taipei Hsien, Taiwan TEL. +886-2-2299-2499 FAX. +886-2-2299-2509 Mitsubishi Electric Automation(Shanghai)Ltd. 2F Block 5 Building, Automation Instrumentation Plaza, 103 Cao Bao Rd., Shanghai 200233 TEL. +86-21-6484-9360 FAX. +86-21-6484-9361 Compatibility • FA Center in Taiwan • FA Center in Shanghai Warranty Mitsubishi Electric Automation, Inc. 500 Corporate Woods Parkway. Vernon Hills, IL60061 TEL. +1-847-478-2100 FAX. +1-847-478-2396 Inquiry • FA Center in North America 106
advertisement